CorvetteForum - Chevrolet Corvette Forum Discussion

CorvetteForum - Chevrolet Corvette Forum Discussion (https://www.corvetteforum.com/forums/)
-   C4 ZR-1 Discussion (https://www.corvetteforum.com/forums/c4-zr-1-discussion-50/)
-   -   Tech Info - LT5 Modifications/Rebuild Tricks (500+hp) (https://www.corvetteforum.com/forums/c4-zr-1-discussion/3005470-tech-info-lt5-modifications-rebuild-tricks-500-hp.html)

Dynomite 02-20-2012 11:44 PM

Tech Info - ZR1 Corvettes modifications and Rebuild Tricks
 
This thread includes various modifications/refurbishments of several corvettes including three 1990 ZR1s, one 1991 ZR1. one 1995 ZR1, and one 1990 L98 corvette.
The various modifications and refurbishments are described in detail with complete photo coverage for each corvette.
Some duplicate modifications are included with different photo coverage and details :thumbs:
Each of the six corvette coverages starts with a complete detail summary of modifications and refurbishments.


Individual Corvette modifications/refurbishment SUMMARY
Post 62 -1990 (#2067) LT5 Top End Rebuild (C5 Z06/Wilwood Brakes, SW Headers, Aluminum Radiator)
Post 76 - 1991 (#1427) LT5 Rebuild (C5 Z06/Wilwood Brakes, SW Headers, Ron Davis Radiator)
Post 119 - 1990 (#3032) LT5 Top End Rebuild (Fluidyne Radiator)
Post 133 - 1990 (#0072) LT5 Top End Rebuild (Ron Davis Radiator)
Post 230 - 1995 (#0186) LT5 Specific Top End Rebuild (C5 Z06/Wilwood Brakes, Fluidyne Radiator)
Post 261 - 90’ (#8550) Corvette (L98) Modifications (SW Headers, Wilwood Brakes, Ron Davis Radiator)

The 91' ZR-1 (LT5) Modifications/Rebuild Tricks starts with post 76 (Including 500+hp).
See Section C and Section E Below for specific details related to the 1991 ZR1 modifications.

The individual corvette discussions is followed by specific technical information associated with all ZR1 corvettes.


Any word or group of words underlined are Left Clickable Links

A. See Technical Index which is an INDEX of Technical Posts in this thread.

A Specific Technical INDEX is provided at the bottom of this post recognizing the Index of this Thread in A above is mostly Date based and topics created as ZR-s/LT5s were Restored/Modified. This Specific Technical INDEX (BELOW in this Post) includes ALL posts in this Thread.


B.The Solutions index is an index for Corvette Technical Posts including those Posts in the C4 ZR-1 Discussion Section and specific posts in this thread.

Post 102. SOLUTIONS Overview and Ebay Searches
Post 103. ZR1 General
Post 104. ZR1 Electrical
Post 105. ZR1 Engine
Post 106. ZR1 Drive Train
Post 107. Awesome
Post 108. ZR1 Engine Fuel, Lubrication, Cooling, and Exhaust
Post 109. ZR1 Specifications, Restorations, Air, Audio, Lifts, and Road Trips
Post 110. ZR1 Engine (LT5) Bolts and Hydraulics

C. See LT5 Specific Rebuild Tricks which includes complete photo coverage of an LT5 Rebuild including engine removal and installation in this thread.

D. Related other threads found in the C4 ZR-1 Discussion Section are as follows:

Tech Info - LT5/ZR-1 Technical Calculations LT5 Technical Calculations
Tech Info - LT5 Eliminated Systems LT5 Eliminated Systems
Tech Info - Marc Haibeck on LT5 Eliminated Secondaries and Associated Anomalies
Marc Haibeck on LT5 Eliminated Secondaries and Associated Anomalies
Tech Info - LT5 Added Systems LT5 Added Systems
Tech Info - Removing a Pressed In Fitting Removing a Pressed In Fitting
Tech Info - LT5 New Rebuild Issues (Lifters and Camshafts) LT5 New Rebuild Issues (Lifters and Camshafts)
Tech Info - LT5 Timing Chain and Engine Pulses LT5 Timing Chain Calculations
Tech Info - LT5/ZR-1 Technical Calculations LT5/ZR-1 Technical Calculations
Ben's 90' Complete Restoration including the rebuild of an LT5 bottom to top Ben's 90' Restoration

HELP threads:
For additional Help Posting Photos Creating Albums and Posting Photos
For additional Help in creating Posts using Link References Reference Link Names

E. Overview of ZR-1 (LT5) Modifications/Rebuild Tricks (500+hp)

https://cimg2.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...dd214abb56.jpg

1. Systems added included LT5X Head Studs and an Oil Catch Can for the PCV system.
2. Several systems were eliminated including the secondaries, TB coolant, Air Injection system, and Vacuum system.
3. LT5 engine was highly ported top end with reground camshafts installed.
4. Included in this thread are the modifications of a 90' Corvette (L98).

1. LT5X Studs (Randy Woods)........................................ ...2. 200 Amp Alternator
https://cimg0.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...c584c677d8.jpghttps://cimg6.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...0e5af405a3.jpg
3. Eliminated Systems (Secondaries)............................4. Plenum, TB Coolant eliminated
https://cimg7.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...d3c6caec5d.jpghttps://cimg8.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...8c4aff133e.jpg

5. Reground Camshafts (Pete)...........................6. Air Horn, Plenum, IH, Head Porting (Locobob)
https://cimg6.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...3b47627403.jpghttps://cimg7.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...de1ca2ceac.jpg

6. Specific Technical INDEX presently being created
Post 280 - Specific Technical Index

7. Technical Index Post Updates
Post # ………………………..Date

Last UPDATE of post 1 Feb, 2024

Dynomite 02-20-2012 11:44 PM

General Technical Index By Restoration
 
Technical Index

INDEX of Technical Posts for ZR-1 (LT5) Modifications/Rebuild Tricks.
Left click on any
Link Name as described below.

This Index is organized by Headings from General Information (Posts 3 - 6) to Engine Cooling (Posts 7 - 14), Lifting (Posts 15 - 16), Lubrication (Posts 18 - 20), Camshaft Timing (Posts 21 - 28), Top End Restoration (Posts 29 - 34), Transmission (Posts 35 - 39), Drive Train & Brakes (Posts 40 - 44), Exhaust System (Posts 45 - 47), Electrical/MISC (Posts 48 - 59), Audio (Posts 60 - 61), 1990 LT5 Specific Rebuild Tricks (Posts 62 - 69), Bling and Performance (Posts 70 - 75), 1991 LT5 Specific Rebuild Tricks (Posts 76 - 96), TIPS (Posts 97 - 99), Tools and LT5 Differences (Posts 100 - 101), Solutions (Posts 102 - 110), Ebay Searches and Acronyms (Post 111), Additional Information (Posts 113 - 117), Miscellaneous Topics (Posts 118 - 130), Forum Albums and Resizing Photos(Posts 131 - 132), Other Topics (Posts 133 - 140), Questions and Answeres (Posts 141 - 145), LT5 Eliminated and Added Systems (Posts 146 - 148), LT5 Systems (Posts 149 - 180), 1991 LT5 Spare Engine Rebuild/Assembly (Posts 181 - 200), ZR-1/LT5 Technical Calculations, (Posts 201 - 215), Eliminated Systems and Added Systems (Posts 216 - 220), LT5 Lifters, Camshafts, and Valves (Posts 221 - 229), 1995 Top End Restoration (Posts 230 - 250), Summaries (Posts 251 - 260), Standard Corvette (L98) (Posts 261 - 280).

Individual Corvette modifications/refurbishment SUMMARY
Post 62 - 1990 (#2067) LT5 Top End Rebuild (C5 Z06/Wilwood Brakes, SW Headers, Aluminum Radiator)
Post 76 - 1991 (#1427) LT5 Rebuild (C5 Z06/Wilwood Brakes, SW Headers, Ron Davis Radiator)
Post 119 - 1990 (#3032) LT5 Top End Rebuild (Fluidyne Radiator)
Post 133 - 1990 (#0072) LT5 Top End Rebuild (Ron Davis Radiator)
Post 230 - 1995 (#0186) LT5 Specific Top End Rebuild (C5 Z06/Wilwood Brakes, Fluidyne Radiator)
Post 261 - 90’ (#8550) Corvette (L98) Modifications (SW Headers, Wilwood Brakes, Ron Davis Radiator)

GENERAL
Post 3 - LT5/ZR-1 Fluids
Post 4 - General Bolt Length, Bolt Torque, Loctite, and Tools
Post 5 - Use of thread Lubricants, Loctite and Sealants
Post 6 - Manual Supplement, Secondary Diagnostics, Sensors, and Prom Codes.

ENGINE COOLING
Post 7 - Thermostats, Fans, Water Pump, and Radiators
Post 8 - LT5 Radiator and Initial Coolant Fill Tricks
Post 9 - HVAC Temperature Display And Radiator Efficiency Test Runs
Post 10 - Water Pump, Coolant Temperatures, and Coolant
Post 11 - Radiator Debris Screens
Post 12 - Getting The Air Out of the Coolant System
Post 13 - TB Coolant Discussion
Post 14 - Coolant Characteristics (Mix, Pressure, Elevation)
Post - Eliminated TB Coolant Photos and Details

LIFTING
Post 15 - Lifting The LT5
Post 16 - Lifting and Towing the ZR-1
Post 17 - Kudos

LUBRICATION
Post 18 - Engine Lubrication System Functional Discussion
Post 19 - LT5 Lubrication Tricks and Replace Dip Stick Handle
Post 20 - Potential Oil Leaks and the OPRV Cover Plate

CAMSHAFT TIMING
Post 21 - LT5 Camshaft Specifications and Camshaft General Timing (pinning)
Post 22 - LT5 Camshaft Specific Timing (degree wheel)
Post 23 - LT5 Camshaft Timing Additional Tricks
Post 24 - LT5 Timing Diagrams and Timing Chain Effective Lengths
Post 25 - LT5 Timing Chains and Sprockets
Post 26 - Setting/Installing the Chain Tensioners Tricks
Post 27 - Cam Cover Installation Tricks
Post 28 - PCV system (Need for Oil Catch Can)

TOP END RESTORATION
Post 29 - Plenum Pull
Post 30 - LT5 IH (RC Injectors), Fuel Rails, Plenum Install Tricks
Post 31 - Vacuum Systems 90' and 91' (Secondary and Cruize/HVAC)
Post 32 - Eliminated IH Housing and Throttle Body (TB) Coolant system Tricks
Post 33 - Eliminated Secondary Throttles/shafts Tricks
Post 34 - Stainless Steel Air Box and Air Filter (L98 and LT5)

TRANSMISSION
Post 35 - Pilot Bearing
Post 36 - ZR-1 Transmission Install and Lift Tricks
Post 37 - Vibration Issues Diagnosis
Post 38 - Throwout Bearings and Clutch Forks
Post 39 - C4 Beam Plates and Installation

DRIVE TRAIN AND BRAKES
Post 40 - Tires and Selective Ride Control
Post 41 - ZR-1 (90' and 91') Wilwood Rotors and C4 to C5-Z06 Conversion
Post 42 - Going from 3:45 to 4:10 Differential
Post 43 - LT5 Final Inspection including, Testers, Brake Tricks
Post 44 - Accessories

EXHAUST SYSTEM
Post 45 - Exhaust System Replace with Headers
Post 46 - Exhaust Headers Locking Bolt Tricks
Post 47 - Installing the LT5 with Headers and the O2 Sensors Functionality

ELECTRICAL/MISC
Post 48 - 1990 and 1991 Fuses/Additional 12V Connector
Post 49 - Backup Tail Light Switch and Alternators
Post 50 - Replacing the Windshield and Wiper Motor
Post 51 - CMHSL LED, Full Power Key and Alternator Pulley
Post 52 - Starter, Starter Relay, Wiring Harness, Battery, and Plugs Tricks
Post 53 - Electrical Ground Connections and Installing Starter Relay
Post 54 - Ignition Key Codes and Clearing 1990 INFL REST Codes
Post 55 - ALDL Fault Code Reader/Eraser
Post 56 - ABS, Ride Control, CCM, SIR Code Definitions
Post 57 - ZR1 90'-95' ECM Interchangeability and CODES 90' TO 92'
Post 58 - Recharging The AC System
Post 59 - Crankshaft Sensor and Camshaft Sensor

Audio
Post 60 - Bose Speaker Amp Options TIPS
Post 61 - Typical Low Mileage ZR-1 Restoration Starting With Audio

1990 (#2067) LT5 SPECIFIC TOP END REBUILD TRICKS
Three 1990 Top Ends were rebuilt and best tricks linked here
UL LOSE, UWLNTWN, ULNOTWN

Post 62 - 1990 (#2067) LT5 Top End Rebuild (Including Wilwood Front Brakes)
Post 63 - Removing Plenum (including the 10 minute Plenum Removal)
Post 64 - Inspection, Testing and Reconditioning the Valley, Starter, and Coils
Post 65 - INFL REST grounds and Alternator Connector Boot
Post 66 - Secondary Functional Test and Reconditioning the Secondary Actuators
Post 67 - Removing Cam Covers (Engine In Car) for Inspections of Camshafts
Post 68 - Eliminating TB Coolant and Air Induction, Added Oil Catch Can and Painting
Post 69 - Summary of 90' Reconditioning/Modifications

BLING AND PERFORMANCE
Post 70 - Bling (Carter and Others)
Post 71 - 1991 ZR-1 (LT5) Performance
Post 72 - 1991 ZR-1 (LT5) Modifications (500+ HorsePower)
Post 73 - Summary of LT5 Restorations
Post 74 - What Fluids to use in the ZR-1
Post 75 - 1990 ZR-1 (LT5) Performance/Reconditioning/Modifications

1991 LT5 SPECIFIC REBUILD TRICKS
Post 76 - 1991 (#1427) LT5 Rebuild Tricks
Post 77 - New Piston Sleeve and Piston
Post 78 - Timing Chain Guides Installation
Post 79 - Timing Chain Idler Sprocket Lubrication and Installation
Post 80 - Front Cover, OPRV Cover, Water Pump, Harmonic Balancer
Post 81 - Oil Pan (Oil level and Knock Sensor), Flywheel, Clutch, Bell Housing
Post 82 - Checking for Oil Leaks/Making your own SS Braided Oil Lines
Post 83 - Installing Heads and Camshafts
Post 84 - Camshaft Timing
Post 85 - Camshaft Timing (Locking the Camshafts) and Camshaft Lubrication
Post 86 - Cam Covers (Filters and Wear Strips)
Post 87 - Installing Headers and Exhaust
Post 88 - Installing Engine In ZR1
Post 89 - ECM Chip and Other Electrical Connectors
Post 90 - Alternator, AC Pump, Power Steering Pump
Post 91 - Installing Fuel Rails and Ignition Coils
Post 92 - Installing Plenum, TB, and Air Cleaner
Post 93 - Filling With Coolant and the Air Locked Water Pump
Post 94 - Preliminary Starting Checks
Post 95 - Engine Running First Time Checks
Post 96 - Summary of 91' Reconditioning/Modifications

TIPS
Post 97 - Checking for abnormal noise and leaks LT5 engine
Post 98 - Number 8 Spark Plug Removal and Test Drive with Jeff Gordon
Post 99 - Adapting 91 IH to 90 Heads

TOOLS AND LT5 DIFFERENCES
Post 100 - ZR-1 and LT5 Tools
Post 101 - Differences between 90', 91' and 95' ZR-1s and Engines

SOLUTIONS
Post 102 - SOLUTIONS Overview and Ebay Searches
Post 103 - ZR1 General
Post 104 - ZR1 Electrical
Post 105 - ZR1 Engine
Post 106 - ZR1 Drive Train
Post 107 - Awesome
Post 108 - ZR1 Engine Fuel, Lubrication, Cooling, and Exhaust
Post 109 - ZR1 Specifications, Restorations, Air, Audio, Lifts
Post 110 - ZR1 Engine (LT5) Bolts and Hydraulics
Post 111 - Ebay Searches and Acronyms
Post 112 - Kudos

ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
Post 113 - Fuel Trim and Closed/Open Loop Operation
Post 114 - Kudos
Post 115 - Question Regarding Air Locked Water Pump
Post 116 - LT5 Air Locked Water Pump Simplified
Post 117 - LT5 PCV System

Miscellaneous Topics
Post 118 - Three Things To Do For A No Start
Post 119 - Last 1990 (#3032) ZR-1 Sold and ZR1 Inspection TIPS
Post 120 - Thermostats, Fans, Radiators and Coolant Filling
Post 121 - Finding A Vacuum Leak
Post 122 - Wilwood C5 Z06 Brake Conversion with Sawblades
Post 123 - Rebuilding Belt Tensioner
Post 124 - Checking Lubrication System
Post 125 - SS Braided Oil Cooler Hoses and Fittings
Post 126 - Getting The Air Out Of Coolant System
Post 127 - Replacing Bolts In Various Components and Use of Loctite
Post 128 - Activating Secondaries
Post 129 - Engine Has To Be Pulled To Time Camshafts
Post 130 - Cam Cover Filters

FORUM ALBUMS AND RESIZING PHOTOS
Post 131 - Resizing Photos for Forum Posts and Creating Reference Links
Post 132 - Using Forum Photo Albums……Resizing photos

Other Topics
Post 133 - Minimum Restoration of a 1990 (#0072) ZR-1
Post 134 - Continued........Minimum Restoration of a 1990 (#0072) ZR-1
Post 135 - Replacing the Heater Core and Heater Hose Connection
Post 136 - Hose Clamps, Screws/U-Nuts, Magnetic Sockets
Post 137 - Using Permatex and Headliner Glue
Post 138 - Showroom Mats for ZR-1s
Post 139 - Bose Speaker Amps and CDM Replace
Post 140 - Cylinder Numbers and Firing Order

Questions and Answeres
Post 141 - Exhaust Hangers Question
Post 142 - Exhaust Hangers Defined
Post 143 - Kudos
Post 144 - Replacing the Coolant (LT5)
Post 145 - how often do you change your oil and other fluids

LT5 Eliminated Systems
Post 146 - LT5 Eliminated Systems

ZR1 Added Systems
Post 147 - ZR1 Added Systems including Differential Case Drain
Post 148 - Elite Engineering Oil Catch Can

LT5 Systems
Post 149 - Engine with bottom end intact
Post 150 - How to Remove Injector Housing Coolant Manifold Torx-30 Bolts
Post 151 - Starter Rebuild
Post 152 - Clutch Master and Clutch Slave Cylinder
Post 153 - Spark Plug Wire Separators
Post 154 - The Battery Disconnect Switch and Having an Operational Secondary Full Power Switch
Post 155 - Six things I ALWAYS do on any LT5.
Post 156 - Replacing the Serpentine Belt
Post 157 - LT5 Engine Cooling Issues on Hot Days
Post 158 - LT5 Engine Optimum Operating Temperatures
Post 159 - Checking Camshaft Timing Engine In Car
Post 160 - PCV Upgrades
Post 161 - Secondary Chain Guide Rattle
Post 162 - Cam Cover Chain Guides, Filters, and A136
Post 163 - Camshaft Identification
Post 164 - MSD 8224
Post 165 - Painting Top End
Post 166 - Battery Disconnect
Post 167 - 1990 and 1991 Plenums and TB Coolant Blocking at IH
Post 168 - Installing a Ron Davis Radiator and Testing
Post 169 - Reserved 21
Post 170 - Abbreviations
Post 171 - Reserved 23
Post 172 - Reserved 24
Post 173 - Reserved 25
Post 174 - Reserved 26
Post 175 - Reserved 27
Post 176 - Reserved 28
Post 177 - Reserved 29
Post 178 - Reserved 30
Post 179 - Horsepower Losses from Angular Acceleration of Rotational Mass
Post 180 - Tools to Carry in the ZR-1

1991 LT5 Spare Engine Rebuild/Assembly
Post 181 - The Rebuild and Assembly of a 1991 Spare LT5
Post 182 - Bottom End Restoration Including Oil Pan
Post 183 - Starter Rebuild
Post 184 - Restoration of the Ignition Coils, plugs, Wires
Post 185 - Painting Plenum, TB, Injector Housing and Cam Covers
Post 186 - Restoration of the Secondary System including the linkages
Post 187 - Restoration of the Injectors
Post 188 - Restoration of the Heads
Post 189 - Head Installation
Post 190 - Finding TDC and Locating 51 deg BTDC
Post 191 - Water Pump, Power Steering Pump, and Injector Housing Installation
Post 192 - Injector Housing TB Coolant Blocking
Post 193 - Alternator and AC Compressor Installation
Post 194 - Camshaft Timing
Post 195 - Installation of the DIS Module
Post 196 - Installation of Secondary Vacuum System
Post 197 - Plenum Installation
Post 198 - Installation of Flywheel (Including Pilot Bearing), Clutch and Bell Housing
Post 199 - Removal and Installation of Harmonic Balancer/Front Cover
Post 200 - Compression Testing

ZR-1/LT5 Technical Calculations
Post 201 - ZR-1/LT5 Technical Calculations
Post 202 - Tech Info - LT5 Horsepower and Torque Calculations
Post 203 - Tech Info - ZR1 Differential Gearing and Vehicle Speed Calculations
Post 204 - Tech Info - ZR1 Wind Force, Rolling Resistance, Drivetrain Loss Calculations
Post 205 - Tech Info - LT5 Camshaft Timing Calculations
Post 206 - Tech Info - LT5 Pressure Drop In Oil Lines Calculations
Post 207 - Tech Info - RC SL4-205 injectors (500+ hp) Calculations
Post 208 - Tech Info - LT5 Summary of Camshaft Timing
Post 209 - Tech Info - LT5 Timing Diagrams
Post 210 - Tech Info - L98 Frisbee Horsepower
Post 211 - Tech Info - LT5 Coolant Flow Calculations
Post 212 - Calculating Alternator Pulley Diameter
Post 213 - Technical Calculations Reserved 1
Post 214 - Technical Calculations Reserved 2
Post 215 - Camshaft Compression of Lifter

Eliminated Systems and Added Systems
Post 216 - Eliminated Systems and Added Systems
Post 217 - Tech Info - Marc Haibeck on LT5 Eliminated Secondaries and Associated Anomalies
Post 218 - Tech Info - LT5 Added Systems
Post 219 - Elite Engineering Oil Catch Can Installation Details
Post 220 - Hans Meyer Check List with Additional Comments

LT5 Lifters, Camshafts, and Valves
Post 221 - Tech Info - LT5 New Rebuild Issues (Lifters, Camshafts, and Valves)
Post 222 - Lifters
Post 223 - Lifters and Valve Stem dimensions (reground valves)
Post 224 - Valve Stem Clearance Measurement Tool
Post 225 - Camshaft and Lifter Measurements (Stock and Regrind) all in inches
Post 226 - Valve Stem Clearance Measurements For Regrind Camshafts using Mellings JB 2236 Lifter
Post 227 - Regrind Camshafts Performance
Post 228 - Bad Z
Post 229 - Valve Stem Clearance Measurements For Stock Camshafts using Mellings JB 2236 Lifters

1995 (#0186) LT5 SPECIFIC TOP END REBUILD TRICKS
A 1995 Top End was rebuilt and best tricks linked here

Post 230 - 1995 (#0186) LT5 SPECIFIC TOP END REBUILD TRICKS
Post 231 - Clean Up of Valley, Installation of Battery Disconnect Switch and Coils
Post 232 - Installation of Rebuilt Starter, New Alternator, and Braided SS Oil Cooler Lines
Post 233 - Installation of Wilwood Rotors and C4 to C5-Z06 Conversion
Post 234 - Installation of New Secondary Port Vacuum System Lines
Post 235 - Installation of Reconditioned Injectors with New "O" Rings
Post 236 - New PCV Connections. Installation/Relocation of Plug Wires and New Spark Plugs
Post 237 - Blocking TB Coolant, Fluidyne Radiator and Thermostats
Post 238 - Reconditioning and Installation of Plenum with SS Allen Head Bolts
Post 239 - Addition of Billet Aluminum Power Steering, Water Pump Pulleys
Post 240 - New Rear Wheel Bearings and Half Shaft U-Joints
Post 241 - Rebuilt Black Label Transmission Installed and New Driveshaft U-Joints
Post 242 - Installation of Elite Oil Catch Can
Post 243 - Replacing the Coils
Post 244 - INJ1 Fuse Keeps Blowing
Post 245 - Under the Plenum
Post 246 - The Four Minute Plenum Installation
Post 247 - 1995 ZR-1 #186 with Haibeck Chip
Post 248 - K40 Front and Rear Radar Detection System
Post 249 - Oil Pressure Regulating Valve Cover Plate
Post 250 - All Aluminum Alternator Pulley

Summaries
Post 251 - Thermostat and Thermostat Housing Discussion
Post 252 - Operational Engine Stand
Post 253 - Buy High.....Sell Low
Post 254 - Windshields
Post 255 - Reserved
Post 256 - Bilstein Shock Applications and Self Alignment
Post 257 - Wheels
Post 258 - Winter Storage
Post 259 - Typical ZR-1 Restorations
Post 260 - Summary of ZR1 Restorations including 95' Crate Engine

Standard Corvette (L98)
Post 261 - 90’ (#8550) Corvette (L98) Modifications
Post 262 - Oil Cooler Modifications
Post 263 - Timing Chain Cover/Water pump Interference
Post 264 - Air Pump Eliminated
Post 265 - Aluminum Finned Oil Pan including New Milodon 18307 Oil Pump Pickup
Post 266 - Rebuilding Chrome Alternator
Post 267 - SS Air Intake
Post 268 - Installation of C4 Beam Plates
Post 269 - Oil Pan Drain Plug and Differential Case Drain
Post 270 - Wilwood 6 Piston Brakes with 13" Rotors and Wheel Alignment

Specific Summaries
Post 271 - Modifications Summary 5 ZR-1s
Post 272 - Crate Engine
Post 273 - 95' Drive/Half Shaft U-Joints, Rear Wheel Bearings
Post 274 - Cooler Termostats, Thermostat Modifications and Engine RPM
Post 275 - The Best Belt Tensioner Pulley
Post 276 - Air Filter Installation
Post 277 - Reserved
Post 278 - 30K mile Lt5 Parts Value
Post 279 - ZR-1 Check List
Post 280 - What To Look For When Buying A ZR-1

Additional Technical Information
Post 281 - The Improved LT5 Fuel Pressure Regulator
Post 282 - Changing Out Improved Fuel Pressure Regulator (IFPR)
Post 283 - Phil's (Jagdpanzer) Fuel Pressure Regulator Solution
Post 284 - New Secondary Port Throttle Vacuum System
Post 285 - Alternators
Post 286 - Cooler Thermostats, Thermostat Modifications, Engine RPM, and Fans
Post 287 - Replacing the Serpentine Belt
Post 288 - Water Pump Cavitation
Post 289 - Ron Davis Radiator Installation
Post 290 - Cayenne Pepper Keeps Mice Away
Post 291 - Reserved
Post 292 - Locating Relays Above Drivers Side footwell
Post 293 - Bypassing Clutch Safety Switch
Post 294 - Camshaft Abnormal Wear
Post 295 - Reserved
Post 296 - Oil Changes
Post 297 - VIN Number
Post 298 - Amsoil 10W-40
Post 299 - Infl Rest Inside The Car
Post 300 - Acceleration
Post 301 - ZR-1 Fluids
Post 302 - Kudos
Post 303 - Reserved
Post 304 - Loctite 518
Post 305 - Loctite 518/A136 Discussion
Post 306 - Fuel Pumps Billet Aluminum Connection
Post 307 - Removal of Front Bumper Facia
Post 308 - Reserved
Post 309 - Reserved
Post 310 - Parts Estimated Value
Post 311 - CD Player Lens Cleaner
Post 312 - Reserved
Post 313 - Reserved
Post 314 - Reserved
Post 315 - VATS Keys
Post 316 - Double Dunn Heads

Last UPDATE of post 2 Feb, 2024

Dynomite 02-20-2012 11:44 PM

LT5/ZR-1 Fluids
 
LT5/ZR-1 Fluids

HammerZR1 initiated this list of ZR1/LT5 Fluids and I added photos and additional information :thumbs:

ENGINE OIL (LT5) ................. TRANSMISSION OIL (ZF S6-40)..........DIFFERENTIAL OIL Limited slip

8.6 quarts (with filter change) .....4.4 pints - Castrol TWS 10W-60 ............3.2 pints - Mobil 1 - 75W-90 Gear Lube
Amsoil 10W-40 AMO Motor Oil
Bosch 3401 Filter
FRAM TG 3985 Filter
Mobile 1 M1-207 Filter
https://cimg8.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...00970babe8.jpg...................https://cimg3.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...7e39289f75.jpg..................https://cimg4.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...e6438cbb72.jpg

https://cimg7.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...0f5003d62d.jpg

Amsoil 10w-40 Recommendation/Analysis

Amsoil 10w-40

For L98 engine use Mobile 1 Synthetic 10W-30 and a Mobile-1 M1-111 Oil Filter.

See Notes below regarding oil change intervals.

Amsoil SAE 10W-40
Castrol 10W-60

1. CAPACITIES
Engine (LT5), with filter change...............8.6 quarts
Cooling System (ZR1), Initial Fill.......18.0 quarts
Manual Transmission (ZF S6-40)........4.4 pints
Differential (ZR1)............................3.2 pints

2. Fill and Drain Plug TORQUES
Oil Pan Drain Plug (14 mm Box wrench).....38 ft-lbs (5/8-18 Thread).
Actually a bit less torque with a bit of Permatex on the washer/threads.
The Oil Drain Plug is a Helicoil insert which is installed to reduce wear and tear on an Aluminum Thread.
A 14 mm open end flex head Ratchet works perfectly on Oil Drain Plug.

https://cimg9.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...6e9b4d41a0.jpghttps://cimg1.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...6db819b867.jpg

3. Manual Transmission Allen Plugs use 17 mm Allen Wrench (see Note D Below).
Fill Plug Allen wrench torque........26 ft-lbs
Drain Plug Allen wrench torque.....26 ft-lbs
Actually a bit less torque with a bit of Permatex on the washer/threads.

4. Differential Fill Plug use 3/8 inch Allen Wrench.
Always use a Fluid Pump when adding fluid to the Differential or Transmission.

Differential Fluid Change Intervals
https://cimg1.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...1daabe9451.jpghttps://cimg3.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...a9fff2227b.jpg

5. Adding the Differential Oil Drain Plug to the ZR1 differential is a great idea.
The original ZR1 differential has no drain plug and the only way to remove differential fluid is to suck said fluid from the differential Allen Head Fill Plug. See Item #4 LT5 Added Systems

Install item # 584029 DIFFERENTIAL DRAIN PLUG KIT can be obtained from Corvette Central (includes 1/8 inch pipe tap, 11/32 drill bit) Differential Drain Plug Kit

Use 1/8 inch Aluminum allen head pipe plug you have to purchase separately 1/8 inch allen head pipe plugs

The kit provides a template that puts the hole just left of the center bolt in the valley of the differential. Just drill the hole gently and the differential oil and any shavings will drain completely. Then tap and install 1/8 inch Aluminum allen head pipe plug with a bit of Permatex on the threads. Do not tap too deeply to make sure the pipe plug is tight and flush when finished.

Flush a bit with Mobile 1 75/90 gear lube after completing the tap before installing the 1/8 inch allen head pipe plug.

6. RADIATOR COOLANT
You want to only use the green coolant. They have it at Napa and it meets 1825M GM Spec.

For Zerex the first gallon is called Regular Green Coolant (GM 1825M), the second gallon is called Original Formula (GM 1825M). Zerex ZXRU1 is 50-50 and Zerex ZX001 is undiluted. The third gallon is NAPA coolant (GM 1825M).

https://cimg1.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...7eaa25e0d2.jpgORhttp://ecx.images-amazon.com/images/I/31jb-ZubjrL.jpgORhttp://partimages.genpt.com/partimages/213967.jpg https://cimg0.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...1217db4bfd.jpg



7. OIL FILTER
I concur with HammerZR1 on all fluids cited above except I am using the Mobile 1 M1-207 oil filter.
Mobile 1 M1-207 Oil Filter

8. BRAKE and CLUTCH FLUID
For brake and clutch fluid Dot 3 or Dot 4 (Prefer Dot 4).

Notes:
A. I change engine oil every 2,000 - 3,000 miles (5,000 miles if cross country driving).
B. ZF Doc says until someone invents a copper magnet, change the ZF S6-40 6-speed transmission oil at 10,000 - 12,000 mile intervals so as to minimize the amount of deposits of the suspended spent synchronizer material from collecting in critical component contact surface areas.
C. On previously owned cars/trucks, I change engine, transmission, differential fluid and coolant immediately upon purchase (extracting old brake/clutch fluid and cleaning brake/clutch fluid reservoirs). This assures proper fluid levels and reduces comtaminants accumulated over the previous life of the vehicle.


D. Be careful on inserting the 17 mm Allen Wrench into the Transmission Drain Plug. That Transmission Drain Plug often has road rash which prevents complete insertion of the 17 mm Allen. If not completely inserted you may strip the Allen part of the Drain Plug.
Snap-On 17mm Allen/3/8 socket

Dress up the Allen part of the Drain Plug and then tap the 17 mm Allen into the plug using a small hammer for full insertion before applying a torque on the 17 mm Allen Wrench to remove the Drain Plug. I use a box wrench that fits over the long end of the 17 mm Allen Wrench for additional leverage making sure you keep the 17 mm Allen Wrench fully inserted in the Drain Plug you are removing.

17 mm Allen Wrench
https://cimg2.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...292323e743.jpg

E. Oil Viscosity.

Newer engines are built with tighter tolerances (use lighter oil).
High Mileage engines lose tolerances (use heavier oil).
Hot climates (hotter engines) thin oil (use heavier oil).
Cold climates (colder engines) thicken oil (use lighter oil).
Often starting colder engines (lighter oil).
Running engines for long hauls once started (use heavier oils).
Newer synthetic oils do not loose viscosity with use (use lighter oils).
In Fl or CA coastal (use heavier oils).
In SD winter ....definitley (use thinner oils).
Frequent oil changes (use thinner oils).
Infrequent oil changes (use heavier oils).

F. Changing Engine Oil on the LT5.
Let the engine sit over night so you can remove the oil filter without a mess as Mike suggests. Yes...some oil filters have a check valve of sorts but on Mobile 1 M1-207s the filter can be removed without any oil mess after sitting over night.

The LT5 engine and oil cooler will hold about 12 quarts of oil of which you drain about 8-9 quarts on an oil change.
So you get about 70 % of the old oil changed on an oil change. Next time you will get 70% of that 30% old old oil (9% of old old oil remaing), and on the third change you will get 70% of the 9% old old old oil remaining with 3% of old old old oil remaining. And so it goes :D

The oil pick up screen in the LT5 Oil Pan sits about 1/4 inch from the bottom of the pan (has nothing to do with changing oil :p). When you drain oil (depending on how the ZR1 is sitting) you will have about 1/4 inch of oil in the bottom of the oil pan that does not drain.

On a ZR1 just purchased I will change oil twice within a week or so of each change to get down to the 9% of original "unknown" oil remaining.

Last UPDATE of post 3 Sep, 2022

Dynomite 02-20-2012 11:44 PM

General Bolt Length, Bolt Torque, Loctite, and Tools
 
General Bolt Length, Bolt Torque, Loctite, and Tools

1. In General bolt correct length checks can be determined by inserting the bolt (without turning) to the threaded portion of the receiver. For an 8 mm bolt, you should have approximately 7/16 to 1/2 inch of bolt showing (11 to 12.7 mm or 13 to 16 threads on a 1.25 t/mm bolt).

2. General Maximum Bolt Torque for steel bolts in aluminum if bolt torque is not specified.
Always use the correct size Drive Torque Wrench (1/4" Drive, 3/8" Drive, 1/2" Drive).
89 in-lbs on 6 mm bolts
19 ft-lbs on 8 mm bolts
30 ft-lbs on 10 mm bolts
40 ft-lbs on 12 mm bolts

LT5 Bolt Charts with suggested bolt torque, loctite and antiseize application information are included above. The free chart from Jerry's Gaskets which provided the basic LT5 component bolt sizes has been considerably modified into two charts above. The charts have been organized by function.

https://cimg3.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...a3209de80c.jpg
https://cimg4.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...4dcc4fd641.jpg

3. Loctite.
Red loctite 262 on all bolts except oil pan bolts, plenum bolts or anything you think you might remove a couple times. Use Blue loctite 242 on those items (Except SS Plenum and SS Cam Cover Bolts). Use Loctite 565 on sensors, switches, fittings. Use anti-zieze on plugs and injector housing coolant pipe bolts (on any stainless steel bolts) :mrgreen:

Nothing on new head bolts. Actually I use antisieze on Header Bolts with Stage 8 Header Bolt Locks.
Always use Stage 8 Exhaust Header Bolts with locks (Headers Only). Do not have to torque the Header Bolts too much as the locks will assure the bolts do not loosen (torqued header bolts into aluminum which area gets very hot makes removal of bolts at any time difficult). You can also use an Allen wrench on Stage 8 Bolts.

Use a bit of antiseize on Header Bolts with the Stage 8 Locks. Also use a bit of antiseize on all spark plugs.

https://cimg4.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...c8a37cf082.jpg

4. Hydraulic Fitting Size comparison.
AN (Army and Navy).....-2.........-3...........-4.........-5.........-6..........-8........-10.......-12
Tube OD (Hose ID).......1/8".......3/16"...... 1/4".......5/16".....3/8".......1/2"......5/8"......3/4"
SAE thread size...........5/16-24..3/8-24.....7/16-20..1/2-20...9/16-18..3/4-16...7/8-14..1-1/16-12
Pipe thread size (NPT)..............1/8-27.....1/4-18................3/8-18....1/2-14..............3/4-14
Straight Metric
Thread Fine .....Male Thread....... Male Thread ......Female Thread..... Female Thread
....................... O.D. mm ............O.D. inches ........I.D. mm............... I.D. inches

M12x1.5 ...........12.0................... 0.47................... 10.5 ......................0.41
M14x1.5........... 14.0................... 0.55 ...................12.5 ......................0.49
M16x1.5 ...........16.0 ...................0.63................... 14.50 ....................0.57
M18x1.5 ...........18.0................... 0.71................... 16.5 ......................0.65
M20x1.5 ...........20.0................... 0.78 ...................18.5 ......................0.73
M22x1.5 ...........22.0 ...................0.87................... 20.5 ......................0.81

5. Aluminum Stat-O-Seal washers with molded Buna-N inner seals are much more reliable than the more common steel stat-o-seals. If the rubber portion fails to make contact all around the port, the aluminum will act as a crush washer, providing a reliable metal to metal seal. Use them to seal screws, bolts or plumbing fittings. The Buna-N seal is resistant to petroleum fuels and oils. Pegasus Auto Racing

https://cimg7.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...6198cf9ed7.jpg

Stat-O-Seal Inside Diameters vs. Outside Diameters
ID Size...#6 (0.138")..#10 (3/16")...1/4"..5/16"...3/8"..7/16"..1/2"..9/16"..5/8"...3/4"...7/8"..1.00"
OD Size............ .38".......... .44".. .50".. .60"... .66".. .76"... .88"...1.06"..1.19".1.32"..1.51".1.76" [/FONT]

6. Pipe Plugs.
1/8 inch NPT Drill is 21/64 or 11/32 inch. Aluminum Allen Head 1/8 inch pipe plugs found here. Speedway Motors

7. Tools.
Often a 1/4 inch socket wrench and associated extensions/swivels are better to use in tight places than 3/8 inch sockets. I use a 3/8 inch and 1/4 inch universal (the "U" joint) in the first picture. I have a complete set of metric and SAE sockets in 3/8 inch and 1/4 inch sizes.


The wobble extensions are in second and third pictures and flex ratchet combination wrenches in fourth picture.

You will notice what allows the wobble in the third picture.

There are all sorts of swivels and swivel socket combinations you can get but these four tools/tool sets will get er done assuming you have a good 3/8 inch and 1/4 inch socket wrench and set of metric sockets with 3/8 inch and 1/4 inch adapters.

Oh...ya...you might need a good 1/4 inch and 3/8 inch torque wrench also. I like the ones that trip at your torque setting. And.....a good set of allen and torx T wrenches.
.
https://cimg7.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...300a705d79.jpghttps://cimg2.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...50b0664931.jpghttps://cimg4.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...19bf8c5c7d.jpghttps://cimg7.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...9bba71ad31.jpg

8. New Tools These from Harbour Freight......

a. 1/4 inch drive Torx #40 hardened steel for Plenum and Cam Cover Bolts (just long enough to reach between those two tight runners on the Plenum).

b. 14 inch long combination 1/4 inch and 3/8 inch drive Flex Head Socket wrench strong enough (even using the 1/4 inch end) to remove the hardest to remove Torx Cam Cover Bolts. The 14 inch leverage eliminates the need for a cheater bar on the typical socket wrench.

https://cimg7.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...e0837e9a17.jpg

Last UPDATE of post 4 Nov, 2022

Dynomite 02-20-2012 11:44 PM

Use of thread Lubricants, Loctite and Sealants
 
Use of thread Lubricants, Loctite and Sealants

1. General Use of Loctite including Permatex.

In General use Red loctite 262 on all bolts except oil pan bolts, plenum bolts or anything you think you might remove a couple times. Use Blue loctite 242 on those items (Except SS Plenum and SS Cam Cover Bolts). Use Permabond A136 or Loctite 518 on Cam Covers. Use Loctite 565 on sensors, switches, fittings. Use anti-zieze on Spark Plugs a d Exhaust Manifold Bolts with Locking Tabs.

a. Permabond A136 or Loctite 518.
Use Permabond A136 very thin coat on surface of cam covers. Do not coat Permabond A136 all the way to the edge of the journals (stay away 1/4 inch). Coat the grooves with Permabond A136 for the two camshaft rubber plugs on each end of each Cam Covers.

https://cimg2.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...aa11b961dc.jpg

b. Permatex on gaskets associated with Oil and Coolant.
There are several opinions on this but I use a very light coat of Permatex 300 Form A Gasket on both surfaces of mating parts of all assemblies in contact with oil or water (water pump, oil pan and oil filter housing assemblies). I always use a thin coat of Permatex on the Oil Pan Drain Plug, Transmission Fill and Drain Plugs and Differential Drain Plug also. This not only helps seal the plugs but also acts as a thread locker (A little less bolt torque with a good sealant). Tighten just tight enough to not leak on all drain plugs.

https://cimg5.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...914bf0d3f7.jpg

2. Use of Anti-Sieze and Gasket Sealants

I will use anti-sieze on stainless steel bolts, spark plugs, and header bolts (Permatex Anti-Sieze 133A). On the transmission (differential and engine) fill & drain plugs and water pump I use Permatex 300 Form-A-Gasket. On Cam Covers and Cam Cover rubber end seals use a thin coat of Permabond A136.

https://cimg6.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...3ea5100d48.jpghttps://cimg5.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...914bf0d3f7.jpghttps://cimg6.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...ede2618148.jpg

3. Bolt Torque Theory

When a sufficient load is applied to a metal or other structural material, it will cause the material to change shape. This change in shape is called deformation. A temporary shape change that is self-reversing after the force is removed, so that the object returns to its original shape, is called elastic deformation. In other words, elastic deformation is a change in shape of a material at low stress that is recoverable after the stress is removed. This type of deformation involves stretching of the bonds, but the atoms do not slip past each other. This applies to head bolts.

When the stress is sufficient to permanently deform the metal, it is called plastic deformation. This applies to camshaft sprocket bolts.

Now having said that.....what is the relationship between bolt torque, thread lubrication, and bolt tension?

The preload on a bolt, when determined via the torque method, can be off by as much as 25% even with proper precautions being taken especially between lubricated and dry bolt threads.

The purpose of bolt thread lubrication is to ensure that the applied torque deforms the bolt along its axis (stretch) instead of around its diameter (twist).

I have seen a statement that the standard for thread lubrication is a light coat of oil of about 10W viscosity. A thin coat of most engine oils does just fine. The idea is to allow the threads to move against one another and light oil does that reliably. Of course, this standard assumes that the threads of the bolt and nut, or case, or whatever, have reasonably smooth finishes. Exotic or extreme-pressure lubricants such as gear oils or moly pastes are mostly a waste of time and can actually be harmful if they reduce friction too much.

I on the other hand for oil pan bolts and other bolts on engine components such as the water pump, front engine cover (especially threaded into aluminum) use blue thread locker which by itself is a bolt lubricant. I clean and dry the bolt hole and bolt threads (I use a fine wire wheel on bolt threads including head bolts) with gasoline on a que tip for example cleaning out debree and oil films as much as possible. This applies to head bolt threaded holes as well.

You can reuse head bolts but I prefer to use new head bolts since I have no clue how they were first installed. It also depends on how hard they were to remove.

4. The use of Stainless Steel Bolts

There are only a few of us that use stainless bolts (and then only on cam covers and plenum). On the plenum if they are stainless bolts, I expect to be taking that off more often than not anyway. Prolly same with cam covers stainless bolts but less often.

On Cam Covers and Injector Housing Coolant Manifolds when SS Bolts are used I now use no loctite and no Antisieze using the Aluminum Stat-O-Seal washers. The Stat-O-Seal Aluminum washers with molded Buna-N inner seals are much more reliable than the more common steel stat-o-seals. The Stat-O-Seal Aluminum Washers act as a bolt sealing and locking mechanism. I use no Loctite or Antiseize on the Plenum SS bolts as the Plenum may be removed from time to time.

5. Use of Stat-O-Seal Washers

Using Aluminum Stat-O-Seal Washers..........if the rubber portion fails to make contact all around the port, the aluminum will act as a crush washer, providing a reliable metal to metal seal. Use them to seal screws, bolts or plumbing fittings. The Buna-N seal is resistant to petroleum fuels and oils. Pegasus Auto Racing

https://cimg7.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...6198cf9ed7.jpg

6. Thread Galling and Corrosion

Thread galling seems to be the most prevalent with fasteners made of stainless steel, aluminum, titanium, and other alloys which self-generate an oxide surface film for corrosion protection. During fastener tightening (and loosening), as pressure builds between the contacting and sliding thread surfaces, protective oxides are broken, possibly wiped off, and interface metal high points shear or lock together. This cumulative clogging-shearing-locking action causes increasing adhesion. In the extreme, galling leads to seizing - the actual freezing together of the threads".

The basic corrosion resistance of stainless steel occurs because of its ability to form a protective coating on the metal surface. This coating is a "passive" film which resists further "oxidation" or rusting. The formation of this film is instantaneous in an oxidizing atmosphere such as air, water, or other fluids that contain oxygen. Unlike aluminum or silver this passive film is invisible in stainless steel. It's created when oxygen combines with the chrome in the stainless to form chrome oxide which is more commonly called "ceramic".

7. Summary of 262, 242 Loctite, and Permabond A136.

Red loctite 262 on all (non stainless steel) bolts except oil pan bolts, plenum bolts, water pump bolts or anything you think you might remove a couple times. Blue loctite 242 on those items (Except SS Plenum and SS Cam Cover Bolts). Loctite 565 on sensors, switches, fittings.

LOCTITE 262 is designed for the permanent locking and sealing of threaded fasteners. The product cures when confined in the absence of air between close fitting metal surfaces and prevents loosening and leakage from shock and vibration. Typical applications include the locking and sealing of large bolts and studs (up to M25 ). The thixotropic nature of LOCTITE 262 reduces the migration of liquid product after application to the substrate.

LOCTITE 242 is designed for the locking and sealing ofthreaded fasteners which require normal disassembly with standard hand tools. The product cures when confined in the absence of air between close fitting metal surfaces and prevents loosening and leakage from shock and vibration. Suitable for applications on less active substrates such as plated surfaces, where disassembly with hand tools is required for servicing.

LOCTITE 565 is designed for the locking and sealing of metal pipes and fittings. The product cures when confined in the absence of air between close fitting metal surfaces and prevents loosening and leakage from shock and vibration.

Permabond A136 is designed for the Cam Covers and Cam Cover rubber plugs on each end. Permabond A136 from Jerry's

https://cimg8.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...72fe8c656e.jpghttps://cimg9.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...923e57963b.jpghttps://cimg2.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...aa11b961dc.jpg

Last UPDATE of post 5 Aug, 2017

Dynomite 02-20-2012 11:45 PM

Service Manual Supplement, Secondary Diagnostics. Sensors, and Prom Codes
 
Service Manual Supplement, Secondary Diagnostics, Sensors and Prom Codes

1. Service Manual Supplement.
This Service Manual Supplement is limited to detail LT5 engine pictures, bolt torque, Sealant recommendation, and sequence of disassembly and assembly engine only. No electrical, diagnostics or fault finding (60 pages). Also included is Oil capacity, Engine Specifications, and Special Tools.

https://cimg0.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...d22f8bfbec.jpg

2. Checking Injector Resistance without removing Plenum.
I checked my primary injector resistances without removing Plenum. I disconnected my battery and connected Inj-1 fuse side toward front of my 1991 ZR1 through digital ohm meter to ECM connector A (drivers side most left connector) A8, A3, A2, A7, A1, A12, A13, and A18. I was looking for 12.5 to 14 ohms on primary and secondary injectors.

https://cimg1.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...6f753b817b.jpg

3. Checking Secondary Operation without removing Plenum.
Check Secondary Operation by grounding pin C17 of ECM with key on. My screw driver is now pointing at the location of pin C17 on the ECM (that wire is pink with black strip on my 1991).

https://cimg2.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...98bd2468b5.jpg

4. ZR1 Sensors.
https://cimg4.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...09f6eb3c44.jpg

5. ZR1 Electronic Automatic AC .

The AC parameters can be viewed by pressing and holding the UP and DOWN Fan Buttons untill a -00- appears.
Then press the UP button untill you get to an - 05 (Battery Charge) or a - 16 (Coolant Temperature). Then press center Fan Button to view the Battery Charge (see below) or Coolant Temperature (Deg C). On a Standard 1990 Corvette (L98) the Coolant Temperature is scan UP to - 12 then press center Fan Button.

a. Coolant Temperature.
Coolant Temperature - 16 indicating you are .............Coolant Temperature is 83 deg C or 181.4 deg F
at Coolant Temperature (Now Press Fan)

https://cimg6.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...d9428d0710.jpghttps://cimg7.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...50c84f7e7c.jpg

b. The Coolant Temperature Calculation Trick.
Deg Centigrade which you observe as 83 deg can be converted to F deg:
(83 x 9/5) +32 = 181.4 deg F

c. Battery Charge.
A bit more complicated for Battery Charge...................Air is OFF in this case
Battery Charge - 05 (Now Press Fan)..........................197 indicating 14.408 volts (see d. below)
https://cimg8.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...f55c6d883e.jpghttps://cimg9.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...7dcab01b37.jpg

Battery Charge - 05 (Now Press Fan)
at Battery Charge -105 indicating 13.742 volts (see B below)
Air is ON in this case

https://cimg0.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...3769b95dd2.jpg

d. The Battery Charge Calculations Tricks
With AC OFF we see 197. The Calculation for a positive number is:
((197/255) x 7 volts) +9 volts = 14.408 volts (the constant is 255 for a positive observed number)

With AC ON we see -105. The Calculation for a negative number is:
(105/155) x 7 volts) +9 volts = 13.742 volts (the constant is 155 for a negative observed number)

6. Prom Code Chart.

https://cimg1.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...9f15983f15.png

Last UPDATE of post 6 Aug, 2017

Dynomite 02-20-2012 11:45 PM

Thermostats, Fans, Water Pump, and Radiators
 
https://cimg4.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...05bdafb1cc.jpghttps://cimg1.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...ead9daffa4.png

$24......Shows a gasket but came without a gasket....Price was right :thumbs:
Stant 14068 Thermostat

Jerry has the Rubber gasket :thumbs:
Stant 14068 gasket

1. The 180 deg versus the 160 deg thermostat or no thermostat.

We are referring to coolant temperature at the coolant temperature sensor.....

Why not just remove thermostat? NO...NO...NO!!!!

I run 180 deg thermostats in ALL ZR-1s.

A. At a coolant temperature of say 190 deg a 160 deg thermostat is open....so is my 180 deg thermostat. So from that point on our coolant system flow rates are identical at the same rpm. And so is the cooling.
Also see Defective Stant Thermostats

B. Using a 160 deg thermostat in cooler weather drops the engine coolant temperature below the designed engine temperature with the 180 deg thermostat. The PVC (at the cooler engine temperatures) is working at less than optimum temperatures as well as your oil and fuel functioning at less than optimum temperatures.

C. I see no difference between a 160 deg F thermostat and a 180 deg thermostat (both with the same Full Open Head Loss) once the coolant temperature has reached 190 deg F? I know the 190 deg F will be reached slower with a 160 deg F Thermostat but that is the only difference in that you reach the same Coolant Temperature at different rates of temperature increase. Kind of like using light weight pulleys to save HP which HP is only realized on acceleration as the rotational velocity of the pulley changes. Nothing is gained in a constant velocity (constant speed) situation.

FANS Oh....almost forgot.....my fans come on a bit sooner controlled by Marc Haibeck chip to help with engine temperatures when idling at a traffic light on a hot day (On at 205 deg F and Off at 200 deg F). But again....my 180 deg thermostat and the 160 deg thermostat are both open in that condition :D

Unmodified Fan Operation:
Primary Fan On 221-226 deg F (depending on Model Year).
Secondary Fan On 230 -234 deg F (depending on Model Year).

Modified Fan Operation:
Haibeck Chip (Fans On 205 deg F and Off 200 deg F).

2. Thermostat Multiple Functions.

The LT5 thermostat sits in two cavities and is located on the outlet side of the radiator. On one end of the thermostat is the first valve [pressure relief) that expands and opens to excessive radiator pressure (but only relative pressure over and above that normal thermal expansion radiator pressure). That valve is in the first cavity which is exposed to coolant outlet flow. In the second cavity is the second thermostat valve (temperature relief) which controls coolant inlet flow depending on engine temperature.

GM found at high rpm and high coolant flow, excessive pressure in the radiator, due to it's restriction, would blow the rubber seals between the side tanks and the core. GM did not want to design a specific LT5 radiator, so the solution was the radiator bypass which opens when the pressure differential across the radiator reaches a certain level. This bypass valve is part of the thermostat and, when open, allows coolant to recirculate within the engine.

When the Stant Thermostat is Fully Open the bottom end of The Stant Thermostat has two slots equating to approximately .07 square inches opening which feeds coolant back to the engine before passing the radiator. Again, even though the coolant passing through the thermostat from the radiator is of a lower pressure than the coolant passing the bottom of the thermostat before passing through the radiator (Radiator Head Loss), the total opening area of those two slots (.07 square inches) is very small compared to the approximately .75 square inches of a fully open thermostat. The effect of those two slots theoretically is negligible on hindering Engine Coolant passing from the radiator when the Stant Thermostat is Fully Open.

[b]ZR1 provided this photo in the LT5 Coolant System Discussion :thumbs:

https://cimg9.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...a3fc73f8b1.jpg
https://cimg0.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...56ae3e0176.jpg

3. Lets simplify......the discussion of the 160 deg thermostat cooling better than the 180 deg thermostat.

A. Let us say we have identical radiators, identical rpm, steady state coolant temperature, and both fans on and we are cruising at same speed.
B. Lets say coolant temperature is 190 deg in both your Z and my Z given everything identical in item #1.
C. Your 160 deg thermostat is full open with same flow rate as fully open 180 deg thermostat.
D. My 180 deg thermostat is full open with same flow rate as fully open 160 deg thermostat.
E. In other words...we both have been driving our Zs for say at least 30 minutes and have reached a steady coolant state.

Now......lets say the day gets hotter. The coolant temperatures should rise the same in both your Z and my Z given EVERYTHING else is the same :yesnod:

If it gets REAL HOT......both our Zs coolant will reach 230 deg at the same time.

The maximum temperature reached (given it is over 190 deg) will be no different for you than me even though you have a 160 deg thermostat and I have a 180 deg thermostat.

I am saying that my thermostat just maintains a minimum temperature higher than yours.
I am also saying your thermostat does not maintain a lower higher temperature than mine. Once both thermostats are fully open, the coolant temperatures are controlled by everything else mentioned in item #1 and not the thermostats (yours or mine).

4. Fans and Radiators.

Once your fan is on (my fan which may be on at lower temperatures is on).......we have identical radiator cooling no matter how hot it gets outside. The exception is Replacing the Fans with Higher Flow Rate After Market Fans which would solve the ZR-1 Over Heating Issue in Traffic on a Hot Day as long as you keep the rpms above 2,000 rpm(see item #6 below).

Now if we change radiators.....you run stock radiator and I run Ron Davis....DIFFERENT STORY as I have greater dissipation of heat than you at all rpms (water pump speed dependent) and ZR-1 speeds (air flow dependent).

5. Engine RPM.

My experience in all ambient temperatures.

A. In sixth gear running 65 mph (less than 2,000 rpm) the Coolant always gets a bit over 200 deg F. On Hot days the coolant will get a bit over 213 deg F. The key is the Water Pump is not pushing enough flow through the fully open thermostat to cool the engine to a Temperature where the Thermostat takes over (180 deg F).

B. If I shift to 5th gear at 65 mph (more than 2,000 rpm) the coolant temperature drops to Thermostat control (180 deg F) on cool days and drops to near 200 deg F on Hot days.

https://cimg1.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...ead9daffa4.png

My findings are simply that the stock water pump is a bit low on coolant flow rate at rpms under 2,000 rpm. As you can see there is a big jump in Coolant Pump Flow rate between 1,000 rpm and 2,000 rpm and it is in this area or engine RPM that the Coolant Flow Rate is not sufficient in HOT Climates when the ZR-1 is moving in 6th gear at 65 mph.

The overheating issue when idling at a stop sign on HOT days (100 deg +) is more related to Fan Air Flow.
Tests at 50 deg F ambient.
Going 65 mph in 6th (1500 rpm) coolant temperature 205 deg F.
Going 65 mph in 5th (2200 rpm) coolant temperature 192 deg F.
Idling at 750 rpm coolant temperature 204 deg F.
Engine rpm 2000 rpm (not moving) coolant temperature rose to 213 deg F.

So...….At 65 mph it is the coolant flow. At 0 mph (Not moving with rpm at 2,000) it is the air flow.

If I could get the air flow higher while in traffic the issue would then be the coolant flow again where keeping rpm above 2,000 rpm would solve the High coolant temperatures on hot days in traffic.
The Coolant Pump Flow at 800 rpm is 15 gpm. The Coolant Pump actually gets more efficient as the rpm increases from idle to 2,000 rpm.
As Per Marc Haibeck graph provided to the ZR-1 Net email list by Graham Behan about ten years ago, the Coolant Pump flow rate through the engine (not the radiator or thermostat) is:
15 gpm at 800 rpm
18 gpm at 1,000 rpm,
44 gpm at 2,000 rpm,
65 gpm at 3,000 rpm,
90 gpm at 4.000 rpm,
120 gpm at 5,000 rpm at which time cavitation is starting.

The Block Resistance at 100 gpm was 20 psi during these tests which varies as the flow rate of the pump increases. The pressure on the output of the pump during the test was 3 psi at 2000 rpm, ramping up to 25 psi at 5000 rpm. As cited above, the hoses, radiator and bypass valve were not connected as a system as per Marc Haibeck Testing.
The Dual Thermostat Bypass pressure is apparently 5 psi and block resistance at 100 gpm is approximately 20 psi. I am not sure what the radiator Head Loss is at various flow rates but definitely depends on the radiator type which was not part of these tests.
It would seem that the Coolant Pressure Relief Cap on top of the Coolant Reservoir in front of passenger side set at 15 psi would assure the radiator maximum pressure would be 15 psi plus the Bypass Pressure of 5 psi or 20 psi.

6. Summary .....See LT5 Cooling and Radiators TIPS

A. Fans turn on at 205 deg F and OFF at 200 deg F (Haibeck Chip)
B. I use 180 deg Thermostats.
C. Ron Davis, Dewitt, and Fluidyne multi core Aluminum Radiators.

D. To solve the Hot Coolant flow when stalled in traffic would require Fans with Greater Air Flow.

The Thermostat is fully open at all coolant temperatures over 180 deg F (no need to use cooler thermostat unless you want to run at temperatures below 180 deg F).

The Water Pump does not provide enough flow to cool the engine at rpms less than 2,000 rpm. This is not an issue at ambient environmental temperatures on cool days. This is a problem on HOT days. The Aluminum Multi Core Radiators DO provide better Heat Dissipation and offer cooler Coolant at ALL Temperatures for which the 180 deg F Thermostat Controls the Flow (above 185 deg F Coolant temperatures the Thermostat is fully open). The Cooling effects then being dependent on Water Pump Flow Rate and Air Flow Rate through the Radiator.

Having the Fans come on at 205 deg F DOES provide for COOLER Coolant in the radiator once sufficient coolant flow rate is provided above 2,000 rpm. Using Aluminum Multi Core Radiators ALSO provides for COOLER Coolant Temperatures in conjunction with the Air Flow provided by Fans and Vehicle Speed. The Heat Removal Rate from the Radiator is greater as the Air Flow Increases and as the Aluminum exposed to that Air Movement increases.

It DOES make a difference if you are moving at speed in conjunction with Fans PULLING Air Flow as the additional Air Pressure Up Front does add to the TOTAL AIR FLOW through the Radiator at any ambient environmental temperatures.

Using 180 deg Thermostats insures that the engine will not run cooler than that temperature since the Thermostat is in control and controls the Coolant flow rate through the engine at all Coolant Temperatures less than 180 deg F.

7. Modifying the Stant Thermostat.

There has been some suggestions to drill 1/8 inch holes in the thermostat flange to allow better cooling.
Just tested several 180 deg F Thermostats for opening temperatures and found the Stants 180 deg Thermostat will start opening at 175 deg F with complete opening at 185 deg F. Marc suggested at one time the older Stants will deteriorate (Decrease in FUll Open Area) by up to 15% as they age. A thermostat with over 50k miles generally opens 5 degrees later and opens about 85%.

The Stants tested would be fully open with a flow area of approximately .785 square inches at 185 deg F.

Thermostat opening at 175 deg F....................................Thermostat opening at 185 deg F (Full Open)

https://cimg2.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...cd483d6c82.jpghttps://cimg3.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...05a4a594e0.jpg

A 1/8 inch diameter hole in the flange will offer additional flow area of .0123 square inches. Which one such hole will increase the total flow area by .016 or 1.6% (three 1/8 inch diameter holes would increase the flow area by 4.7%). This thinking does not address the change in coefficient of Discharge of such small holes.

Now compared to the normal aging of the thermostat of 15% over several years of use one would be much better off installing a NEW Stant Thermostat gaining 15% flow area as compared to drilling three 1/8 inch holes in an older Stant Thermostat only gaining 4.7% flow area.

Given the LT5 runs Hotter idling at a stop sign than at 2,000 rpm as cited in Item #5 in the link above a much better focus regarding engine Heating would be engine RPM (which relates directly to pressure on the coolant flow through the Stant Thermostat) and not the Stant Thermostat (Old or New).

8. The Thermostat housing and Heater Hose Connections.

Heater Hose Connection on Thermostat Housing

See Item #2 Replacing the Heater Core and Heater Hose Connection

https://cimg4.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...a418faaa1a.jpg
https://cimg5.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...75d98ca062.jpghttps://cimg1.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...b2b7ea97a7.jpg

Some Thoughts regarding the Thermostat Housing:

A. It does not make any difference if you use a 160 deg thermostat or 180 deg thermostat....they both are fully open at 185 deg.
B. I makes no difference if you drill small 1/8" holes in the thermostat flange as the additional area is only 1.5% increase per hole.
C. The Heater Circuit is open at all times even on a cool engine after start as the heater will be the first to get warm coolant.
D. On a very cold day with the heater on and Interior Fans set at Ten, the Heater Core with significant coolant flow could cool the engine for a significant amount of time before the main temperature controlled end of the Thermostat on the radiator side opens. The engine coolant mixed with some air would still expand into the radiator and to the coolant over flow below the passenger headlight.
E. If you want to cool your engine below the temperature controlled thermostat on a cold day or cool your engine a bit more on a very hot day, run your Heater with Interior Fans set at Ten using Outside Air (not recirculate) with windows open. The additional Coolant Flow through the Heater could be as high as 14% of the total coolant flow with 3/8 inch ID Heater Hoses.
F. The bottom of the thermostat on engine side opens at differential pressure of 5psi when open 1/2 inch allowing coolant to bypass the radiator (Marc Haibeck Testing).
G. When the thermostat has not reached opening temperature (175 deg) the coolant recirculates through the bottom of the thermostat at a pressure of 5psi since the coolant flow through the radiator is blocked.
H. Always use original green coolant GM 1825M.

9. Filling with Coolant.

I fill with Coolant/Distilled Water. Then the BIG Secret......
A. I use a vice grips and close off the coolant to the Plastic Overflow under Passenger Headlight.
B. I fill Black Coolant Reservoir in front of passenger side window and when the bubbling stops.....Blow into/pressurize that Reservoir holding pressure for about 10 seconds. More bubbles will come from the top of the radiator hose. I refill with Distilled Water and Blow into/pressurize the Coolant System again. I repeat this maybe three times until no bubbles come back from the top of the Radiator. I then replace the Coolant Reservoir Cap and remove Vice Grips.....and fire up the LT5 keeping a hand on the Injector Housing Coolant Manifolds to assure they get warm within a minute. (That Happens with this method of Coolant Filling 100% of the time).

With this procedure you are pressurizing both sides of the radiator but with each pressurizing cycle more coolant is being pushed into the coolant system and more air is bubbling out from the top of the radiator.

See Item #7 Blocking TB Coolant, Fluidyne Radiator and Thermostats

Last UPDATE of post 7 April, 2024

Dynomite 02-20-2012 11:45 PM

LT5 Radiator and Initial Coolant Fill Tricks
 
LT5 Radiator and Initial Coolant Fill Tricks

1. Ron Davis Radiator w/o transmission cooling

Coolant temperature stays at a constant 185 deg (70 deg F ambient) with 180 deg thermostat.*
a. 1989-1996 C4 Type V8 All Part No. 1-16CV8996
b. Rated 800 Hp
c. Manual transmission

* Coolant Temperatures will climb a bit with AC on (100 deg F ambient).

https://cimg8.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...49b29c5d9c.jpghttps://cimg9.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...23b26fe59a.jpg

d. For the Ron Davis radiator the fan shroud inside baffles have to be cut back 5/8 inch so there is not contact with the fins of the radiator. Use a small cut off grinder for that task.
e. I cut the tab on the passenger side of the fiberglass radiator housing (the single tab with larger bolt hole that interferes the most with the oil cooler hoses). The fiberglass radiator housing then slipped on easily without further modifications.
f. Use a Radiator Comb to straighten out any bent fins.
g. Replaced Ron Davis Radiator Nylon Drain Plug with new radiator drain Brass JIC fitting with cap.

https://cimg0.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...6146d3f07d.jpghttps://cimg1.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...b5e7b2d622.jpg

2. When installing SAMCO hoses, set the clamps so the screws are excessable after everything else is installed.
a. The bottom hose clamp screw on the water pump facing down so it can be reached from underneath with a long flat head screw driver.
b. That lower clamp (water pump) has to also be positioned so the screw part does not interfere with the belt tensioner.
c. The top main hose clamp between water pump and thermostat housing (Top) clamp screw facing to rear of engine.
d. This allows you to use a 7 mm box wrench to tighten the hose clamp from above. Make sure this TOP main Water Pump Hose does not touch the Oil Cooler Lines between the Oil Cooler and Oil Filter Housing.
e. Installing SAMCO hoses is kind of tough. I always used bit of Permatex on the hose fittings and in this case coated the inside of the hose a bit with Permatex also which helped start the hose on the various fittings. Trouble is that using Permatex makes the slip on easy but also slip off easy under pressure. So...USE NOTHING ON SAMCO HOSE.
f. I also use a bit of permatex gasket sealer on all mating surfaces (including those with gaskets) having to do with coolant (water pump, thermostat housing, all coolant hoses, and injector housing water manifolds).......no coolant leaks.
g. Use ONLY the SAMCO Hose Clamps with rounded edges that DO NOT cut into the SAMCO Hose when tightened.
h. Install all hose clamps on SAMCO hose as close to the receiving coolant pipe hose clamp retaining ring as possible. The hose clamp retaining ring is the larger diameter ring on all receiving coolant pipes.

https://cimg2.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...2080e56dbe.jpghttps://cimg3.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...546bd4671e.jpg

3. Filling with coolant Tricks
See (Filling With Coolant and the Air Locked Water Pump) for Detailed New Coolant Filling Trick.

See LT5 Air Locked Water Pump Simplified for the Simplified Discussion regarding The Air Locked Water Pump.

Note: Getting the Air Out of the Water Pump after Blocking TB Coolant.

A. Disconnect the Drivers side Injector Housing Coolant Manifold "L" from the Drivers side Injector Housing Coolant Manifold and rotate that "L" up connected to the Drivers side Coolant Crossover Pipe.

https://cimg4.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...c29d2bf1e9.jpg

Attach a second "L" to the Injector Housing Coolant Manifold rotated up and fill that "L" with coolant. Blow into that "L" forcing coolant into the water pump through the Drivers side Injector Housing Coolant Manifold (Only blow in steps refilling the "L" with coolant each blow effort). You can see in the photo that by blowing coolant into the Drivers Side of the water pump air will be forced out to the top level of the impeller with only a small amount of air left on the passenger side of the water pump.

https://cimg6.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...2b0167754f.jpghttps://cimg7.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...b17d881678.jpg

B. Refill the Drivers Side "L" temporarily connected to the Drivers Side Coolant Manifold with coolant and do that trick a couple times until the coolant flows out of the Drivers Side Crossover "L" that has been rotated up.

When you blow (force) coolant into Port A of the Water Pump (Blowing in steps) you replace the yellow area of Air with Water. The Air is forced out the top and down left side through Port B. (Only blow in steps refilling the "L" with coolant each blow effort).

Do NOT rely on the temperature gauge to tell you if the Water Pump is functioning. If the two Injector Housing Coolant Manifolds are NOT getting warm rather quickly (within 1 minute), your coolant is NOT flowing.

4. The Simplified Method........I fill with Coolant/Distilled Water. Then the BIG Secret......
A. I use a vice grips and close off the coolant to the Plastic Overflow under Passenger Headlight.
B. I fill Black Coolant Reservoir in front of passenger side window and when the bubbling stops.....Blow into/pressurize that Reservoir holding pressure for about 10 seconds. More bubbles will come from the top of the radiator hose. I refill with Distilled Water and Blow into/pressurize the Coolant System again. I repeat this maybe three times until no bubbles come back from the top of the Radiator. I then replace the Coolant Reservoir Cap and remove Vice Grips.....and fire up the LT5 keeping a hand on the Injector Housing Coolant Manifolds to assure they get warm within a minute. (That Happens with this method of Coolant Filling 100% of the time).

With this procedure you are pressurizing both sides of the radiator but with each pressurizing cycle more coolant is being pushed into the coolant system and more air is bubbling out from the top of the radiator.


5. Coolant Overflow Under Passenger Side Headlight.
When the engine is Hot I fill the Coolant Overflow reservoir to within an inch of the top. On a Hot Engine the coolant overflow is filled by the expanding hot coolant to its maximum fill. As the engine cools the coolant is then sucked back into the engine.

What happens after doing some coolant draining during Plenum Pull or thermostat installations, is the engine develops Air Pockets in the coolant system. As the engine warms up to Hot these Air Pockets are pushed out of the engine into the Coolant Overflow. Once the Air gets into the Coolant Overflow the air is caught at the top of the coolant never to return to the engine (Which is exactly the purpose of the Coolant Overflow).

All the Air caught within the engine is flushed out by the Water Pump as you rev the engine once the engine has reached optimum temperature. The Air ends up within the Top Side of the Radiator where that Air is pushed out of the radiator into the top of the Black Coolant Reservoir in front of the Passenger Side Windshield. From their the air is forced into the Coolant Overflow as the Hot Air and Hot Coolant expands during engine Warm Up to Engine Hot.

If after several cycles of Engine Operation the Coolant Overflow continues to loose Coolant, You Have a Coolant Leak in your System.

Last UPDATE of post 8 Aug, 2017

Dynomite 02-20-2012 11:45 PM

HVAC Temperature Display And Radiator Efficiency Test Runs
 
HVAC Temperature Display And Radiator Efficiency Test Runs


1. Using HVAC Display for Engine Coolant Temperature.
This post applies to both C4 (L98) and (LT5) engines.

ghlkal brought my attention to this great tip :thumbs:

Using the HVAC Display parameter #16 digital readout for continous Engine Coolant Temperature in deg C where deg F=((9/5)(deg C) +32) can be accomplished by pressing the two Fan Buttons.

Press both Fan Up and Fan Down together waiting 3 seconds to enter HVAC diagnostics. Then press Fan Up to parameter #16 and then press Auto (between the two Fan Buttons) to read the Engine Coolant Temperature in deg C which Engine Coolant Temperature will be a real time continous reading.

The Engine Coolant Temperature is exhibited in real time continuously untill you exit the HVAC diagnostics or select another parameter by pressing Fan Up or Fan Down (engine running or not and idling in neutral or driving down the road). I shoot for 94 deg C to 104 deg C (200 deg F to 220 deg F) on a hot 100 deg F day at highway speeds with AC set at 72 deg (using a 180 deg thermostat and Fans On 205 deg F Fans Off 200 deg F with Marc Haibeck Chip ).

You can now compare Engine Coolant Temperature gauge reading to Engine Coolant Temperature HVAC digital read out. You can compare as a check of the Engine Coolant temperature gauge and two separate Coolant Temperature Sensors located essentially in the same area of the engine (drivers side inside IH under Plenum).

The Temperature Sensor (two pin connector) that controls the cooling fans also provides the information for the HVAC digital readout. The Temperature Gauge is controled by the adjacent Temperature Sensor (button terminal).

Photo provided by Jerry of Jerry's Gaskets.

https://cimg8.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...8ebe23d805.jpg

2. Effectiveness of LT5 Radiators/Cooling Fan Systems.

The Bottom Line Question for any discussion regarding Effectiveness of LT5 Radiators/Cooling Fan Systems is How do the Radiator/Fans Cool the LT5 Engine with AC On at 100 deg F Ambient Temperatures while idling in traffic.

Let us assume for simplicity that LT5 engine cooling is about the Radiator Air Flow and Radiator Coolant flow (as 5ABI VT and Goldcylon suggests). Lets further assume that the engine sensors, heat generation, spark advance, compression, load are identical between engines at a certain engine speed and ZR-1 speed in other words nothing to consider other than the air flow, coolant flow, and coolant temperature from the HVAC Display (AC ON and AC OFF).

I am going to do some testing to verify exactly how two ZR-1s here in CA (90' with stock radiator and 91' with Ron Davis radiator) behave at 100 deg ambient temperatures (stop and go and on freeway at various speeds). I will determine exactly what the coolant temperatures are at 60 mph and 2,000 engine rpm in 5th Gear (including the worst condition idling with ZR-1 not moving). The Conditions I have are a 180 deg F Thermostat and Fans ON at 205 deg F and OFF at 200 deg F running on 91 Octane Fuel (Marc Haibeck Chip).

I am thinking ALL radiators function well at ambient temperatures around 90 deg F and lower.....it is the 100 deg F ambient temperatures that are of issue.

Using HVAC Display for Engine Coolant Temperature
Water Pump, Coolant Temperatures, and Coolant
Coolant Characteristics (Mix, Pressure, Elevation)

A. Experiment Number 1
1990 Fans On 205 deg F Fans Off 200 deg F
Stock Radiator
100 deg F Ambient
at least 50% Coolant Mix

AC On 72 deg AC Fan 7
Cruise 60 mph 5th HVAC temp 220 deg F (after exceeding that temperature during the idle test)
(this was interesting because once the temperature came down to 204 deg F with AC Off the temperature did not rise above 205 deg F with AC On)
AC Off 60 mph 5th HVAC temp 204 deg F and dropping slowly
Fans are Controlling Coolant Temperatures when AC is Off

AC On 72 deg AC Fan 7
Idle (not moving) HVAC 235 deg F and climbing (idle for 5 minutes)
Coolant Temperature would keep climbing if I did not turn AC Off within a few minutes

AC Off
Idle (not moving) HVAC 230 deg F and dropping slowly
Coolant Temperature CAN BE CONTROLLED by Turning AC Off

B. Experiment Number 2
1990 Fans On 205 deg F Fans Off 200 deg F
Stock Radiator
90 deg F Ambient
at least 50% Coolant Mix

AC On 72 deg AC Fan 7
Cruise 60 mph 5th HVAC temp 205 deg F

AC On 72 deg AC Fan 7
Idle (not moving) HVAC 228 deg F (idle for 10 minutes)
Coolant Temperature is stable at 228 deg F with AC On with Ambient Temperature 90 deg F

In Summary From this experiment at 100 deg F and 90 deg F Ambient Temperatures the 1990 ZR-1 with stock radiator and Marc Haibeck Chip controlling the fans On at 205 deg F and Off at 200 deg F the following results were obtained.........

1. The Fan thermal switching control the Coolant Temperature (100 deg Ambient) when moving with AC Off (With AC On the Fans are always On).

2. At 100 deg Ambient Temperatures the 180 deg thermostat is not a player staying open under ALL conditions.

3. At 100 deg Ambient Temperatures the Coolant System FAILS when idling in traffic or at stop lights for over 5 minutes with AC On.

4. Excessive Coolant Temperature at Idle with AC On can easily be controlled by turning the AC Off.

5. It also was determined that if the Ambient Temperature dropped to 90 deg F the 1990 ZR-1 can idle in traffic at a stop indefinitely with AC On.

(For those not having the Marc Haibeck Chip the Fan Controlled Coolant Temperatures in this experiment would be 234 deg F)
.

C. Experiment Number 3
1990 ZR-1 #72 (40,000 miles).
50 deg F - 70 deg F outside Air Temperature.
Ron Davis Radiator.
Haibeck Chip (fans ON 205 deg F, OFF 200 deg F).
Stock Exhaust.
180 deg F Thermostat.
Green Antifreeze down to -10 deg F.

6th Gear
65 mph
1,500 rpm
207 deg F Engine Coolant Temperature

5th Gear
65 mph
2,200 rpm
190 deg F Engine Coolant Temperature

17 deg F cooler running 65 mph in 5th Gear rather than running 65 mph in 6th Gear.
Did the cycle several times with identical results. Coolant Temperatures moved from min to max and back in a minute or two after shifting Gears.

Idle at 850 rpm 203 deg F.

D. Experiment Number 4
1995 ZR-1 #186.
70 deg F outside Air Temperature.
Fluidyne Radiator.
Haibeck Chip (fans ON 205 deg F, OFF 200 deg F).
Stock Exhaust.
180 deg F Thermostat.
Green Antifreeze down to -10 deg F.

6th Gear
65 mph
1,500 rpm
207 deg F Engine Coolant Temperature

5th Gear
65 mph
2,200 rpm
190 deg F Engine Coolant Temperature

17 deg F cooler running 65 mph in 5th Gear rather than running 65 mph in 6th Gear.
Did the cycle several times with identical results. Coolant Temperatures moved from min to max and back in a minute or two after shifting Gears.

Idle at 850 rpm 203 deg F.

Notes:

1. The Water Pump Flow at 800 rpm is 15 gpm. The Water Pump actually gets more efficient as the rpm increases from idle to 2,000 rpm.
As Per Marc Haibeck graph provided to the ZR-1 Net email list by Graham Behan about ten years ago, the water pump flow rate is:
15 gpm at 800 rpm
18 gpm at 1,000 rpm,
44 gpm at 2,000 rpm,
65 gpm at 3,000 rpm,
90 gpm at 4,000 rpm,
120 gpm at 5,000 rpm at which time cavitation is starting.
2. The Dual Thermostat Bypass pressure is apparently 5 psi and block resistance at 100 gpm is approximately 20 psi. I am not sure what the radiator Head Loss is at various flow rates but definitely depends on the radiator type.
3. It would seem that the Coolant Pressure Relief Cap on top of the Coolant Reservoir in front of passenger side set at 15 psi would assure the radiator maximum pressure would be 15 psi plus the Bypass Pressure of 5 psi or 20 psi.

See Post 120 - Thermostats, Fans, Radiators and Coolant Filling

Last UPDATE of post 9 Aug, 2017

Dynomite 02-20-2012 11:45 PM

Water Pump, Coolant Temperatures, and Coolant
 
Water Pump, Coolant Temperatures, and Coolant

Just when you think you have covered all technical issues. When I say "Water" I am talking about an "engine coolant mix" of your choice (Regular Green Coolant (GM 1825M) or Original Formula (GM 1825M)).

1. Water Pump Failures

a. Failed gasket causing water leaks.
* Water leaks from water pump gasket down on power steering unit or harmonic balancer.
* Water can be found on floor beneath front of engine.

b. Failed water pump bearing.
* Water pump pulley looks crooked.
* Squeeling or other noise from water pump area with engine running.
* Water pump pulley is loose or play can be felt by hand.

c. Water pump impeller spins freely on water pump shaft.
* Engine temp increases considerably.

https://cimg4.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...1382c4d18d.jpg

2. Installing a Water Pump

It is difficult to install a water pump incorrectly. This water pump had no leaks in gasket and was free spinning by hand immediately after installation as a check. The water pump impeller was firmly attached to the shaft when installed.

If you drop everything on the floor after all that taking account of where the bolts go. Not to worry....

With the water pump in position on the front engine face, just insert the bolt into the water pump housing to the threaded area on the front engine face. Make sure you have about 3/8 inch (or a bit more or less) showing between the bolt head and water pump surface.

As you remove the water pump bolts (during water pump removal) you can confirm that bolt head to water pump surface distance. Some of those "water pump" bolts hold the front cover as well as the water pump to the engine block

All bolts should be about the same in this regard (bolt head to water pump surface distance). If you have more or less space between bolt head and water pump surface as the bolt begins to thread, the bolt is in wrong place.

https://cimg5.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...321b9d17b1.jpg

I think this was an aftermarket water pump and the Solution to such potential disasters is to buy a new AC Delco water pump.

I use a very thin coat of Permatex 300 Form A Gasket on each side of the Water Pump gasket and IH coolant manifold gaskets before installing. I use a drop of Blue Loctite 242 on all water pump bolts and torque all water pump bolts 18 ft-lbs. NO LEAKS

https://cimg6.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...5f7b4b35b7.jpghttps://cimg7.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...adf0ebaa05.jpg

3. Coolant Temperatures

Just got back with my 90' L98 climbing Grapevine on I-5 in 110 deg temps. I counted no less than 20 cars/trucks stopped alongside the road with hoods up (you know what that means) ;)

My temps got up to 225 deg F climbing to the top with Air on. With Air off the temps dropped a few degrees. Just as a point of reference I was using HVAC for digital readout.

The radiator in my L98 is stock but in my 91' Z I have a Ron Davis Radiator.

Did some testing yesturday (91' ZR1 with LT5) in stop and go traffic at 105 Deg F (or higher) ambient temperatures....With Air on I approach 110 deg C Coolant Temperatures and with air off back down to 105 deg C. I ended up turning engine off at long stop lights. Cruising 25 mph more or less ....Coolant Temperatures with Air On stayed 105 deg C or less and once on the road cruising at 50 mph Coolant temperatures stayed below 100 deg C. This is with Ron Davis Radiator and Stock Fans coming on at 205 and both off at 200 degs (Marcs Custom Chips work perfectly).

I used HVAC Display to check continous digital Coolant Temperatures.

I would suggest that we have reached the limits of the cooling system and in particular, the limit is air flow through the radiator and around the engine (Fans). I would suggest if one really wanted to solve this issue, install higher flow rate fans. But then again we are talking extremes in Ambient Temperatures (100 deg and above or maybe mid 90s and above).

Since I essentially have the same results running a 90' (L98) and a 91' (LT5) in HOT ambient Temperatures hill climbing as well as in Stop and Go Traffic.......I would suggest a limit in the coolant systems has been reached.

Reaching Limits in Engine Cooling systems was not Abnormal climbing the Grapevine in temps over 105 deg F as many of those cars/trucks parked alongside the road with hoods up were relatively NEW cars and trucks.

4. Marc Haibeck Discussion of Voltage Effects on Engine Cooling

I asked Marc some questions regarding Cooling Fans and Cooling Fans operations with some very interesting facts/Observations presented by Marc. Marc gave me permission to post that information here.....thank you Marc :thumbs:

"The same OE fan is used on all '90 to '94 Corvettes regardless of the engine type. They run at high speed all of the time.

'90 - '92 Primary on at 226 degs. F, off at 216. Secondary on at 234 degs. F, off at 225.
'93 - '95 Primary on at 222 degs. F, off at 212. Secondary on at 230 degs. F, off at 221.
'95 ZR-1 has three fan relays which is different than the earlier years. On the '95 both fans are turned on at half speed at 222 degs. Both fans go on at full speed at 230 degs.

Many other GM cars have the fans wired for high or low speed. The fans are single speed but the relays turn on both fans wired in series for low speed. Then each fan gets power at six volts. For high speed the relays connect direct 12 volts to each fan.

I recently observed that the alternator output plays a significant roll in ZR-1 fan cooling. A typical alternator sets the system voltage between 13.5 and 14.5 volts when the ambient temperature is at about 90 degs. F.

In my opinion the cars with the alternators at the higher end of the normal range at 14.5 volts run a few degrees cooler. With the AC on there is also little more air flow from the interior vents for better AC performance. If fan engine cooling is a problem, consider the system voltage as a factor."

From this I would say also Battery Condition is a factor on maintaining the higher voltage for optimum Radiator Cooling Fans operations.

5. Coolant Selection SUMMARY

You want to only use the green coolant. They have it at Napa and it meets 1825M GM Spec.

For Zerex the first gallon is called Regular Green Coolant (GM 1825M), the second gallon is called Original Formula (GM 1825M). Zerex ZXRU1 is 50-50 and Zerex ZX001 is undiluted. The third gallon is NAPA coolant (GM 1825M).

http://partimages.genpt.com/partimages/213991.jpgORhttp://ecx.images-amazon.com/images/I/31jb-ZubjrL.jpgORhttp://partimages.genpt.com/partimages/213967.jpg

NAPA

5. What is a Failing Coolant System.

85 C (185 deg F) is about when your thermostat is fully open (180 deg thermostat). The 96 C is when your fans prolly come on and 93 C is when your fans prolly turn off (Marc Haibeck Chip). Marc typically has BOTH Fans turn ON at 205 deg F and OFF at 200 deg F.

Now so far your testing at cruising (Outside Air Temperature right around 80 deg F) is not too significant. It is the idling at a stop light for several minutes (Outside Air Temperature 100 deg F) that is the BIG TEST which is FAILED by ALL stock Radiators cooling the LT5 (Especially with AC ON).

This Ambient Air Condition (100 deg F) and operational Condition (idling at a stop light) challenges the Most Efficient Radiators (Ron Davis, Dewitt, and even Fluidyne).

When I say FAILED....I am talking Coolant Temperatures greater than 110 C to 112 C (230 deg F to 234 deg F). It is interesting that the 234 deg F is when both fans come on (Stock Engine).

I am suggesting that Coolant Temperature of 234 deg F is NOT failing when Outside Air Temperatures are 100 deg F and you are idling at a stop light for several minutes.

I am also suggesting that without Marc's chip and with a stock radiator the Coolant Temperatures WILL EXCEED 234 deg F (on a 100 deg F day with AC ON idling at a stop light) which I would say is a failing Coolant System.

Also keep in mind the LT5 operating at less than 2,000 rpm does NOT provide a sufficient coolant flow rate to cool the engine no matter the air flow through the radiator on a HOT day.

See Post 7 - Thermostats, Fans, Water Pump, and Radiators

See Post 120 - Thermostats, Fans, Radiators and Coolant Filling

Last UPDATE of post 10 Aug, 2017

Dynomite 02-20-2012 11:46 PM

Keeping the L T5 Cool and Radiator Debris Screens
 
Keep the LT5 Cool using a Stant 180 deg F Thermostat and Ron Davis Aluminum Radiator.

See Post 120 - Thermostats, Fans, Radiators and Coolant Filling

Also Clean/straighten all fins on Oil Cooler and AC Condenser :cheers:

180 deg F Thermostat

https://cimg5.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...4209fec76d.png

Ron Davis 1-16CV8996 Aluminum Radiator for 1990/1991 ZR-1s :thumbs:

1989-1996 C4 Type V8 All Part No. 1-16CV8996

-Rated HP: 800*
-Manual transmission
-Core is thicker than factory unit, shroud must be trimmed.

https://cimg8.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...49b29c5d9c.jpghttps://cimg9.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...23b26fe59a.jpg

LT5 Thermostats
LT5 Radiator and Initial Coolant Fill Tricks

To read Digital Coolant Temperatures.....

1. Push and hold up and down (each side of Fan Control button) until you get zeros in display on left.
2. Then push up button to right until you get to 16 in the display.
3. Then push center fan button to read digital coolant temperature in degrees C continually in the display until you hit the temperature button.
80 C is 176 F
85 C is 185 F
90 C is 194 F
95 C is 203 F
100 C is 212 F
105 C is 221 F
110 C is 230 F
115 C is 239 F
120 C is 248 F
125 C is 257 F
130 C is 266 F

Radiator Debris Screens

91' ZR1 (LT5), 90' ZR1 (LT5), and 90' Corvette (L98).

Use 1/8 inch steel pop rivets with washers back side of Air Deflector and on front of screen (approximately 5/16 inch mesh). Drill 1/8 inch holes in the rubberized air deflector. Use cable ties on top side of screen (cable ties not required on 90' Debris Screen installation).

91' ZR1 (LT5) Slot in Debris Screen Required for Air Deflector Brace.
https://cimg6.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...6476b34725.jpg

90' Corvette (L98)
https://cimg7.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...498319cad0.jpg

90' ZR1 (LT5)
https://cimg7.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...c129f890a9.jpg

In the 90' Debris Screen installation you will see a slot in the Air Deflector for the Tow Bar when needed (see item #2 and #3) Lifting and Towing the ZR-1

The 90' Debris Screen (unlike the 91' Debris Screen) does not require a slot for the Air Deflector Brace.

The 91' Air Deflector has also been modified with Tow Bar slot but not shown in above 91' Debris Screen installation.

Last UPDATE of post 11 Aug, 2017

Dynomite 02-20-2012 11:46 PM

Getting The Air Out of the Coolant System
 
Getting The Air Out of the Coolant System

Eliminating the TB and Plenum coolant flow paths leaves you with this coolant flow shown in the diagram. I would assume water pressure/flow out of each injector housing (equal flow) into the injector housing coolant manifolds would push most of the air out of those manifolds and into the radiator which has a return line to the pressurized coolant expansion tank on passenger side near firewall (which IS the high point in the system).

https://cimg4.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...2801f45bf9.jpg

Getting the air out of the Coolant flow

It is assumed the air gets pushed out of the injector housing coolant manifolds on each side (equally) since they are higher than the radiator coolant line going back to the coolant expansion tank on passenger side (the highest point in the coolant system).

It appears that the water pump pressure and resulting coolant flow into each cylinder block (right and left) would be close to equal since the coolant flow is separated almost equally on the face of the front cover where the water pump is mounted. The exception here is the length of the coolant path from the water pump impeller is longer on Passenger side which could explain a bit higher coolant pressure on Drivers side to assist TB Coolant Flow from Drivers Side to passenger side. There are two holes of equal size that go into the front of each cylinder block (right and left) from the front cover. In other words, the coolant is not pushed from the water pump into a single flow after which the flow is divided but rather the coolant flow is divided at the impeller of the water pump.

https://cimg8.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...53d8362ffc.jpg

If the water pump can pump 100 GPM (385 cubic inches/sec) through two ports (lets assume 1-1/4 inch diameter or 1.23 square inches cross section each port), the coolant velocity would be 156 in/sec or 13 ft/sec in each port. That is intuitively enough flow to prevent a bubble of air going the other way in that flow assuring all air is pushed out of the system.

The Water Pump Flow at 800 rpm is 15 gpm. The Water Pump actually gets more efficient as the rpm increases from idle to 2,000 rpm.
As Per Marc Haibeck graph provided to the ZR-1 Net email list by Graham Behan about ten years ago, the water pump flow rate is:
15 gpm at 800 rpm
18 gpm at 1,000 rpm,
44 gpm at 2,000 rpm,
65 gpm at 3,000 rpm,
90 gpm at 4,000 rpm,
120 gpm at 5,000 rpm at which time cavitation is starting.

It is assumed the water pump is NOT air locked which is the first thing to check for when refilling with coolant. See Filling With Coolant and the Air Locked Water Pump

A Simplified Method.......I fill with Coolant/Distilled Water. Then the BIG Secret......
A. I use a vice grips and close off the coolant to the Plastic Overflow under Passenger Headlight.
B. I fill Black Coolant Reservoir in front of passenger side window and when the bubbling stops.....Blow into/pressurize that Reservoir holding pressure for about 10 seconds. More bubbles will come from the top of the radiator hose. I refill with Distilled Water and Blow into/pressurize the Coolant System again. I repeat this maybe three times until no bubbles come back from the top of the Radiator. I then replace the Coolant Reservoir Cap and remove Vice Grips.....and fire up the LT5 keeping a hand on the Injector Housing Coolant Manifolds to assure they get warm within a minute. (That Happens with this method of Coolant Filling 100% of the time).

With this procedure you are pressurizing both sides of the radiator but with each pressurizing cycle more coolant is being pushed into the coolant system and more air is bubbling out from the top of the radiator.

Thermostat bypass

The radiator Bypass Hose (see above coolant flow diagram) contains the hot coolant coming from the passenger side injector housing as stated below in red. The other companion hose (Radiator Inlet Hose) coming from the drivers side injector housings goes to the top (return line) of the radiator.

Both hoses are connected together at the top front of engine so the coolant flow from each injector housing may comingle with either the radiator bypass or radiator inlet.

https://cimg3.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...8d4a5c6d6c.jpg

Coolant refilling........See LT5 Radiator and Initial Coolant Fill Tricks

Coolant Overflow Under Passenger Side Headlight.
When the engine is Hot I fill the Coolant Overflow reservoir to within an inch of the top. On a Hot Engine the coolant overflow is filled by the expanding hot coolant to its maximum fill. As the engine cools the coolant is then sucked back into the engine.

What happens after doing some coolant draining during Plenum Pull or thermostat installations, is the engine develops Air Pockets in the coolant system. As the engine warms up to Hot these Air Pockets are pushed out of the engine into the Coolant Overflow. Once the Air gets into the Coolant Overflow the air is caught at the top of the coolant never to return to the engine (Which is exactly the purpose of the Coolant Overflow).

All the Air caught within the engine is flushed out by the Water Pump as you rev the engine once the engine has reached optimum temperature. The Air ends up within the Top Side of the Radiator where that Air is pushed out of the radiator into the top of the Black Coolant Reservoir in front of the Passenger Side Windshield. From their the air is forced into the Coolant Overflow as the Hot Air and Hot Coolant expands during engine Warm Up to Engine Hot.

If after several cycles of Engine Operation the Coolant Overflow continues to loose Coolant, You Have a Coolant Leak in your System.

Last UPDATE of post 12 Aug, 2017

Dynomite 02-20-2012 11:46 PM

TB Coolant Discussion
 
TB Coolant Discussion

Some guys who swear by the fact that TB coolant flow keeps the TB warm and prevents icing are missing some key technical issues me thinks :D

Explanation

1. The TB Coolant is not a flowing system once the engine is heated up. The TB coolant on passenger side connects to a "T" back to the pressurized overflow tank just in front of the passenger under the hood (highest point in the system). The "T" is in the line from the air vent/heat expansion path from the top passenger side of radiator. That radiator vent/heat expansion path is also NOT flowing once the engine heats up. The TB Coolant Design is in regard to VENTING Air and not TB heating and then only during initial engine heating up (And then only if you have a lot of air in your coolant system after opening up your coolant system for repairs or leaks such as coolant leak repair or Plenum/IH Housing, Head removal or Water Pump/Thermostat/Radiator repair).

2. The TB coolant and top side of radiator vent back to the pressurized expansion tank (High point in coolant system) receive air/coolant as the engine is heated up and coolant/air in the system expands.

3. As coolant/air expands (as engine is heated up) the excess air/coolant overflows through the pressurized radiator cap in that high point pressurized expansion tank to the coolant reservoir under the passenger side headlight.

4. The purpose of that system is to allow coolant/air to move back and forth between the coolant expansion tank and coolant reservoir as coolant/air expands during engine heats up/cools down purging the system of air. This occurs by the fact once the coolant system air is forced out the pressurized radiator cap to coolant reservoir, only coolant returns from the reservoir as the coolant system retracts while engine cools once turned off (assuming you have proper coolant levels in the overflow tank under the passenger side head light).

5. Now back to TB coolant.............There is no coolant/air flow between the top side of radiator or TB to the coolant expansion tank on passenger side (high point in system) once the engine is heated up. A CAVEAT would be the small coolant head loss in the IH manifolds to the top side of radiator which would be equalized by a identical small coolant head loss of any flow through the TB and back to the top side of radiator via the coolant expansion tank (a very small diameter line and a very small coolant flow rate).

6. It appears to me that the only reasons for TB coolant (when there is movement of coolant/air between top side of radiator, TB, and expansion tank) is:
A. To warm up the TB QUICKER during engine initial heat up and to move coolant/air from the IH housing coolant manifolds back the coolant expansion tank quicker. This all happens when you first start the engine up when the thermostat is closed and radiator circulation is stagnant.
B. To prevent icing of the Throttle Body when temperatures are below approximately 10 deg F.

7. In other words, with the LT5 coolant system at first start up with a cold engine the coolant is recirculated entirely in the engine and not through the radiator. The TB coolant as the engine coolant expands then allows coolant/air a path back to the coolant expansion tank when there is no return of that expansion from the radiator since the radiator is cold and not functioning yet.

8. Once the thermostat opens up the radiator coolant expansion occurs as the radiator heats up pushing more air from the top side of the radiator to the expansion tank. So if you block the TB coolant you do not let the air out during initial engine coolant heating but that is not an issue if you do in fact have most of the air out of the system during initial coolant fill. Coolant/air can expand through the radiator even though the thermostat is closed however as the engine heats up.

9. The coolant system air has a second chance to excape to the expansion tank during radiator coolant/air expansion once the thermostate opens up allowing hot coolant to flow through the radiator.

10. Throttle Body Coolant Line Blocked
https://cimg4.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...88c37c2687.jpg

A. You can Block TB Coolant at Injector Housing.
You can Block TB Coolant at Injector Housing without removing Injector Housings.
Recommend removing Two Injector Housing Coolant Manifolds to Block TB Coolant at Injector Housings.
You can then keep or eliminate the Plenum hoses/tube on passenger side or leave it in place.
No more hose clamps required on the TB Coolant Hoses to TB if you want to leave the stock look.
You do have to Block TB Coolant near Coolant Reservoir if you Block TB Coolant at Injector Housing.
B. You can also Bypass TB Coolant with the Coolant circulating through the Injector Housing/Plenum.

1991 LT5 with TB Coolant Blocked at Injector housing,
ALL TB Coolant Hoses and Tube eliminated using 1/8 inch Allen Pipe Plugs

https://cimg6.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...0b2f5f80bf.jpg

1990 LT5 with TB Coolant Blocked at Injector housing, ALL TB Coolant Hoses
and Tube In Place

https://cimg8.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...f24e77caff.jpg

Last UPDATE of post 13 Aug, 2017

Dynomite 02-20-2012 11:46 PM

Coolant Characteristics (Mix, Pressure, Elevation)
 
Coolant Characteristics (Mix, Pressure, Elevation)

High Coolant Temperatures have happened before........stay out of slow traffic in hot weather for long periods of time especially climbing steep hills.

Check for coolant in the oil (coolant will sit at the bottom of oil pan). Check for oil in the coolant (oil will float on top of the coolant in the coolant reservoir in front of passenger side). If your oil level seems to be increasing or decreasing or your coolant level decreasing abnormally that is another indicator. You are checking for a failed Head Gasket.

Do a compression test once in a while to make sure nothing is going on with head gasket, valves, rings.

Then sit back and drive up that hill keeping the speed up to at least 20 mph....40 mph preferred........you NEED some dynamic air flow around the radiator :cheers:

If you continue to do this......definitley turn on your fans at lower coolant temperatures and Turn your AC off at those high temps when climbing that hill (better for you to suffer than your engine) :D

Stock Fan Control on ZR-1s
'90 - '92 Primary fan on at 226 degs. F, off at 216 degs. Secondary Fan on at 234 degs. F, off at 225 degs.

Marc's chips turn Cooling Fans on at 205 deg and off at 200 deg. Those Chips will give you a few minutes more of cooling you do not have with a stock chip maybe enough time to get you to the top of the hill :D

Custom Engine Calibrations
LT5 Performance Engine Calibrations

I expect you will have NO issues unless you have run with loss of coolant such that you were circulating air entrained coolant. Or coolant mix was such that those temperatures caused coolant to boil off which you would notice in your coolant overflow tank under right headlight :thumbs:

This from a Google Search for Specifics on Boiling Characteristics of Coolant
The pressure cap on a cooling system is the key to raising the boiling point of the 50/50 mix of antifreeze and distilled water. For every pound of pressure cap rating the boiling of point of the above mixture raises 3 degrees. If you had plain water in your cooling system with a 15 pound pressure cap the water would boil @ 257 degrees. If you had a 50/50 mix of antifreeze and water the coolant would boil @ 265 degrees with a 15 pound cap. The boiling point would raise to 270 degrees if you had a 60% antifreeze mixture with a 15 pound cap. If you had a 70% mixture the boiling point would raise to 276 degrees.

Don't be fooled by the old wives tail that by adding a richer antifreeze mixture will keep the complete system cooler. In fact it works just the opposite. As you know pure antifreeze has a higher viscosity rating than plain distilled water. The higher the antifreeze mixture percentage its ability to adsorb heat from the engine goes down. The higher the antifreeze mixture percentage also retards the radiator's ability to get rid of the coolant heat.

Race cars use pure water in their cooling systems because it adsorbs heat from the engine and gets rid if it in the radiator better than any antifreeze mixture.

It's to your cooling systems advantage to mix your pure antifreeze/water mixture to protect the engine from freezeing 10 degrees lower than last years coldest day last winter.

Pure antifreeze boils @ 387 degrees Farenheit in atmosphere.

I also happen to know you are at high elevations ;)

This from a Google Search on Specifics on the Boiling Characteristics of Coolant Related to Elevation
With NO pressure cap......Water boils at 212 degrees at sea level. Water boils at 204 degrees at 4,000 feet elevation. Water boiled at 192 degres at 9,000 feet elevation. A 50/50 mixture of water to anti freeze will boil at 227 degrees at sea level. A 50/50 mixture of water to anti freeze will boil at 220 degrees at 4,000 feet elevation. A 50/50 mixture of water to anti freeze will boil at 212 degrees at 9,000 feet elevation. The anti freeze referred to here is ethylene glycol based. Both of these are with no pressure cap on the radiator. You can add 7 degrees to the boling point with the addition of each 1lb of pressure on the pressure cap.

Last UPDATE of post 14 Aug, 2017

Dynomite 02-20-2012 11:46 PM

Lifting The LT5
 
Lifting The LT5

1. Engine Lift
a. Harbor Freight 2 Ton Engine Lift set on 1 Ton for this lift.
c. 1 Ton setting provided the reach to install the engine in the ZR-1 while on KwikLift with Hood installed.

https://cimg3.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...5cc9c973b3.jpg

2. TIPS and Notes Additional TIPS
a. ZR-1 on KwikLift with front lowered to assist in tilting engine to rear during installation.
b. Remove windshield wiper motor (drivers side). *
c. Engine was installed without the bell housing, plenum, fuel rails. **
d. Use custom design spreader bar under the load leveler and Harbor Freight 2 ton hydraulic lift. ***
e. With this setup, you can install LT5 in ZR1 on KwikLift with front of ZR1 facing forward (front of KwikLift on ground).
f. Leave hood on.
g. With this set up I have recently pulled an LT5 with SW Headers installed with no issues. You cannot use the standard lift eyes if you want to install the LT5 with headers however (use soft slings around Flywheel and Harmonic Balancer). See Installing Engine In ZR1

*Note: Reach through windshield wiper grille (the small removable access above windshield wiper motor arm connection). With socket wrench just loosen the two nuts on each windshield wiper arm (DO NOT REMOVE THOSE NUTS). Slide both windshield wiper arms off the motor sockets. Relube those windshield wiper sockets on the motor when reinstalling the windshield wiper arms. Remove the three bolts holding the windshield wiper motor in place and remove motor. Locate the wiper arm at 5:00 clock time looking toward front of engine. To reinstall the wiper arms reaching through the removable access with a long needle nose plyers you can slip the arms back on the socket and tighten the nuts after you reinstall the wiper motor. Relocate the wiper arm at its home postion before attaching the wiper arms (9:00 clock time looking toward front of engine). How to Replace the Wiper Motor

**Note: Install Cam Covers and plugs before installing the engine in the Z. This prevents anything from falling into the Camshaft area or Cylinders during engine installation. It is much easier to install Cam Covers with engine out of Z vice with engine installed (requires the loosening of "C" Beam Plates and Motor Mounts to tilt engine down in rear for access of two lower rear Drivers Side Cam Cover Bolts).

***Note: The custom design spread bar adapter was used to match the distance between the standard LT5 lift padeyes and Load Leveler lift points. The Load Leveler is attached to hydraulic lift on a swivel which allows the engine to be rotated around the vertical axis. You cannot use the standard lift eyes (shown in photo) if you want to install the LT5 with headers however (use soft slings around Flywheel and Harmonic Balancer).

https://cimg4.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...16c3e1ca73.jpg

3. Summary Installing a LT5 in a 91' ZR-1
a. I removed the Wiper Motor as Ben suggested which was a 15 minute job. That removed the possible contact of the Wiper Motor with my powder coated Cam Covers while lowering the Harmonic Balancer past the front cross member :D

b. I installed the LT5 without Plenum, or Bell Housing. Those items were attached after the engine was installed in the Z.

c. I used KwikLift ramps sloped down in front for engine installation and then raised for completion of component installation.

d. It was easy sliding (KwikLift Creeper) under the Z for Bell Housing installation followed by Transmission and Drive Line installation with "C" Frame alignment.

e. That followed by SW Headers and SW exhaust system installation and adjustment.

f. The Ron Davis Radiator was then installed last adjusting ALL SAMCO coolant hose clamps for accessability using my flat screw driver. The last SAMCO hose installed was the short "L" on the drivers side IH Housing Coolant Manifold after filling with coolant making sure I had coolant at that level.

g. Installing the Plenum after engine installed was almost a necessity as the starter electric and Ignition Module (attached under the Plenum) electric was accessable only within the engine compartment. This also was a necessity for installation of the AC Compressor (before installation of the Plenum) under the Plenum (AC not disconnected). The Power Steering Pump was then connected to its position in front of the drivers side Head without disconnecting Power Steering Hydraulics.

h. I installed the Wiper Motor and Plenum after the engine was installed avoiding contact of the MAP sensor with the rear firewall. Installing the Wiper Motor and Plenum was a 15 minute job for each with engine installed. :cheers:

I wanted to get used to installing the Plenum with engine installed :D

The only thing I forgot to do before I installed the LT5 was check the Oil Pressure Regulating Valve (OPRV) Cover bolts for tightness which I later did but hard to accomplish with engine installed :hide:

Last UPDATE of post 15 Aug, 2017

Dynomite 02-20-2012 11:46 PM

Lifting and Towing the ZR-1
 
Lifting and Towing the ZR-1

See ZR-1 Transmission Install and Lift Tricks for a general discussion related to lifting the ZR-1 during transmission installation.

1. Lifting the ZR-1.
ZR1 Lifting techniques using a floor jack, jack stands and ramps are described herein. A Steel adapter has been designed and proven safe to lift the rear axle directly under the center of the rear spring mount using a floor jack. The ZR1 can be lifted to a height such that ramps can be inserted from the side under each rear wheel.

A Wooden Drive On Adapter has also been designed to get the front lift point (The front cross member just in front of the oil pan) high enough so a Floor Jack can be positioned under the Front Cross Frame (one Wooden Drive On Adapter is used under each front wheel). The Front Wooden Drive On Adapter consists of three 2x12s (you can see the approximate lengths of each of the three pieces) screwed together to form a single Wooden Drive On Lift. The Wooden Drive On Adapter allows you to drive on without interferring with the front skirt.

The ZR1 can then be driven off the ramps when work is completed without any further use of a floor jack. The adapter can be positioned on a floor jack lift pad and rolled under the spare tire area directly under the rear spring mount just behind the stock exhaust system.

The adapter is a 4 inch OD by 3/8 wall extra strong pipe section 5 inches long.

The pipe adapter is captured between the rear spring mount bolts, exhaust, spare tire on the ZR1 and by the floor jack lift pad which is usually cupped securing the pipe adapter from lateral movement.

The Steel Pipe Adapter
https://cimg6.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...0c14fdb3e7.jpghttps://cimg7.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...cac0c3d4d9.jpg

Lifting the Rear Axle
https://cimg8.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...3389c11646.jpghttps://cimg9.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...62561f62ce.jpg

The Drive Off Ramp under each rear wheel..................The Drive On Adapter under front wheels
https://cimg0.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...f398c7d3da.jpghttps://cimg1.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...1d2df56e15.jpg

Lifting The Front Cross Frame (note wood block between jack pad and cross frame)
When jacking the front center I use a 2x4x6 pad placed under the cross member so it is beneath the front part with the vertical stiffener. If you jack in the center of that cross member it will bend up a tad which you do not want to do.

https://cimg2.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...e874e17b67.jpghttps://cimg3.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...a0cbaf7271.jpg

Now it you jack up one side very high that does twist the body so I tend to limit the height I jack one side.
I just jack high enough at the side (just behind the front wheel) jacking points (not on the plastic but on the steel rim where it curves) to just getting the tire free of the ground for removal.


Front just behind front Wheel Well between two Hash Marks
https://cimg2.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...7db2fac0af.jpg

Rear just in front of rear Wheel Well between two Hash Marks
https://cimg6.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...7f09a56f12.jpg


Originally Posted by cruban (Post 276460)
Did the same thing listed above but added this under the pinch weld.
Rubber Jack Pad Medium Size

The Best Jack is this 3 Ton Floor Jack from Harbor Frieght
https://cimg6.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...98bfc2a095.jpg

2. Towing the ZR-1.

Emergency Kit.....15 ft tow rope (5,000 lb vehicle rating), Jumper Cables, Tow Adapter, Lug Wrench
https://cimg4.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...2920b39d74.jpg

Daniel_Mc provided a concept/photo of a Tow Adapter for a ZR-1 that in its simplicity I just could not pass up :thumbs:
So......I designed one after the photo provided by Daniel_Mc and had a local steel shop fabricate the Tow Adapter.
I did some towing tests to see if there are any issues or limitations. One limitation will be towing at an angle in a turn which this adapter without being bolted on the back side of the cross member will not function (that did not seem to be an issue during the tow tests). The Tow Adapter is made from 1/8 inch steel plate which is substantial and flexible enough to tow the ZR-1 with Nylon Tow Ropes having a steel hook on one end.

https://cimg5.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...b846f7353a.jpghttps://cimg6.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...b8d4853830.jpg

The Tow Adapter is made to engage the 1-1/4 inch square tubing of the frame support under the front of the ZR-1.
https://cimg7.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...b7a73484cb.jpghttps://cimg8.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...5b99fea9b8.jpg

A. Tow Adapter Description.

When needed for towing, the Tow Adapter is slipped through a 4 inch x 1/8 inch slot in the front Air Spoiler. There are two 1/2 inch holes (not shown in photos) in the Tow Adapter plate (one for 90' and one for 91') depending on which model year you use the Tow Adapter. 1/4 inch Allen Head Bolts are inserted into one hole or other with large Pan Head Washers on each side (and adjusted snug against the Air Spoiler. The 1/4 inch Allen Head bolt keeps the Tow Adapter in place if you want to keep it installed as you drive.
https://cimg9.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...ffdf8e2840.jpghttps://cimg0.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...5559ec9e12.jpg

The best tool to make the 4 inch x 1/8 inch slot in the front Air Spoiler is an Angle Grinder (with Cut Off wheel).
The Tow Adapter sticks out beyond the skirt about 4 inches on a 91' and about 6 inches on a 90'.

https://cimg1.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...fb2cb67502.jpghttps://cimg2.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...8a7ecc9d8c.jpg

A nylon tow rope (a steel hook on the end is required) can be attached to the receiver in the Tow Adapter (2 inch x 2-1/2 inch hole).

B. Installing the Tow Adapter.

The Tow Adapter is simply installed by reaching under the Air Spoiler and inserting the front tip of the Tow Adapter into the slot in the Air Spoiler. Push forward and then lightly tap the rear of the Tow Adapter onto the cross member with a small hammer. The Tow Adapter is removed by lightly tapping on the front tip of the Tow Adapter with a small hammer.

C. Testing Tow Adapter.

The Tow Adapter was tested towing the 91' ZR-1 with a lawn tractor on gravel. A small nylon sling was used for towing. The Tow Adapter was NOT bolted to the frame in any way.

https://cimg4.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...a87d313265.jpghttps://cimg6.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...6d13d3eca8.jpg

When towing at an angle of 45 degrees the front wheels were turned in the direction of towing. With a lawn tractor and the use of this Tow Adapter, the ZR-1 could be backed into the street and with a lawn tractor pulled and then releasing the clutch in second gear starting the engine if your battery is dead. There was no deformation of the Tow Adapter during these tests :thumbs:

Towing in a straight line......................................... ...Towing at an angle of 45 degrees.
https://cimg9.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...08c5e90ae1.jpghttps://cimg0.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...5119712cba.jpg

D. Storing Tow Adapter.

I have elected to carry the tow adapter on the right side of the passenger seat where it fits perfectly with my Gorilla Lug Wrench. I have found with the tow adapter installed it is easy to hit it with a curb when parking. It is very easy to slip in place if needed without jacking the vehicle.

Tow Adapter Stored next to Passenger Seat......................Gorilla Lug Wrench
https://cimg1.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...0c84862568.jpghttps://cimg2.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...625a82bb07.jpg


Last UPDATE of post 16 Mar, 2018

rickyrj1 02-21-2012 08:08 AM

Tremendous post! Great Job & Thank You for your time & effort in putting it together. :rock:

Dynomite 04-04-2012 02:04 PM

Engine Lubrication System Functional Discussion
 
The Oil Filter Adapter has many important functions. The Oil Filter Adapter is NOT for the sole purpose of holding/adapting the Oil Filter.

The oil paths through the Oil Filter Adapter Housing are describe in Item #5 below.

1. A Discussion of the Functions of the Oil Filter Adapter.
a. Control Oil Temperature. See Related ECM Code #52 Item #3 ZR1 ECM CODES 1990 TO 1992
b. Provide Sensor Feedback to the Instrument Panel.
c. Provide Oil Filtration.
d. Assure proper Oil Flow at any Oil Temperature.
e. Assure proper Oil Flow with contaminated Oil Filters.

The Oil Pressure Regulating Valve situated between the Oil Pump and Oil Filter Adapter controls and maintains Consistent Oil Pressure.

As an aside
2. Oil Pressure Sensor (Dash Gauge) Malfunction I changed out the oil pressure sensor for the dash gauge (top of oil filter) after engine installation. Oil pressure cold was registering 75 lbs. After changing out the oil pressure sensor, oil pressure is registering 55 lbs steady hot or cold and does not increase much with revs.

Oil Filter Adapter Sensors ........................................ ......Oil Filter Adapter Ports and Sensors
https://cimg8.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...9b8c61ffd4.jpghttps://cimg9.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...ed65e13e8c.jpg

3. LT5 Oil Pressure and Oil Temperature Regulation

a. The Oil Pressure Regulation Valve (OPRV) (just after oil pump) opening pressure is 50-60 psi.

https://cimg0.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...27c95368f6.jpghttps://cimg2.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...5879d8e082.jpg

b. The Oil Cooler Bypass Valve on the Oil Filter Adapter allows oil to bypass the open oil cooler at hot temperatures since oil cooler is a bit restrictive. This valve raises the pressure a bit on the flow trying to bypass the oil cooler making sure some oil does go through the oil cooler.
c. The Oil Temperature Control Valve on oil filter housing opens oil flow from the oil cooler. The temperature opening characteristics of this valve are Thermostat-Open-203 degree F, Fully open-266 degree F.
d. The Oil Filter Bypass Valve on oil filter housing allows oil to bypass oil filter if the oil filter becomes to restrictive.
e. Oil pressure is always available to the Oil Cooler Bypass Valve. Oil flows from the oil pump (past the OPRV) to the oil filter through the Oil cooler and through the Oil Cooler Bypass Valve or directly through the Oil Temperature Control valve when the oil temperature is below 203 deg F. The oil cooler flow return and Oil Cooler Bypass Valve are open at the same time. The oil flow from the oil cooler is never totally blocked (half moon cutout of shuttle valve). The Oil pump flow at Idle is 1.6 gpm and the Oil pump flow at 7,000 rpm is 9.1 gpm.

4. Oil Filter Adapter Functional Details

Oil Temperature Control Valve Assembly.....................Oil Temperature Valve Thermostat opens at 203 deg F
https://cimg3.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...d4eafe8fc0.jpghttps://cimg4.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...4195402d1f.jpg

Oil Temperature Shuttle Valve Open (HOT)............................Oil Termperature Shuttle Valve Closed (COLD)
https://cimg5.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...ae23615b85.jpghttps://cimg6.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...8df8b1de68.jpg

Oil Cooler Bypass Valve Inside........................................ ..........Oil Cooler Bypass Valve Outside
This valve raises the pressure a bit on the flow
trying to bypass the oil cooler making sure some
oil does go through the oil cooler
.
https://cimg7.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...11412fa1a5.jpghttps://cimg8.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...15c409f497.jpg

Oil Temperature Control Valve Compensation..............Oil Filter Adapter (Oil Temperature Valve Housing)
The orifice allows the valve to move
without being hydraulically locked in place.

https://cimg9.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...db6e15873e.jpghttps://cimg1.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...5389a91e2a.jpg

5. Oil Flow Paths.

COLD - Oil Temperature Less than 203 deg F.
a. The Oil is pushed up from the bottom Port on the Oil Filter Adapter Housing past the TOP Oil Cooler Port which is ALWAYS OPEN.
b. The Oil then is pushed through the Top Opening of the Oil Temperature Control Valve to the bottom of the Temperature Control Valve Port.
c. The Oil is also pushed against the Oil Cooler Bypass Valve which it will not open since the path through the Temperature Control Valve Port is Open.
d. Some Oil flows through the Oil Cooler back into the Bottom Oil Cooler Port since the Bottom of the Temperature Control Valve has a Half Moon Port that is Always Open.
e. The Oil then pushed up through the Oil Filter Outside Diameter and also against the Oil FIlter Bypass Valve just in case the Oil Filter is too Restrictive.
d. The Oil is then pushed out the center Oil Filter Adapter Fitting (M20x1.5) past the Oil Pressure Sensor for Dash Gauge, past the Oil Temperature Sensor, and past the Oil Pressure Switch Light on Dash Sensor out the Top of the Bottom Ports of the Oil Filter Housing Adapter to the Crankshaft and Top End Camshafts. The Oil pressurizes and lubricates the Timing Chain Tensioners and Timing Chains as the oil flows.
See Timing Chain Idler Sprocket Lubrication and Installation

WARM - Oil Temperature greater than 203 deg F but less than 266 deg F.
a. The direct Oil Path to the Oil Filter through the Oil Temperature Control Valve is not yet closed but is becoming Restrictive.
b. The Bottom Port of the Oil Temperature Control Valve is Opening beyond the Half Moon Port.
c. The Oil Path around the Oil Temperature Control Valve through the Oil Cooler Bypass Valve may come into play.
d. The Oil is then pushed out the center Oil Filter Adapter Fitting (M20x1.5) past the Oil Pressure Sensor for Dash Gauge, past the Oil Temperature Sensor, and past the Oil Pressure Switch Light on Dash Sensor out the Top of the Bottom Ports of the Oil Filter Housing Adapter to the Crankshaft and Top End Camshafts. The Oil pressurizes and lubricates the Timing Chain Tensioners and Timing Chains as the oil flows.
See Timing Chain Idler Sprocket Lubrication and Installation

HOT - Oil Temperature greater than 266 deg F.
a. The Top of the Oil Temperature Control Valve Port Through the Oil Temperature Control Valve is now completely Closed.
b. All Oil is directed through the Oil Cooler (Top Oil Cooler Port) or through the Oil Cooler Bypass Valve around (outside) the top of the Oil Temperature Control Valve.
c. The Bottom of the Oil Temperature Control Valve Port is now completely open allowing Oil to go from the Oil Cooler through the bottom of the Oil Temperature Control Valve directly to the Oil Filter and Oil Filter Bypass Valve.
d. Some Oil passing through the Oil Cooler Bypass Valve will flow directly to the Oil Filter and Oil Filter Bypass Valve depending on the Restrictions to Oil Flow through the Oil Cooler.
e. The Oil is then pushed out the center Oil Filter Adapter Fitting (M20x1.5) past the Oil Pressure Sensor for Dash Gauge, past the Oil Temperature Sensor, and past the Oil Pressure Switch Light on Dash Sensor out the Top of the Bottom Ports of the Oil Filter Housing Adapter to the Crankshaft and Top End Camshafts. The Oil pressurizes and lubricates the Timing Chain Tensioners and Timing Chains as the oil flows.
See Timing Chain Idler Sprocket Lubrication and Installation

6. There IS an Oil Level Sensor on the 91'-95' ZR-1 Oil Pan.

The Oil Pan for 1990, 91 & 92 are interchangable with the only difference being, the 1990 LT5 engine was not equipped with a Low Oil Level Sensor. The extra material was cast into the pan but not machined for the screw-in sensor. As such, the oil level indicator would not be functional if the 1990 oil pan is used for 1991 & 1992 applications Oil Level Sensor TIPS

Brass Oil Level Sensor 93'-95' Jerrys Brass Oil Level Sensor 93' to 95'
https://cimg2.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...ff0763a056.jpghttps://cimg5.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...8ea3d161dd.jpg

Plastic oil Level Sensor 91'-92' Summit Racing Oil Level Sensor
Jerrys Plastic Oil Level Sensor
https://cimg4.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...d870e20918.jpghttps://cimg6.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...0233004e4a.png
https://cimg3.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...80865bc748.jpg

Last UPDATE of post 18 Dec, 2017

Dynomite 04-04-2012 02:06 PM

LT5 Lubrication Tricks and Replace Dipstick Handle
 
LT5 Lubrication Tricks

1. Oil Pressure Switch Rotated.
The Oil Pressure Switch was rotated 90 deg which allows for easy access.
The additional JIC connection (capped in photo) allows for a Pre Oiler or mechanical oil pressure gauge connection.

Oil Pressure Switch rotated 90 Deg
https://cimg3.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...71ead82ca6.jpg

Background - LT5 Oil Pressure Regulation

The Oil Pressure Regulation Valve (just after oil pump) opening pressure is 50-60 psi Oil Pressure Regulation Valve

The Oil Cooler Bypass Valve on oil filter housing allows oil to bypass the open oil cooler at hot temperatures since oil cooler is a bit restrictive. This valve raises the pressure a bit on the flow trying to bypass the oil cooler making sure some oil does go through the oil cooler.

The Oil Temperature Control Valve on oil filter housing opens oil flow from the oil cooler. The temperature opening characteristics of this valve are Thermostat-Open-203 degree F, Fully open-266 degree F.

The Oil Filter Bypass Valve on oil filter housing allows oil to bypass oil filter if the oil filter becomes to restrictive.

It appears that oil flow is always open to the Oil Cooler Bypass Valve. Oil is not always open directly from the oil pump to the oil filter except through the Oil cooler and Oil Cooler Bypass Valve when the flow from the oil cooler is open. The oil cooler flow return and Oil Cooler Bypass Valve are open at the same time. When the oil flow from the oil cooler is blocked, the oil from oil pump to oil filter is open flow. Oil pump flow at Idle-1.6 gpm, Oil pump flow at 7,000 rpm-9.1 gpm.

As an aside, the after market SS oil cooler lines and aluminum manifold are a bit larger ID than stock with 10AN aeroquip reusable hose end fittings (1/2 inch ID). The 10AN adapter at the aluminum manifold (appears to be M18 x 1.5 or 10AN O ring straight thread) adapts the 10AN ID to the stock manifold hose ID (appears to be 3/8 inch). On the other end at the oil filter housing, the 10AN SS oil cooler line fittings adapt to the 12AN oil filter housing fittings. The stock oil cooler lines have 12AN fittings but smaller than 10AN hose ID.

2. Oil Catch Can.
The Elite Oil Catch Can is attached directly to the front of plenum vacuum source and directly to the PVC connection (use 1/4 inch brass m/m hose nipple) at rear of plenum using SS Braided hose and reusable swivel hose fittings.

Elite Oil Catch Can
https://cimg4.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...90de338c0d.jpg
https://cimg6.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...8e1113ced7.jpg

a. Used a small steel channel (about 3/8 x 1 x 6 inches) which the flanges are ground to fit the curve of the inside wheel well (at a 45 deg angle).
b. Drilled two 3/8 inch holes in the steel channel to fit the hanger that came with the Oil Catch Can.
c. Drilled two holes to match in wheel well to match.
d. The fit of the oil catch can is very tight against inside of wheel well.
e. Oil Catch Can sits directly above the upper A-Arm rear pivot within 1/2 inch of the pivot.
f. Painted the steel channel black.
g. Used small steel hose clamps on each end of SS Braided hose which keeps hose SS braid from fraying.

https://cimg7.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...321ebeaeaa.jpg

The Oil Catch Can Mount was attached using 1/4 inch Wing Nuts for easy removal. The PCV Nipple is 1/4 inch brass male/male installed in PVC rubber connector.
Oil Catch can Elite Engineering USA
SS Braided hose Summit Racing Braided Hose
Hose ends Summit Racing Hose Ends

https://cimg8.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...333640a476.jpghttps://cimg9.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...8ba0f7eeee.jpg

3. Dipstick Handle Replace.
The Dipstick Handle which is Plastic is usually cracked. I replaced the handle with a Chrome Oil Dipstick Handle

https://cimg6.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...7eaa9db4a9.jpg

I removed the cracked Plastic Stock Dipstick Handle. Once removed, there is a FLAT with a dimple. I drilled the dimple through with a 5/32 drill bit. I then put that end of the dipstick to a grinder and shortened that end so the hole I drilled lined up with the New Chrome Dipstick Allen Head Bolt hole.
https://cimg1.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...36079dfb97.jpg

The Chrome Dipstick Handle (5/32" Diameter Allen Head screw with 2.5mm hex Allen head) was then installed using several small brass washers (approximately 5/32" ID) to secure/compress the existing shaft between the two halves of the New Chrome Dipstick Handle.

Dipstick Handle showing 2.5mm Allen Head Screw ...........Chrome Dipstick Handle Installed showing Brass Washers
https://cimg2.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...81eec4fa99.jpghttps://cimg3.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...28df10d7ee.jpg

The existing straight portion of the Dipstick was then placed in a vice and the handle bent and twisted to align the Chrome Handle with the Cam Covers similar to the original alignment.

The New Billet Aluminum Dipstick with BIG RED OIL Letters fits perfectly with the Billet Aluminum Oil Fill Cap I found on Ebay
Search Ebay CORVETTE LT1 BILLET CHROME SCREW IN STYLE OIL CAP
Ebay Billet Aluminum Oil Cap (fits 90' & 91' LT5 & L98).


https://cimg4.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...32189a8dac.jpghttps://cimg5.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...38d4c5d975.jpg

If you place the stock Dipstick in a vice at the flat just below the first squiggles and then with Dipstick Handled INSTALLED...you can twist the Stock Dipstick any direction you want but you have to go over center to make the twist stay. You can also bend the part between the collar and handle but you then have to keep the Dipstick from turning. So it is not too easy for some.......I was about to take a torch and heat the Stock Dipstick End before I figured out that hardened metal Dipstick could be twisted and bent without breaking.

The beauty of the Stock Dipstick is if you break off the cheap Plastic Handle there is a very nice FLAT with that dimple where the outer part of the top part is swedged onto the smaller Flat making a slighty LARGER Flat to work with.

I was going to enclose the bottom of the New Chrome Dipstick Handle with JB Weld but found that not necessary because it absolutely does not show at all until you remove the Dipstick. I may enclose that area with some JB Weld and Rustoleum Black Heat Resistant Paint.

Last UPDATE of post 19 Nov, 2020

Dynomite 07-12-2012 11:22 PM

Potential Oil Leaks and the OPRV Cover Plate
 
Potential Oil Leaks and the OPRV Cover Plate

1. Potential Oil Leaks.

A. OPRV (Oil Pressure Regulating Valve cover plate )......It will appear that the oil pan front bolts are loose and leaking at gasket.
B. Oil Pressure Switch and Oil Pressure Sensor.....
C. Cam Covers.....
D. Camshaft circular rubber plugs (two each end of each Head).....
E. Oil Cooler Hoses/Connections.....
F. There is an Oil Level Sensor on Oil Pan....(not on 1990).
G. Oil Pan Bolts (especially front three 8mm bolts).
H. Center Bolt/Stud on Exhaust Manifold (one each side).
But I would say the one that stumped me the most was that OPRV cover. And prolly the hardest to get at (two 6 mm bolts using an 8 mm Socket wrench).

Marc Haibeck Oil Leak Summary

The most common oil leak is an oil pan gasket leak which is often misdiagnosed. What is really leaking is the Oil Pressure Regulating Valve Cover Plate. It will appear as a drip of oil and oily surface on the right front of the oil pan. Often the tendency is to tighten the front oil pan bolts with no success on stopping the oil leak. The Oil Pressure Regulating Valve Cover leak can also be misdiagnosed as a Front Crankshaft Seal leak. The symptoms are a film of oil progressing rearward on bottom of oil pan or an actual drip of oil on the right front oil pan bolts.

2. Oil Pressure Regulating Valve Cover Plate (1990-1991 ZR-1).

The Oil Presure Regulating Valve is located on passenger side front of engine just above the oil pan. The two 6 mm bolts that hold the OPRV cover plate (and gasket) to the Engine sometimes come loose.

https://cimg6.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...f30a65199e.jpg

There is an OPRV Cover plate gasket but I just removed and cleaned the two 6 mm bolts (8 mm heads) one at a time and applied Blue Loctite (You could use Red Loctite as you like). I used Blue Loctite because I figured it was a temporary fix but appears to be a permanent fix. I reached in from the top front of the engine to get access to the two 6 mm bolts with an 8 mm hex flex head ratchet wrench. An easier method of access to the Oil Pressure Regulating Valve Cover Plate is from the bottom as described in item #3 below.

Somtimes interlock an open end box wrench (box end interlocked with open end of flex head rachet wrench)
to gain length for that bolt out of normal reach.


Since such a tight area to work in with engine in car I removed each 6 mm bolt one at a time so I did not drop the cover plate or gasket. So...no permatex on that gasket but both 6 mm bolts cleaned and Blue Loctite applied.

Since the bolts and plate were so loose I figured correctly just tightening the 6 mm bolts with Blue Loctite would solve the oil leak and loose bolt problem (The gasket was stuck to the engine block and not the cover plate). I tightened the bolts by feel as I could not get torque wrench even close to that area unless engine is out of car. No more oil leaks in that area at all.

The BEST fix, however, is to replace those two 6mm x 15mm bolts having 8mm heads with two 6mm x 15mm bolts with 10mm heads as described in item #3 below.

Torque for 6 mm bolts is about 89 in-lbs but in that area with no oil pressure to contend with less bolt torque with Blue Loctite or maybe Red Loctite is just fine :thumbsup:

3. Oil Pressure Regulating Valve Cover Plate (1995 ZR-1).

On the 1995 ZR-1 the Oil Pressure Valve Cover Plate is impossible to get to from above because of the EGR. But....one can get to that Cover Plate from below by removing the Passenger side strut that the Passenger Side Motor Mount is bolted to (no pressure on that strut from motor mount). Remove two 15mm bolts toward front and two 13mm bolts on frame rail passenger side. Remove 18mm Nut from Motor Mount Stud and drop the strut. The Oil Pressure Valve Cover Plate can be easily seen toward front where Strut was positioned. The bottom 6mm bolt is easy to unscrew and the top 6mm bolt required a vice grips gripping an 8mm open end to loosen. Both 6mm x 15mm Bolts with 8mm Heads were replaced with 6mm x 15mm Bolts with 10mm Heads.

https://cimg7.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...95e480a52e.jpghttps://cimg8.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...9e0db87d7f.jpg

4. The Trick to STOP oil leaks from the Oil Pressure Control Valve Cover plate.

I replace both top and bottom 6mm x 15mm bolts with 6mm x 15mm Flange Bolts (Ebay and as pictured above) that have a 10mm head for a 10mm Box or ratchet Box wrench. It is a lot easier to tighten a 10mm bolt than an 8mm bolt which sometimes strips in the small 8mm box wrench. I used Red Loctite on the 6mm x 16mm Flange Bolts. No need to remove the Oil Pressure Valve Cover Plate or associated gasket.

https://cimg0.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...87fb06aa31.jpg

Two 6mm x 15mm Flange Bolts installed in Oil Pressure Regulator Valve Cover (10mm Heads)
replacing original 6mm x 15mm (8mm Heads) Bolts.

Top 6mm Bolt shown before tightening with 10mm Box Wrench

https://cimg1.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...a1dcf53faa.jpg

Last UPDATE of post 20 Mar, 2018

Dynomite 07-12-2012 11:23 PM

LT5 Camshaft Specifications and Camshaft General Timing (pinning)
 
LT5 Camshaft Specifications and Camshaft General Timing (pinning)

1. Reground Camshafts Specifications.

425 intake .420 exhaust
Regrind Intake Camshaft .236 .425 (Pete)
Regrind Exhaust Camshaft .220 .425 (Pete)
Camshaft Timing........114 deg ATDC Intake 110 BTDC Exhaust

Camshaft Identifications

1 flat RH Intake
1 raised RH Exhaust
1 flat,1 raised LH Intake
2 raised LH Exhaust

https://cimg3.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...d9948b950d.jpghttps://cimg0.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...e5273a2451.jpg

2. Camshaft General Timing by Pinning.

a. Set the camshaft timing relatively close using the pinning method (using a 15/64 drill bit as a pin).
b. Use Cylinder #1 for drivers side bank and Cylinder #6 for passenger side bank.
c. Install Timing Chain temporary manual tensioners.

Use Jeffvette Billet Aluminum Camshaft Retainers which will remain in place after camshaft timing is complete.

To start the cam timing process rotate the crankshaft to the 51 deg mark BTDC on the front pulley aligned with "0" on timing plate (degree wheel installed on front crankshaft pulley).
Keep in mind that this discussion is for the Drivers side Heads. For the Passenger side Heads use cylinder number 6 instead of cylinder number 1 when setting the camshaft timing using the degree wheel with the method of finding maximum cam lift. TDC for cylinder number 6 will be 360 deg from cylinder number 1. 114 deg ATDC IN and 110 deg BTDC EX will be related to the TDC of cylinder number 6..

Install all cams in the neutral position (no lifters being compressed) using the Billet Aluminum (oiled) Camshaft Retainers with Torx bolts tightened (89 in-lbs) with loctite 262.

Looking at the front of the engine toward the rear so clockwise is normal engine rotation from that perspective.

Rotate exhaust camshafts to insert a 15/64 drill bit as a pin into the pinning hole in exhaust camshafts (hole in front camshaft Retainer). Pin counterclockwise one pin hole to allow for 110 deg BTDC EX. Rotate intake camshafts to insert 15/64 drill bit as a pin into the pinning hole in intake camshafts (hole in front camshaft Retainer) as that should be close to 114 deg ATDC IN.

The Pinning Method will get you close to these timing numbers (110 deg BTDC EX and 114 deg ATDC IN). Fine tuning the camshaft timing for a ported engine (for example), use the degree wheel and a dial gauge on the lifters for the additional fine camshaft timing adjustments. See step 5c of LT5 Camshaft Timing Additional Tricks

Rotate the camshaft sprockets counterclockwise against the chain, and then set vernier plate pin in "next" hole clockwise where the pin might fit. Then tighten a bit the camshaft bolts such that the "flat" of the camshaft is counterclockwise tight against the flat of the vernier plate which was rotated clockwise (holding a 19 mm box wrench on the rear end of the camshaft).


Last UPDATE of post 21 Aug, 2017

Dynomite 07-12-2012 11:24 PM

LT5 Camshaft Specific Timing (degree wheel)
 
LT5 Camshaft Specific Timing (degree wheel)

1. Degree Wheel.

That degree wheel provided by bdw18_123 was used.
I reduced the image size (actual printed diameter) to 7.08 inches when printing and glued it on the front pully with my 51 deg BTDC, 114 deg ATDC, 110 deg BTDC, and TDC marked on the wheel. I cut a 4 inch hole in the center of the degree wheel print out before I glued it so I could get my 13/16 inch wrench on the front pully bolt.

I used that degree wheel to place marks on the inside of the front pully.

https://cimg1.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...6dafbbfb99.jpg

I could then align degree wheel marks with the factory timing plate Advance Marks and TDC "O" Mark attached to the front of the engine (drivers side) almost touching the inside of the front pully. Making sure I was always on #1 cylinder compression stroke.

2. Determine TDC on the Harmonic Balancer.

The first thing to do is verify TDC. Always rotate the crankshaft clockwise looking at front of engine.


I checked my mark on the Harmonic Balancer for TDC. I set up a dial indicator on cylinder number one. The piston moved .029 inch before and .029 inch after TDC which was exactly 10 deg before and 10 deg after my mark on the front pully. My TDC mark on front pully is right on the money.

https://cimg4.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...90b9a4615a.jpg

3. Camshaft Sprocket and Venier Plate.

There are 20 teeth on the cam sprocket or 18 degrees per tooth. There are 14 holes in sprocket or 25.7 degrees if you rotate vernier plate without removing pin from hole in vernier plate and pin next hole in sprocket (15 holes in vernier plate and 14 holes in sprocket). There is 1.6 deg on the camshaft sprocket if you rotate vernier washer to align with next pin hole in sprocket (360/15/15). So if you went 11 holes that would be like one tooth on camshaft sprocket or 17.6 degrees on the camshaft sprocket retard or advance. The smallest amount of retard or advance you could set would be 1.6 deg on the camshaft sprocket by pinning next aligned holes (3.2 deg on the Harmonic Balancer).

Marc Haibeck suggests there is about 3 deg of play (6 deg measured at the crankshaft) between the sprocket timing plate flat (vernier plate) and camshaft flat (90'-92'). This is reduced to 1.5 deg (3 deg measured at the crankshaft) on 93s' (having double flats). As one tightens the camshaft bolt you have to watch not to turn the camshaft in the timing plate (vernier plate). It helps to hold a 19 mm open end wrench on the rear of each cam during tightening of the camshaft bolt.

This 3 deg of play (at the camshaft) actually allows you to set the camshaft timing at any angle within the 1.6 deg (at the camshaft) allowed by the pin holes in the vernier plate and sprocket.

Marc Haibeck has upgraded his article "Timing the LT5 Camshafts" to .pdf on his website Timing LT5 Camshafts

4. Timing Camshafts 114 deg ATDC Intake and 110 deg BTDC Exhaust.

I will use a similar setup with the dial indicator on the intake and exhaust primary lifters for cylinder number one (left Head) and cylinder number six (right Head) to determine crankshaft angle at camshaft maximum lift. I will first mark 114 ATDC and 110 BTDC on the Harmonic Balancer and set dial gauge up on lifters to verify intakes at 114 deg ATDC and exhaust at 110 deg BTDC on number one cylinder.

Marc suggests to have a broad torque and power range (3000 to 7000 rpm) use Intake 114 ATDC and Exhaust 110 BTDC. 114/114 is nice when trying to tame idle roughness out of a engine having modified Camshafts.

What you want is equal lifter depression before and after max lifter depression noting the crankshaft rotation degrees (degree wheel set up on front of crankshaft pully) before and after max lift set up on (No. 6 cylinder passsenger side and No. 1 cylinder drivers side). For Intake example you might see equal lifter depression at 104 deg ATDC and 124 deg ATDC and splitting the difference would be 114 deg ATDC. You do the equal lifter depression "trick" because it is almost impossible to see max lifter depression using a dial gauge within say 5 deg either way as the cam lobe rotates over the flat.

Marc Haibeck suggests positioning the cam at .010" before top of lift and .010" after top of lift point where .001" change in lift is about 1 degree of cam rotation.

If I am off on the camshaft timing, I will adjust vernier plate and/or re-pin sprocket and re-snug the camshaft bolt and verify again. Once I have the correct camshaft timing I will final tighten the camshaft bolts without moving the camshaft. See step 5c of LT5 Camshaft Timing Additional Tricks

If I am OK (110 deg BTDC EX and 114 deg ATDC IN), I will tighten the camshaft bolts without moving camshaft (an extremely important step since Marc has seen significant evidence of camshaft shifting after the camshaft bolt is torqued on many engines). I will re-intall the aluminum CNC camshaft retainers installed with cardboard spacer to take out slop and to hold camshaft when I tighten front camshaft bolt (using 19 mm box wrench on the other end of camshaft).

I will Use Loctite 262 on the camshaft bolt, and lubricate both sides of the washer. Tighten to 19 ft lbs and then mark a straight line and then proceed to tighten (Stretch) the bolt (Marc's Camshaft Bolts) another 80-85 degrees (while holding a 19 mm box wrench on the other end of the camshaft).

After the camshaft timing is set, I will remove the manual chain tensioners and install the factory hydraulic chain tensioners set in travel position. I will give the chain tensioners a tap to activate each tensioner.

Last UPDATE of post 22 Aug, 2017

Dynomite 07-12-2012 11:24 PM

LT5 Camshaft Timing Additional Tricks
 
LT5 Camshaft Timing Additional Tricks

1. First make sure of TDC
If you want to make sure of the TDC marks on the Harmonic Balancer, you can install a dial gauge to determine when piston #1 is TDC to determine TDC easy enough engine in car and can then mark harmonic balancer and use degree tab bracket easy enough engine in car. The Tab has marks 25 deg Before and 5 deg After TDC. Always rotate the crankshaft clockwise looking at front of engine. The Tab has marks 25 deg Before and 5 deg After TDC (A total of 30 deg). You can use the marks on the Timing Tab to mark your Harmonic Balancer. Mark 110 deg BTDC by rotating the Harmonic Balancer 3 complete Tabs (90 deg) + 20 deg Counter Clockwise and mark. Mark 114 deg ATDC by rotating the Harmonic Balancer Clockwise 3 complete Tabs (90 deg) + 24 deg and mark.

See Item #2 Camshaft Timing

https://cimg4.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...90b9a4615a.jpg

2. Marking Camshaft Journal and Sprocket.

Ben's Trick Marking the cam journal and sprocket (just behind the sprocket) helps considerably keeping track of where you are in the camshaft timing process as Ben suggested (Ben's photo below). You know right away if things have moved on you.

Ben's (bdw18_123) photo Bens great restoration of a 90' ZR1

https://cimg6.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...e7b3a6ad96.jpg

3. Use Old Camshaft bolts to set the Camshafts.

Another Ben trick is to use the old camshaft bolts (snugged up to prevent the camshafts from popping forward or backward) during the timing process and then with the camshaft in a position where it will not pop or rotate backward or forward (best achieved with one set of valves at maximum opening), switch to the new camshaft bolts (with red loctite) for final camshaft bolt tightening.

4. Using a Dial Gauge.

A third trick is to use Lee's Harbor Freight Flexible Arm to hold the dial gage when measuring lifter movement. Harbor Freight Flesible Arm

5. Installation of New Camshaft Bolts.

After you degrease the new camshaft bolts, use plenty of red (262) Loctite on the camshaft bolts.

a. Jerry's Camshaft Bolts ---- 80 ft-lbs torque
b. Marc's Camshaft Bolts -----18 ft-lbs + 80 deg rotation of camshaft bolt.

6. Venier plate movement.

a. For a (90-92 LT5) there is 6 deg of crankshaft play when the camshaft flat rotates 3 deg against the flat of the venier plate (flat to flat).
b. It has also been calculated that each pin hole advance or retard moves the camshaft 1.6 deg (3.2 deg at crankshaft).
c. Set up with the camshaft venier plate rotated against the camshaft flat (clockwise looking at front of engine). Forget about the 6 deg of crankshaft play (3 deg in the venier plate flat to flat) relative to camshaft movement for the moment.

7. Checking Actual Valve Maximum Opening Degrees.

Check actual valve max opening (shooting for 114 deg ATDC INTAKE for example) using equal Lifter movement before and after max valve opening.
a. Look for .015 less than maximum lifter movement either side of maximum valve opening as you rotate the crankshaft (clockwise looking at front of engine) through max valve lift.
b. If you have maximum valve opening at 112 deg ATDC (2 deg off) you have to rotate the camshaft and venier plate clockwise with respect to the camshaft sprocket one peg hole or 3.2 deg crankshaft rotation which would put you at 115.2 deg ATDC next check.
[B]c. The venier plate could now be rotated counterclockwise looking at front of engine 3 deg within the total play in the venier plate by locking the venier plate tight in the counterclockwise direction against the camshaft. In this case keep the venier plate locked in the clockwise direction (looking at front of engine) against the camshaft to eliminate this larger potential adjustment/play consideration which would amount to 6 deg of crankshaft rotation.

8. Tightening the Camshaft Bolt.

It is difficult to tighten the camshaft venier plate down on the camshaft with the flat of the venier plate somewhere within the 3 deg of play (6 deg of crankshaft rotation) where the venier plate can rotate back and forth on the camshaft.
a. The Trick is to lock the venier plate flat in the most clockwise direction (clockwise looking at front of engine) tight against the flat of the camshaft.

https://cimg7.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...bd3c7aee31.jpghttps://cimg0.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...e5273a2451.jpg


Notes:

1. The worst you could be off (INTAKE Camshaft 114 deg ATDC example) would be 1.6 deg crankshaft rotation if you were at or greater than 115.6 deg ATDC or at or less than 112.4 deg ATDC first check. Just leave well enough alone (any degrees between 115.6 and 112.4 deg ATDC). [B]Either is very close and within measurement error (determining maximum lifter lift by any method within 1 deg is very difficult) of 114 deg ATDC desired INTAKE camshaft timing or 110 deg BTDC EXHAUST camshaft timing.

2. Keeping the venier plate locked in the clockwise direction against the camshaft flat eliminates the venier plate rotation when tightening the camshaft bolt while holding the camshaft from rotating on the other end with a box wrench.

3. This technique simplifies the adjustment and assures the camshaft sprocket venier plate flat is always against the flat of the camshaft rotating clockwise looking at front of engine (less chance for the venier plate to rotate and venier plate/camshaft flats to move relative to one another during or after camshaft bolt tightening).

Last UPDATE of post 23 Aug, 2017

Dynomite 07-12-2012 11:24 PM

LT5 Timing Diagrams and Timing Chain Effective Lengths
 
LT5 Timing Diagrams and Timing Chain Effective Lengths

1. Timing Diagrams.

https://cimg2.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...5d7136c5a8.png

The Timing Chain Effective Lengths depends on Timing Chain Tightness and Chain Guide Wear...theory under development testing as we speak.

2. Timing Chain Effective Lengths.

The crankshaft rotates clockwise looking at front of engine. The Timing Chain Tensioners are located on the bottom (passenger side) chain before Camshaft Sprockets and on the top (drivers side) chain before Camshaft Sprockets. The chain between and after the Camshaft Sprockets returning to the timing chain Idler Sprocket is normally relatively tight. That section of the Timing Chain remains relatively tight as long as the crankshaft is rotated in a normal direction and as long as cams do not push back (lifters pushing the camshafts clockwise). Timing chain Effective Lengths are related directly to timing chain tightness and Timing Chain paths as directed by the Timing Chain Guides (That path changes with Timing Chain Guide wear).

a. Chain Tension different with engine runing as compared to the Camshaft Timing Process.
If the Timing Chains are tighter during engine running with hydraulic lifters pressurized the Exhaust camshafts may be advanced a degree and the Intake camshafts may be retarded by a degree. For Exhaust camshafts at 110 deg BTDC may actually advance to 111 deg BTDC. The Intake Camshafts at 114 deg ATDC may actually retard to 113 deg ATDC.

b. Fixed Timing Chain Guide wear.

As the Fixed Timing Chain Guides wear the chain returning to the Idler Sprocket between the Camshaft Sprockets and Idler Sprocket decreases in effective length Advancing the Intake Camshafts and retarding the Exhaust camshafts. The Exhaust Camshaft may retard from 110 deg BTDC to 109 deg BTDC. The Intake Camshafts may Advance from 114 deg ATDC to 115 deg ATDC.

Last UPDATE of post 24 Aug , 2017

Dynomite 07-12-2012 11:25 PM

LT5 Timing Chains and Sprockets
 
LT5 Timing Chains and Sprockets

See Timing Chain Idler Sprocket Lubrication and Installation

1. Background Timing Chain Sprockets and Lubrication within front cover.

A #20 Torx can be used to remove the small Torx screw holding the bearing cover in place on the Timing Chain Idler Sprocket. Place two of the Timing Chain Idler Sprocket bolts (10 mm Head x 8 mm x 100 mm) into the Idler Sprocket holes with the Heads of those two bolts in a vice. Remove the #20 Torx screw. Use Red Loctite when replacing the #20 Torx screw.

There is an oil path around one of the three 10 mm Head (8 mm) x 100 mm bolts that attaches the inner race of the Timing Chain Idler Sprocket to the engine case (The distance between two 8 mm x 100 mm bolts is smaller so the Timing Chain Idler Sprocket inner race can only be attached to the engine case one way).

This oil path is vented from the bolt hole into the needle bearing area of the inner race. The Timing Chain Idler Sprocket inner race can be attached to the engine case in only one orientation assuring that the oil pressure from the engine case is directed to the Timing Chain Idler Sprocket Bolt hole that is vented to the needle bearings..

https://cimg7.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...f81e0ce8d6.jpg
https://cimg9.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...318f8f1687.jpghttps://cimg0.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...e71cdb3cf5.jpg

The two sets of Timing Chain Idler Sprocket needle bearings can be seen in the photos.

https://cimg1.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...b71e81c6cd.jpghttps://cimg3.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...dc796e4f1a.jpg

The Timing Chain Idler Sprocket oil pathway entrance to needle bearings from bolt hole to the inner race (left) and exit from sprocket (right) can be seen in the small ports of the inner race and outer sprockets.

https://cimg4.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...59b98024ea.jpghttps://cimg5.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...273451e046.jpg

2. LT5 Timing Chain Calculations.

Timing chain breakage although very rare has been blamed on repeated engine pulses or fatigue (dead injector or bad valves for example). The timing chain calculations in this post debunk all such theories on timing chain failure.
http://www.f-lohmueller.de/pov_tut/a...Chain_35tt.gif

LT5 Cranskshaft sprocket has 20 teeth.
LT5 Idler sprocket on primary side has 42 teeth
LT5 Idler sprocket on secondary side has 21 teeth
Each LT5 camshaft sprocket has 20 teeth
LT5 Primary chain has 54 pins
LT5 Secondary chain on LH has 102 pins
L T5 Secondary chain on RH has 94 pins

So...we know the camshaft sprockets rotate half as fast as the crankshaft sprocket.

Lets calculate......Crankshaft sprocket rotates 360 deg or 20 teeth. Idler sprocket primary rotates 20/42 of 360 deg or 20 teeth. Idler sprocket on secondary side rotates 20/42 of 360 deg or 10 teeth. Camshaft sprocket rotates 180 deg or 10 teeth. Exactly 180 deg like it is suppose to.

Now lets see how much of total length the RH and LH secondary chains rotate. Crankshaft sprocket rotated 20 teeth or 360 degrees. Primary chain has 54 pins so it rotated 20/54ths of its length. Camshaft sprocket rotated 180 deg or 10 teeth so for RH chain with 94 pins that is 10/94ths of its length and for LH chain with 102 pins that is 10/102nds of its length.

Lets put this another way.......each time the crankshaft sprocket rotates 360 degees, the RH chain moves 10/94ths of its length and the LH chain moves 10/102nds of its length. Or if the RH chain were to rotate its full length, the crankshaft sprocket would rotate 9.4 times and if the LH chain were to rotate its full length, the crankshaft sprocket would rotate 10.2 times.

Now...let us look at the analysis in above posts wherein a miss fire could cause chain failure.

The bad cylinder miss fires once every two revolutions of the crankshaft. That little tug on the chain would occur on the RH chain 4.7 times as it rotated its full length. That little tug would occur on the LH chain 5.1 times as it rotated its full length. And the little tug from a bad injector would occur at different locations on each chain every revolution of the crankshaft since these (4.7 and 5.1) are not whole numbers.

Primary drive crankshaft sprocket................................Primary chain

https://cimg6.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...b813bcb091.jpghttps://cimg7.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...ccc2faeaf2.jpg

Idler sprocket........................................ ...........Secondary chain (LH top, RH bottm)

https://cimg8.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...4a195dc4b9.jpghttps://cimg0.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...4f15e298f3.jpg

One of four camshaft sprockets

https://cimg2.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...1e67cf5908.jpg

Last UPDATE of post 25 Aug, 2017

Dynomite 07-12-2012 11:25 PM

Setting/Installing the Chain Tensioners Tricks
 
Setting/Installing the Chain Tensioners Tricks

Start with Ben's RH Tensioner photo on how to reset chain tensioner (The RH and LH Tensioner are different).


Originally Posted by bdw18_123 (Post 114954)
I remembered seeing a really good write up over at the "other" forum quite awhile ago (which we again can't link to, I thought that was fixed? :rolleyes: ) on how to reset a timing chain tensioner with some good instructional pictures. It was done by someone with a forum name of ZR1 at that "other" forum. I decided to go looking for it since I need to reset my tensioners. Resetting timing chain tensioner TIPS

https://cimg3.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...cf0c56ef0a.jpg

1. Resetting the Chain Tensioner.
a. A is the Transport Clip which is smaller than B (the operational clip).
b. Leave A in the groove on the left end of the plunger and move B to the smaller width reset groove just left of the wider operational groove.
c. Place the spring inside the plunger and insert the plunger with spring into the Tensioner Housing.
d. Place the Tensioner with plunger inserted in a vice being carefull not to mark the plunger tip (left end of plunger) with the jaws of the vice. The plunger tip should be exposed so a knife edge can be inserted in the end of the tensioner housing to move Transport Clip A when the plunger is fully compressed within the tensioner housing.
e. With the plunger compressed into the tensioner housing (with Transport Clip A in the groove on the left end of the plunger), insert the knife blade and move any part of the Transport Clip A further into the tensioner housing out of the groove on the left end of the plunger.
f. Hold the Transport Clip A (any part of the Transport Clip) out of the groove on the left end of the plunger when you gradually open the vice.
g. If you start to see the Transport Clip A, it did not catch the inside of the Tensioner Housing for transport. Recompress the plunger inside the Tensioner Housing and move any part of the Tansport Clip A one more time out of the initial groove. Gradually open the vice and you will see the plunger is now caught inside the Tensioner Housing. The Chain Tensioner is now SET for Transport.

2. Activating the Chain Tensioner.
a. Rotate the crankshaft clockwise looking at the front of the engine. This will loosen the timing chain on the tensioner side of the timing chain sprockets. This will allow the tensioner to extend maximum length when the tensioner is unset in step 3 below.
b. Insert the chain tensioners (Plunger set for transport) into the locator housings that will be bolted to the heads (chain tensioner lubricated with engine oil and installed into locator housing).
c. Make sure the "O" rings are in place on the locator housing and that the "O" rings stay in the grooves of the locator housing (a bit of permatex sealant on the "O" ring will hold it in place). Tighten the two bolts of the RH and LH locator housnigs to the RH and LH heads.
d. Make sure both left and right chain tensioner slots are alligned vertically so they allign with the left and right chain guides.
e. Make sure that the oil ports of the tensioner locator housing is facing up with tensioner locator housing installed in the heads. The LH and RH locator housings are different in regard to oil port and bolt alignment (RH bolts are vertical, and LH bolts are horizontal).
f. Remove allen head plug on the tensioner locator housing.
g. Insert a small punch positioned through the hole (removed allen head plug) on the top of the tensioner locator housing. Tilt the punch to the side making sure you are not punching the check valve on top of the barrel of the tensioner plunger. Give the punch a sharp tap with a small hammer. This unsets the chain tensioner plunger from the transport position in the tensioner housing moving the Transport Clip A back into its original groove on the tip of the plunger.
h. Install the allen head plugs in the RH and LH tensioner locator housings with blue loctite.

Unset LH chain tensioner..........................Unset/set RH chain tensioner (Photo by Craig)

https://cimg6.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...f8df145df1.jpghttps://cimg7.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...46e8fee475.jpg

Last UPDATE of post 26 Aug, 2017

Dynomite 07-12-2012 11:26 PM

Cam Cover Installation Tricks
 
Cam Cover Installation Tricks

Drivers Side Cams........................................ ........Passenger Side Cams

https://cimg9.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...1b299a2fa9.jpghttps://cimg0.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...b3a6ea6429.jpg

1. Insert spark plugs with a bit of anti-sieze on the threads before installing the Cam Covers to assure that nothing drops into the cylinders.
2. Leave Jeffvette Billet Aluminum Camshaft Retainers in place as the cam cover journals will take the camshaft loads once the cam covers are in place. The Camshaft Billet Aluminum Retainers do prevent the camshaft longitudinal movement however.

https://cimg1.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...a5f2b41787.jpghttps://cimg2.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...76781904a4.jpg

a. Use Loctite 518 (Permabond A136 recommended from Jerrys Gaskets) very thin coat on surface of cam covers. Do not coat 518 Loctite all the way to the edge of the journals (stay away 1/4 inch). leave 1/8 inch more or less space between Loctite 518 and outer/inner edges of any surface coated. Also, do not coat the cam covers all the way to the outer and inner edges (leave 1/8 inch more or less space between Loctite 518 and outer/inner edges of any surface coated). (Coat the grooves for the two camshaft rubber plugs on each end of each Cam Cover and same on each end of each head.

https://cimg6.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...44606a29b9.jpg

b. Lubricate all cam lobes and lifters with engine oil but do not get any oil on the Cam Cover interface surfaces.
c. Place spark plug "O" rings in place and on the Cam Cover place a thin coat of 518 Loctite around each spark plug hole.
d. On all surfaces keep thin coat of 518 Loctite 1/8 inch from edges of each/every surface.
e. Set Cam Covers in place on Heads.
f. Insert 24 SS Allen Head 8 mm (Replace original Torx-40....See....Post 67 - Removing Cam Covers (Engine In Car) for Inspections of Camshafts) 3 SS Allen Head 6 mm Cam Cover bolts with Aluminum Stat-O-Seal Washers (Do not use Loctite or Anti-sieze on Cam Cover bolts). I also used eight 1/4 inch Aluminum Stat-O-Seals for the IH coolant housings. The Aluminum Stat-O-Seals make a great lock washer as well as prevent oil leaks around the SS bolts.

https://cimg7.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...aec3c63a23.jpg

Pegasus Auto Racing (Check Jerrys Gaskets for latest Stat-O Seal type Washers)

3. Tightgen all cam cover SS bolts in several steps
a. Tighten All Cam Cover bolts using a #6 Allen Head wrench including the 3 #4 Allen Head bolts on the front edge of each Cam Cover.
b. Check that the crankshaft is still free to rotate during and after tightening Cam Cover bolts.
c. Clean any excess 518 loctite from cam covers.

4. Cam Inspection after several hours Run In
a. Drivers side Cam Cover was removed after several hours of engine time after installation of regrind camshafts. The Cams and Cam Journals were found to be in perfect condition with no unusual wear marks.
b. The Billet Camshaft Retainers were found to be in perfect condition with all bolts tight.
c. The Lubrication condition was found to be perfect with all Cams and Lifters fully lubricated.

Last UPDATE of post 27 Nov, 2019

Dynomite 08-01-2012 11:43 AM

PCV system (Need for Oil Catch Can)
 
PCV system (Need for Oil Catch Can)

See Cam Covers (Filters and Wear Strips) For Discussion of Cam Cover Wear Strips.

The PCV system with the dual PCV valves (each with its own vacuum characteristic) in conjunction with an Oil Catch Can evacuates the crankcase. See Elite Oil Catch Can Installation Details.

Oily gasses traveling upwards from the Crankcase Ventilation Cover bring oil into the IH which two small holes (each IH) let that oil drain back into the Head (The 90' being a bit different than the 91' in that regard with respect to oil drain hole sizes). From the IH the gasses are sucked through the PCV valves from each side of the IHs through two hard lines.

It is assumed that oil in the camshaft area drains back down into the crankcase through relatively small drain holes in the Heads. The area under the Cam Covers is then at the same pressure (depending on the capacity of the oil drain holes in the heads to pass gasses the opposite direction into the Camshaft area) as the Crankcase (compression gasses passing past rings).

The vacuum in the PCV return line and the Cam Cover Vents are a bit different as the Cam Cover vent line is attached to the Air Horn and the PCV return line is attached to the Plenum behind the Throttle Body. That means at idle you get a lot of vacuum pulling on the dual PCV valves and almost zero pulling on Cam Cover vents. At Wide Open Throttle (WOT) you get about equal vacuum on both maybe.

So.....you are pulling most oil through the Cam Cover Filters l at WOT and if you have a clogged air filter you are pulling even more vacuum at WOT from the Cam Cover vents but that is prolly just not a factor. Now if the Cam Cover Filter is clogged up, you might have a positive crankcase pressure since there is not much vacuum on the PCV system. The crankcase pressure would be greatest at WOT with the most gasses escaping into the crankcase around the rings.

In the case of a positive crankcase pressure you might see oil around the Cam Covers. Just guessing here to determine what can be done if the Cam Cover Filtersl get clogged up Cam Cover Filters

It seems that the Crankcase pressure would be totally dependent on the condition of the rings. PCV valves, and Cam Cover Filters. The amount of gas passing through the PCV system and Cam Cover Vents is equal to the amount of gas passing past the rings at all times.

I switched from Scotch Brite to Marc Haibeck's new Cam Cover Vent filter material Cam Cover Filters

https://cimg8.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...27b9fca183.jpg

Last UPDATE of post 28 Aug, 2017

Dynomite 08-01-2012 11:43 AM

Plenum Pull (1990 ZR-1)
 
Plenum Pull
1. Just make sure you drain enough coolant if you do not have Throttle Body Coolant Blocked.

2. Electrical Connections associated with Plenum Pull (1990 ZR-1)
The 4 connectors on the Distributorless Ignition System (DIS) under the plenum are not interchangeable. The 2 Connectors towards the front of the DIS carry the coil primary controls signal. The small one at the back of the DIS is switched B+. The big one carries ECM signals.
a. Disconnect two larger electrical plugs under front of DIS to underside of DIS from front of plenum.
b. Disconnect the smaller electrical plug and ECM signal plug (1/4 inch socket with short extension) under rear of DIS from rear of plenum.

3. Tools
a. Used a 1/4 inch socket wrench with short extension and 1/4 inch socket to install the bolt in the DIS module electrical connection from rear of plenum with plenum up 3 inches (DIS attached under the Plenum).
b. Used a 3/8 inch socket wrench with 6 mm allen heads for plenum SS bolts.

https://cimg6.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...2d2ecd7fd2.jpghttps://cimg7.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...bf23787e4e.jpg

Two Allen Head wrenches (6mm and 3mm),
Two flat head Screw drivers and ...................................1/4 inch socket wrench with 1/4 inch socket
TB bracket wrenches (7mm and 9mm).
.........................and short extension for DIS Connector
https://cimg2.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...855b7551a6.jpghttps://cimg3.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...cfd256ba1a.jpg

4. The 10 Minute Plenum Removal (1991 LT5 after Eliminated TB Coolant, Installation of Oil Catch Can and Installation of SS Allen Head Bolts).

TB Coolant Elimination is Item #4 LT5 Eliminated Systems

B. Plenum Removal Steps (assuming you have TB Coolant Blocked). If not.....remove some coolant before you start.
1. Disconnect Battery (Check Battery Condition and Jumper GOOD Battery as FIRST CHECK).
2. Remove Samco (or stock) Air Duct (large flat screw driver).
3. Remove Oil Catch Can Hose (If Oil Catch Can Installed) to Plenum and PCV Dual Connector on back of Plenum (small flat screw driver).
4. Remove Throttle Body Cables (two including TB Shield and two top (I have 3mm SS Allen Head) screws on Plenum) and TB Connector (7mm and 9mm wrenches).
5. Remove Fuel Regulator Vacuum Hose "L" rear of Plenum.
6. Disconnect MAP Vacuum hose from MAP (Manifold Absolute Pressure) and from rear of Plenum.......
(in case it gets intangled with other wires/hoses I just disconnect MAP bracket from Plenum).
7. Disconnect Passenger Side Plenum Vacuum (and Drivers side Plenum Vacuum if secondaries not removed).
8. Disconnect Brake Boost Vacuum line Drivers Side Rear of Plenum.
9. Remove three 6mm Allen Head SS Fuel Line Bolts and two fuel lines (6mm Allen Ball Head Socket) or Torx-40 stock bolts.
10. Open gas cap to prevent fuel lines from leaking when removed from fuel rail.
11. Remove 12 Allen Head SS Plenum Bolts (6mm Allen Ball Head Socket with Extension) or Torx-40 stock bolts.
12. Lift Plenum from Gasket (front only) and remove two Cam Cover PCV Vent Rubber Connectors to Air Horn.
13. Disconnect two DIS (Distributorless Ignition System) Connectors front of DIS.
14a. Disconnect large Purge Vacuum line under front of Plenum (91').
14b. Disconnect small vacuum line under front of Plenum and larger vacuum line from drivers side of Plenum going to Charcoal Canister under left head light (90').
15. Disconnect two small electrical connectors rear under Plenum (MAP and DIS).
16. Unscrew 1/4 bolt in Main DIS Connector rear of Plenum.
17. Remove Plenum.

Last UPDATE of post 29 Mar, 2018

Dynomite 08-01-2012 11:43 AM

LT5 IH (RC Injectors), Fuel Rails, Plenum Install Tricks
 
LT5 IH (RC Injectors), Fuel Rails, Plenum Install Tricks

I use RC SL4-205 injectors (500+ hp). Tech Info - LT5 RC SL4-205 injectors (500+ hp) Calculations
The RC Secondary come with Blue Caps covering the "O" ring. The Blue Caps must be removed before installing the RC Secondary Injectors.

1. After removing Plenum use high pressure Air Pressure to clean all debris around Injectors before removing the Injectors.

2. Fuel Rail Removal.
a. There are 4 bolts that hold the fuel rail in place...remove them.
b. Disconnect the fuel lines at rear of fuel rail (there are "O" rings).
c. Disconnect the electrical to each injector (spring loaded clip).
d. Wiggle the fuel rails with upward pressure popping the injectors out of the Injector Housing.
e. The Purge vac line is on top as well as Cruize control vac line on passenger side and Aux secondary vacuum on drivers side.
f. Remove the clips holding each injector on fuel rail and pull injectors out of fuel rail.

3. Installation of New Injectors.

Remove the protective blue plastic cape protecting the secondary
injector "O" ring before installing into the Injector Housing.
https://cimg9.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...1351ee44be.jpg

4. "O" Rings in IH and on Injectors......Primary LEFT ("O" Ring in IH) and Secondary RIGHT ("O" Ring on Injector)
Used just a tad of white grease on the "O" rings (Primary and Secondary Injectors) for easy installation of injectors.

https://cimg5.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...676e49f4fd.jpg

5. Bracket install Trick (Purge connector through rear drivers side runners of Plenum).
a. Modified bracket on passenger side of Plenum for Purge connector which was attached to TB coolant return (since removed).
b. Kept the bracket and reinstalled bracket on passenger side of Plenum (second bolt from fire wall) for Purge connector.
c. The TB return line to coolant tank in front of passenger side windshield has been capped off with brass plug.

6. Tools.
a. Used a 1/4 inch socket wrench with short extension and 1/4 inch socket to install the bolt in the DIS module electrical connection from rear of plenum with plenum up 3 inches (DIS attached under the Plenum).
b. Used a 3/8 inch socket wrench with 6 mm allen heads for plenum SS bolts.

https://cimg6.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...2d2ecd7fd2.jpghttps://cimg7.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...bf23787e4e.jpg

7. Electrical Connections associated with Plenum Pull (1990-1991).
The 4 connectors on the Distributorless Ignition System (DIS) under the plenum are not interchangeable. The 2 Connectors towards the front of the DIS carry the coil primary controls signal. The small one at the back of the DIS is switched B+. The big one carries ECM signals.

a. Attach two larger electrical plugs under front of DIS to underside of DIS from front of plenum.
b. Attach the smaller electrical plug and ECM signal plug (1/4 inch socket with short extension) under rear of DIS from rear of plenum.

8. Engraving Tricks.
Thanks to Carter for the great engraving on coolant manifolds and TB plate :thumbs:

https://cimg5.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...ce3c549ef9.jpg

Last UPDATE of post 30 Mar, 2018

Dynomite 08-01-2012 04:22 PM

Vacuum Systems 90' and 91' (Secondary and Cruize/HVAC)
 
Vacuum Systems 90' and 91' (Secondary and Cruize/HVAC)

1. Secondary Vacuum System
The first photo shows details of the vacuum plumbing around the Secondary Vacuum Solenoid and Secondary Vacuum Reservoir Including the Check Valve. The second photo is the complete Secondary Vacuum System.

The Check Valve allows plenum vacuum to be seen by Secondary Vacuum Reservoir but does not allow plenum to see Vacuum pump vacuum.

https://cimg6.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...7b346ad742.jpg
https://cimg8.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...f285cb9d6c.jpg

2. Cruize Control and HVAC
The vacuum line on the passenger side of the plenum is for the cruise control and HVAC. That vacuum is a separate system.

The cruize control and HVAC Vacuum are NOT eliminated having nothing to do with the secondary vacuum system removal. See item #3 LT5 Eliminated Systems

The cruize control plenum vacuum line (mid plenum connection passenger side) and L connector is shown on left and Cruize control is shown on right. A vacuum line is connected to one of the connections shown left photo (L connector) running forward under plenum (out front of plenum) to drivers side wheel well. There it connects to a connector going forward to vacuum reservoir under drivers side head light (bottom photo) and backward to Cruize Control shown in right photo just above battery on drivers side. The other vacuum hose connected to the Cruize Control is for the brake pedal cruise cancel function.

The second connection shown in left photo (L connector) connects to the HVAC vacuum line included in passenger side fuel injector wire harness.

https://cimg1.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...c9244e4ee1.jpghttps://cimg2.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...d74ad6c89d.jpg
https://cimg4.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...97e78ab896.jpg

3. Differences between 90' and 91' Vacuum Systems
See Vacuum Systems (90' & 91') TIPS

See Differences between 90', 91' and 95' Crate Engine Plenums and IHs
Note Vapor Canister Control Valve Vacuum differences.

90' Vacuum System

https://cimg5.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...297bbca2dc.jpg

91' Vacuum System

https://cimg6.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...b1ad0987ed.jpg

4. Checking Vacuum System.
Before you tighten down the Plenum (with Plenum tipped up in front) and ALL vacuum lines, and DIS module connections in place....check your vacuum systems.

With all vacuum lines connected, turn key on and listen for vacuum pump to shut off. If it does not shut off, start at the closest vacuum line to the vacuum pump disconnecting the line and holding your finger over the end. If the pump shuts off the leak is on other side of that. Go to next fitting and do the same until you are past the leak wherein the vacuum pump will NOT shut off. You have now located the leak.

If the Plenum has NOT been removed Check between Vacuum Pump and Plenum first....then check Drivers side Plenum Vacuum Connection to see if the Check Valve under Plenum is leaking. Disconnect that vacuum fitting and hold finger over end of vacuum line to see if pump stops cycling...if pump stops cycling the Check Valve is leaking.

Also check your HVAC and Cruize Control Vacuum System (check ALL connections). Also check your EVAP Purge system connections (charcoal canister which is under drivers side headlight on your 90'). That single small vacuum port under front of plenum facing rearward (90' only) is for the Evap Purge System. The second larger vacuum port on drivers side lower front of plenum is the main vacuum line for the Charcoal Canister. The second Vacuum port right next to that Charcoal Canister port is your PCV Vacuum port.

With the key on, ground the pink wire in the green connector (third from drivers side) on ECM. Use a small finishing nail stuck in alongside the wire connector with an alligator clip pigtail attached to the end for grounding. This will activate the Secondaries which you can watch with the plenum tipped up in front before you bolt it down. This after you are sure you have NO vacuum leaks in the Secondary System.

Last UPDATE of post 31 Dec, 2017

Dynomite 08-01-2012 04:22 PM

Eliminating IH Housing Throttle Body (TB) Coolant system
 
Eliminating IH Housing Throttle Body (TB) Coolant system.

Install 1/8 inch NPT allen head pipe plugs (21/64 or 11/32 drill) two each side of Plenum (Two each TB Coolant and Injector Housing (IH) Coolant) as shown (The associated two IH coolant ports in the IH can also be plugged on each side).

See Summit Racing for Aluminum Pipe Plugs.

Remove hose and tubing left and right side of plenum, plug hose return to coolant tank passenger side. See item #9 TB Coolant Return Modified. Initial Coolant Fill may be somewhat affected by the TB Coolant Elimination (see item #4 Initial Coolant Fill).

https://cimg7.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...0c37de3bc7.jpg

Note: The TB coolant path back to the passenger side overflow tank does provide a path for air and potential air lock to return to that passenger side tank during initial coolant fill. However, the Plenum to TB coolant hose sits only an inch or so above the IH coolant manifolds on the passenger side so the benefit of using that path to bleed air vice the top of the coolant manifolds to the radiator is very small. Marc has decided to bypass the TB coolant (vice eliminate all TB coolant hoses) leaving that coolant path back to the passenger side overflow tank in place to assure issues would not arrise on rebuilds for those unaware of coolant initial filling and water pump potential air locks.I also park on KwikLift sloped upward which assures IH coolant manifolds are voided of air at all times (especially if engine is reved a bit).

The 5th plug (Plenum Vacuum) is for Plenum Vacuum drivers side only which was connected to the vacuum reservoir. The tubing can be removed and a 1/8 inch NPT allen head pipe plug inserted exactly like the plenum coolant plugs.

a. When you run the tap....keep checking the pipe plug for depth so you end up tight and flush.
b. When you run the Drill.......remember you are in ALUMINUM so go very easy and slow!!! (you can do it without a drill press).
c. Use a bit of Permatex gasket sealer or Teflon tape on the pipe plugs.

See this link for TB Coolant Blocking drilling and threading details Injector Housing TB Coolant Blocking



https://cimg9.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...26ca673361.jpg
see item #4 TB Coolant Eliminated.

https://cimg7.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...0c37de3bc7.jpg

Last UPDATE of post 32 Dec, 2017

Dynomite 08-01-2012 04:22 PM

Eliminating Secondary Throttles/shafts
 
Eliminating Secondary Throttles/shafts.

Install Dorman freeze plugs 555-108 with Loctite 262 to plug the secondary shaft ports for a complete elimination of Secondary throttle shafts and associated vacuum canisters. Summit Racing Freeze Plugs 555-108

https://cimg1.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...21ef57f654.jpg

Removing Secondary Shafts Engine In Car TIPS

Last UPDATE of post 33 Jan, 2017

Dynomite 08-01-2012 04:22 PM

Stainless Steel Air Box and Air Filter (L98 and LT5)
 
Stainless Steel Air Box and Air Filter (L98 and LT5)

The Stainless Steel Air Box has been offered for those that want to add Bling and Higher Intake Air Flow for the LT5 or L98 :thumbs:

1. SS Air Box Installation and Air Filter Selection

George Braml fabricates the SS Air Box.

Just an installation tip....If you use that Orange FRAM Air Filter you will find it about 1/4 inch too high. The bottom end of the SS Air Box Square Filter Retainer lip will not engage the Built In (L) of the Air Box at the bottom end as shown in the first photo (the Orange Fram Air Filter has a gap at the bottom end). You will also notice the two Retaining screws for the Square SS Air Box Filter Retainer have tilted towards the engine indicating the top Square Retainer has moved upward out of the SS Air Box (L) at the bottom end.

If you look closely at the SS Air Box Square Filter Retainer you will see a cut out about 1/4 inch deep and the width of the Square Filter Retainer on the bottom end. The height of the Air Filter cannot be higher than that cut out (The Orange Fram Filter is about 1/4 inch higher than that cut out).

The K&N 33-2035 High Flow Air Filter is the correct Air Filter matching the SS Air Box Cut Out.

George Braml did a perfect fabrication job on the L98 SS Air Box as he did on the LT5 SS Air Box (Both SS Air Boxes are IDENTICAL) :thumbs:

2. Facts and Photos

The L98 and LT5 SS Air Box and Air Filters are Identical.

A. The Air Filter opening is 9.5 in x 16.25 in or 154 square inches (both OEM and SS).
B. The Air path inside the Air Filter housing to the oval outlet is 1 in x 17.25 in or 17.25 square inches (both OEM and SS).
C. The OEM metal cover Louvers are 3/8 in x 4 in or 1.5 square inches and there are 24 Louvers or 36 square inches for Air Flow into the Air Filter area (OEM only).
D. Space between top of OEM metal Louvered cover and closed hood exceeds 1 inch all around (more space with SS Air box since metal louvered cover is not used.
C. Using SS Air Box with FRAM decreases the space between top of Air Filter and closed hood by 1/4 inch or 12.5 square inches around the perimeter of the Air Filter.
D. Using the SS Air Box with K&N High Flow Air Filter eliminates the need for the OEM metal Air Box cover (36 inches of air flow area) making available the total air flow area of 154 square inches to the K&N 33-2035 High Flow Air Filter.
E. The K&N 33-2035 High Flow Air Filter is Washable and Reusable.

A. K&N 33-2035 High Flow Air Filter

B. K&N 33-2035 High Flow Air Filter

SS Air Box installed with FRAM Air Filter with bottom of Filter Square Retainer not engaged
https://cimg2.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...f518301731.jpg

SS Air Box and OEM Air Box bottom compared showing where they ride on ridge
of radiator shroud (SS Air Box) and between ridges of radiator shroud (OEM Air Box)

http://https://cimg3.ibsrv.net/gimg/...4815d81f37.jpg

SS Air Box and OEM Air Box bottom compared showing where they ride on ridge
of radiator shroud (SS Air Box) and between ridges of radiator shroud (OEM Air Box) close up

https://cimg7.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...6d171a0644.jpg

SS Air Box installed showing 1/4 inch Cut Out on lower side of Square Air Filter Retainer
with K&N High Flow Air Filter fitting under small cross member

https://cimg9.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...b583ac428d.jpg

OEM Air Box with metal Louver cover
https://cimg1.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...f8fb21a59f.jpg

FRAM Air Filter exceedes the SS Air Box Square Retainer 1/4 inch cut out height
(filter shown above SS metal)

https://cimg2.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...1301482ff5.jpg

K&N 33-2035 correctly sits even with the 1/4 inch cut out
https://cimg3.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...b521119500.jpg

For the installation of the K&N 33-2035 air filter in the "stock" Air Filter Housing......SEE

Post 276 - Air Filter Installation

3. Technical Discussion
The air is drawn from top side of Air Filter in the OEM set up through the louvers in the metal cover. There is a gap of at least an inch between that Air Filter metal cover and closed hood (OEM or SS Air Box).

With the SS Air Filter housing, there is NO metal cover and air is drawn from air gap between the filter and closed hood not restricted by the 36 square inch Louver area of the OEM Metal cover. With a K&N High Flow Air Filter that gap is 1/4 inch larger (than when using a FRAM Air Filter).

The OEM filter housing metal cover will accomodate both FRAM and K&N 33-2035 Air Filters. The difference between the SS Air Box and OEM Air Box is that the SS Air box rides a bit higher requiring the 1/4 inch Cut Out for the small front crossover (see photos of the bottom of both the OEM and SS Air Box.

Because of the Cut Out the SS Air Filter housing with correct K&N 33-2035 High Flow Air Filter will sit at the same height as an OEM Air Box. However if you use a higher FRAM Air Filter that exceedes the Cut Out height in the SS Square Retainer, the overall height of the top of the filter has changed and will interfere with the front small corss over. This will in turn cause interference bwtween the FRAM Air Filter and small cross over preventing the Top Square Retainer of the SS Air Box from engaging at the bottom end.

The L98 and LT5 are IDENTICAL in regard to these issues as the OEM Air Filter housings are IDENTICAL and the radiator shrouds appear to be IDENTICAL in regard to top side of that shroud.

A. K&N 33-2035 High Flow Air Filter

B. K&N 33-2035 High Flow Air Filter

https://cimg6.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...01510033e9.jpg

4. Water Deflector
The Water Deflector which sits under the end of the OEM Air Box (or SS Air Box) to prevent water from being sucked into the Air Intake from the front grille. What it also does is prevent cooler air from entering the Air Intake from the grille. I deleted the Water Deflector from both the L98 and LT5 SS Air Box installations.

https://cimg7.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...032d71389a.jpg

5. Powder Coating or Painting SS Air Box
I did not Powder Coat or Paint the SS Air Box as it looks very very nice as a SS Machined look and the welding is absolutly perfect......so why cover up with Powder Coating or Paint :cheers:

https://cimg0.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...1f5325bf66.jpg

Last UPDATE of post 34 Sep, 2022

Dynomite 08-01-2012 04:23 PM

Pilot Bearing and Clutch Operation
 
Pilot Bearing and Clutch Operation

1. Pilot Bearing
Two issues important in the clutch area are the replacement of the throwout bearing and Pilot Bushnig/Bearing. There has been much confusion over which Pilot Bushing/Bearing is to be used. GM has changed their part numbers several times and are currently referring to the bearing (part #14061685) to be used.

It has been suggrested to NOT use this bearing as it is a needle type bearing designed for 6.2L diesel trucks which have a limit of only 4,000-4,500 rpms. The theory is that those little needles will turn at over 7,000 rpms. It has therefore been suggested the ideal bushing replacement is a bronze type with three grooves (or flutes) spiraled inside and is available under the GM part number 10125896.

This really only applies to drag racing where you drop the clutch at high rpms. At all other times the RELATIVE rpm difference between the transmission spline and the flywheel are low and much less than 4,000 rpm. The needle bearing pilot would be the best choice for most applications excluding drag racing.

Matter of fact except when starting out in first gear engaging the clutch a bit above idle rpm, one trys to match transmission spline rpm with engine/flywheel rpm when selecting higher or lower gears. This method of shifting gears is also much better for the syncros (Depress the clutch, take it out of gear, syncronize rpms between the flywheel and transmission spline in the gear to be selected, and then shift to higher or lower gear, release clutch).

I use the Needle Type Pilot Bearing :thumbs:

2. Pilot Bearing Depth


Originally Posted by Marc Haibeck (Post 219010)
You should drive the pilot bearing in until it seats at the bottom of the bore. That will be about 14 mm deep.

Note that a bronze bushing often comes loose and spins in the crankshaft. Installation of the bushing with bushing retaining compound will not solve the problem. I recommend to use only the roller pilot bearing. It will never come loose. GM PN 14061685.

All measurements from the surface of the rear of the crankshaft (bottom arrow).
The depth to the plug is 34.90 mm (top arrow).
The depth to the raised bottom of the pilot hole is 31.75 mm (Second arrow from top).
The depth to the raised portion of the pilot hole (the pilot bearing housing in the crankshaft) is 9.5 mm (third arrow from top).
The height of the Roller Bearing (width of outer race) is 17.45 mm.

So......I am assuming the new roller bearing pilot should be sunk in past the raised portion of the housing (third arrow from top) about 4.5 mm or .175 inches.
In other words just a bit past the raised portion of the pilot bearing hole. This would put the other end of the pilot bearing almost exactly to the raised portion near the bottom of the pilot hole at 31.75 mm (second arrow from top).

Using a Blind Hole Slide Hammer to easily pull the old Pilot Bushing.
https://cimg2.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...af9cc81217.jpghttps://cimg0.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...a570a22341.jpg

The height of the Roller Bearing is 11/16 in (17.45 mm) ....... The face of the Bronze Pilot Bushing I removed
........................................ ........................................ ...............was even with the reduced diameter of the bore.

https://cimg3.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...319cf62b33.jpghttps://cimg4.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...272be863d1.jpg

3. Dimensions of Black Label Transmission which except for Throwout Bearing Inside Diameter are identical to Blue Label Transmission.

https://cimg7.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...f4e1ff2bcc.jpg

1 inch or 25.4 mm........................................ ................................1.373 inch or 34.87 mm
https://cimg8.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...3ae46e8181.jpghttps://cimg0.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...d3753b7598.jpg

7.50 inches or 190 mm
https://cimg1.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...fb173b6336.jpg

Throwout Bearings and Clutch Forks

4. Clutch Fork
The Clutch Fork pivots on a pivot post attached to the Bell Housing. The outer part of the Clutch Fork lever is pushed in by the rod of the Clutch Slave Cylinder.

Inside the Bell Housing Left and Outside the Bell Housing Right. You can see in the Left Photo that the Clutch Fork can be slipped to the Right off the pivot when positioning the Bell housing on the engine so the Clutch Fork Fingers can be positioned on the Throwout Bearing during installation of the Bell Housing.

https://cimg2.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...06bbb0d0f2.jpghttps://cimg3.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...4391f4d50e.jpg

5. Throwout Bearing
The throwout bearing is locked inside the pressure plate fingers with a circular wire clip. The Throwout Bearing is inserted inside the pressure plate before the pressure plate and clutch disk are attached to the fly wheel.

When the outer part of the Clutch Fork lever is pushed in by the rod of the Clutch Slave Cylinder, the other end of the Clutch Fork is pulled away from the center of the Pressure Plate. The Fingers of the Clutch Fork engage the corners of the throwout bearing square collar and pulls the throwout bearing out and away from the clutch surface (Center Force Clutch/Pressure Plate shown). This assembly shows a Blue Label Throwout bearing as a 95' ZF S6 40 Transmisison was used with a 91' engine.

https://cimg4.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...c4c29b6b3e.jpghttps://cimg6.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...34d8fbdf90.jpg

The throwout bearing pulls the Pressure Plate Fingers which each finger has a pivot point at the outer edge of the pressure plate with an attachment to the pressure plate at approximately the half way point to the outer edge. This pulls the pressure plate surface away from the clutch disk releasing the clutch.

The outer part of the throwout bearing is always rotating with the clutch (engaged or not). The inner part of the throwout bearing does not rotate but is lubricated to slide in and out on the outer collar of the transmission input shaft.

That outer collar of the ZF S6 40 Transmissions is of a different diameter for 90-93 Black Label and 94-95 Blue Label ZF S6 40 Transmissions Throwout Bearings and Clutch Forks

The only hydraulics involved is the hydraulic fluid (DOT 3 or DOT 4) between the Clutch Master Cylinder and Clutch Slave Cylinder. Which Clutch Fluid Reservoir is hidden below the ECM just in front of the dirvers side under the hood.

6. Installation of the Transmission

I ALWAYS use Jerry's Pilot Bearing which has a height of 11/16 inch (.687 inch).

Jerry's Pilot Bearing

You have about 1 inch to work with on the end of the Transmission Input Shaft and I always try to set up the seating depth of the Pilot Bearing to fully install within that last 1 inch of the Transmission Input Shaft.

What I do to insure that.....as I position the transmission using my Transmission jack......it is easy to slide the Transmission Input Shaft Collar through the throwout bearing and the Transmission Input spline through the Clutch Plate (as I recall I have someone depress the Clutch as I install the Transmission).

The Transmission usually slides easily until the tip of the Transmission Input shaft meets up with the Pilot Bearing at which point I have approximately 11/16 inch left for full contact between the Transmission and Bell Housing which dimension is what I am looking for correct engagement of the Transmission Input Shaft with the Pilot Bearing. I then "wiggle" up and down...side to side as I push on Transmission and it always pops in that last (approximately 11/16 inch).

If you do not have approximately 11/16 inch ....Pilot Bearing installation depth may need adjustment.

I do use some good wheel bearing grease on the Pilot Bearing and on the Throwout Bearing, Transmission Shaft Collar before installation of the Transmission.

Last UPDATE of post 35 Dec, 2017

Dynomite 08-02-2012 08:34 PM

ZR-1 Transmission Install and Lift Tricks
 
ZR-1 Transmission Install and Lift Tricks

NEW 95' ZF S6-40 Transmission (Blue Label)..Harbor Freight 800 lb Capacity Transmisison Jack
https://cimg8.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...5c99dd775e.jpghttps://cimg9.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...0100dc29e1.jpg

1. Transmission Jack
The Transmission Jack works perfectly with the ZR1 on KwikLift 18 inches off the ground (Perfect height). The 800 lb Capacity Transmission Jack has roll and tilt adjustments for a perfect match when locating the transmission on the Bell Housing (Clutch depressed last 2 inches of installation). The transmission (on Transmission Jack) can be rolled under KwiKLift from the front as the shifter will clear the cross members and bell housing/oil pan (slipped along side of oil pan).

2. KwikLift
a. KwikLift (wheels 18 inches off ground).
b. KwikLift Creeper (Perfect with KwikLift).
c. Park Z on KwikLift for ease of inspection under engine.
d. Key in ignition, release park brake, in neutral.....roll out of garage without starting engine.

https://cimg5.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...4bc73c77af.jpg

For those of you who feel like a KLUTZ (Like I did) when trying to get the Z up on an inclined ramp such as KwikLift for repairs when the Z is in non operable condition.....here is a solution.

As you prolly know, the Z can be towed easily using a chain or synthetic tow rope from either the back end (attached underneath to near center of leaf spring) or front end (attached underneath to center of frame cross member). The Z cannot, however, be pushed by another vehicle (The Z can be hand pushed easily but not up inclines) from either end because of the fiberglass on both ends.

I welded a padeye at the center of two 1-1/2 x 1-1/2 x 45 inch long steel box sections welded side by side (1-1/2 x 3 x 45 inch steel beam). I welded two hangers (one on each end of the steel beam). I can just hang the 1-1/2 x 3 x 45 inch steel beam on the end of Kwiklift to pull from the center padeye between each ramp with a wire rope come-a-long attached to the rear or front of any vehicle.

I use a long chain the first two pulls with KwikLift yellow chocks set during resetting of the chain length (the wire rope come-a-long cannot reach from one end of the KwikLift to the other end without starting out with a chain connection).

I call this steel beam KLUTZ (KwikLift Utility Towbar for Zs)
I actually tested the beam (pulled Z up ramp) with just one 1-1/2 x 1-1/2 x 45 inch box section then doubled up in final design.

https://cimg8.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...5b9b35587d.jpghttps://cimg0.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...22753b5a23.jpg
https://cimg1.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...06caf0cd5a.jpghttps://cimg2.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...fa902aebd3.jpg

3. Hydraulic Aluminum Floor Jack (3 ton)
a. Pittsburgh Racing
b. Very low initial height and weighs 55 lbs.
c. High lift rate.

3 ton Pittsburgh Racing Aluminum Floor Jack

https://cimg3.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...3c709ada9e.jpg

See Lifting the ZR-1 for a specific discussion regarding lifting the ZR-1 with a floor jack, jackstands, and ramps.

4. Differences between Black and Blue Label transmisisons
Pete says the 1995 ZF S6-40 transmission has a crash thru detent for reverse which means you have to push a little harder to the right to get it in reverse. The original 1991 has the lock out which is more positive as you have to compress the lock out upward to shift into reverse. The 1991 ZF S6-40 shifer is easier to push to the right than the 1995.

Bill Bourdeau says The ’95 and ’96 ZF transmission (ZF P/N 1052 000 089) has a “crash-thru” shifter with reverse requiring additional sideways force when entering the neutral gate portion of reverse to let the operator know he/she is about to engage reverse gear. The revised internal shift shaft mountain detent pad with raised reverse detent pad causes a brief higher tactile feedback (additional counter-pressure) as the spring loaded detent roller ball must climb up to a slightly higher level just before engaging reverse thus the name crash-thru reverse. Bill's "C" Beam plates are installed (transmission end torqued to 37 ft-lbs and differential end torqued to 59 ft-lbs).

5. Throwout Bearings
I have a 91' ZF S6-40 Transmission (Black Label) Parts List No 1052-000-035 with a collar diameter of 1.373 inches and a 94'-95' ZF S6-40 Transmission (Blue Label) Parts List No 1052-000-087 with a collar diameter of 1.305 inches.

a. Here is a source for the 90'-93' ZR1/LT5 Throwout Bearing Power Torque Systems Throwout Bearing Part #: 23243
b. Here is a source for the 94'-95' ZR1/LT5 Throwout Bearing Power Torque Systems Throwout Bearing Part #: 23244
c. This is exactly what the Throwout Bearing looks like as cited above in both cases as the differences in internal diameter is not noticeable from a picture only.

https://cimg4.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...c83236c1ce.jpg

d. The square end of the Throwout Bearing is prevented from rotating on the transmission collar by the Clutch Fork. The Throwout Bearing slides in and out on the transmission collar when you depress the clutch pedal (Lubricate the transmission collar when installing the transmission so the Throwout Bearing slides freely during operation of the clutch pedal).
e. The other end of the Throwout Bearing which rides against the pressure plate fingers is locked to the pressure plate fingers by a wire clip and always rotates with the flywheel with the clutch engaged or not (the three tabs on the Throwout Bearing are locked between three sets of fingers of the pressure plate).
f. If the Throwout Bearing locks up with the square end forced to rotate, the square end will spread the Clutch Forks completing the failure of the Throwout Bearing as well as the Clutch Fork.
g. As I recall, typically a Throwout Bearing does not rotate at all when the clutch is not depressed unlike the Throwout Bearing of the LT5.

6. Clutch Replacement TIPS (REMOVAL)
1. Drop the exhaust manifolds and release the exhaust system from the two transmission hangers and differential hangers (Or drop exhaust pipes after CATS only). Drag exhaust out of the way.
2. Place jack under oil pan with 2x4 between oil pan and jack plate. Jack up a tad and go to item 3.
3. Remove "C" Frame Bolts and remove "C" Frame. Have in hand ZF Doc "C" Frame Plates for the re-installation of "C" Frame Later.
4. After "C" frame is removed, Lower engine (jack under oil pan) a few inches.
5. Remove universal joint on drive shaft to rear by differential. Mark drive shaft so you get it installed for possible correct balance later. Pull drive shaft from transmission. Beware of transmission fluid leaking all over once drive shaft is removed from transmission.
6. I would drain transmission fluid before I start this job and replace with new Castrol TWS 10W-60 later after reinstallation of transmission. Get yourself a 17 mm Allen Wrench also for transmission plugs. Castrol TWS 10W-60 I just buy Castrol TWS 10W-60 as well as Amsoil 10W-40 (Engine) online. Transmission ZF S6-40 takes 4.4 pints or 2.1 Liters of Castrol TWS 10W-60.
7. On top side remove shifter knob, and shifter boot so you can lower transmission later with shifter attached. The lower you can get the rear of the engine the better but make sure your cam covers do not hit brake booster of fire wall as you lower rear of engine a bit.
8. Remove clutch slave cylinder and leave it hang.
9. Remove transmission bolts (jack under oil pan and with another jack under transmission (the best is transmission jack), use BIG flat head screw driver between transmission and bell housing as it takes some pressure as you jack up and down a bit to free the transmission from the pilot bearing. There are some electrical connections on transmission you remove before pulling the transmission free.
10. Remove bell housing bolts. Pull Bell housing off but watch the throw out bearing as it stays with the pressure plate. The black label and blue label transmissons take different throw out bearings.
11. Remove pressure plate bolts being carefull to loosen bolts equally all around the pressure plate a step at a time. Do not just remove one bolt at a time. Remove pressure plate (it will fall off once all bolts are removed. The clutch plate will also fall off.
12. You might want to now inspect the pressure plate surface and surface of the flywheel.
13. You also want to remove the pilot bearing (there are pilot bearing pullers if it will not come out with flat screw driver wedging it out). I would have a new pilot bearing/bushing on hand.

INSTALLATION
1. Lubricate the new pilot bearing (Lubricate Needle Type Pilot Bearing, Do NOT Lubricate Oil Lite Pilot Bearing).
2. Remember to torque the pressure plate bolts uniformly in steps.
3. Remember to insert clutch plate alignment tool with clutch depressed before trying to install transmission.
4. It also helps if someone presses the clutch as you insert transmission releasing the new clutch plate for better alignment with transmission spline.
5. When you attach bell housing there is a trick to get the throwout bearing mating with the yoke properly.
The Clutch Fork can be slid to the drivers side of the Bell Housing (elongated hole with spring clip) once the transmission is removed. This will disengage the Clutch Fork from the Throwout Bearing for Bell Housing removal and installation.
6. I already mentioned marking the drive shaft and re-installing as it was removed from rear differential yoke.
7. Remember torque on front and rear C4 Beam Plate bolts (59 ft-lbs on rear two bolts and 37 ft-lbs on front two bolts).
8. Use alignment tabs provided by ZFDoc with C4 Beam Plates which align the "C" frame properly with frame just near the shifter assembly.
9. Leave 4 original washers on the rear (Differential) off the bolts. I installed 2 of the 4 original washers on the front (Transmission) bolts as they were originally.
10. The Tranmsmission C4 Beam Plate beveled corner faces toward the front of the transmission.

https://cimg5.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...b996895a20.jpg

A transmission jack is not to expensive and Harbor Freight sells one for $129.

7. Installation of the Transmission

I ALWAYS use Jerry's Pilot Bearing which has a height of 11/16 inch (.687 inch).

Jerry's Pilot Bearing

You have about 1 inch to work with on the end of the Transmission Input Shaft and I always try to set up the seating depth of the Pilot Bearing to fully install within that last 1 inch of the Transmission Input Shaft.

What I do to insure that.....as I position the transmission using my Transmission jack......it is easy to slide the Transmission Input Shaft Collar through the throwout bearing and the Transmission Input spline through the Clutch Plate (as I recall I have someone depress the Clutch as I install the Transmission).

The Transmission usually slides easily until the tip of the Transmission Input shaft meets up with the Pilot Bearing at which point I have approximately 11/16 inch left for full contact between the Transmission and Bell Housing which dimension is what I am looking for correct engagement of the Transmission Input Shaft with the Pilot Bearing. I then "wiggle" up and down...side to side as I push on Transmission and it always pops in that last (approximately 11/16 inch).

If you do not have approximately 11/16 inch ....Pilot Bearing installation depth may need adjustment.

I do use some good wheel bearing grease on the Pilot Bearing and on the Throwout Bearing, Transmission Shaft Collar before installation of the Transmission.

Pilot Bearing

Last UPDATE of post 36 Dec, 2020

Dynomite 08-02-2012 08:35 PM

Vibration Issues Diagnosis
 
Vibration Issues Diagnosis

1. Is car being driven or is car standing still? (see tccrab diagnoses below)
2. If car is standing still, at what engine rpm does vibration occur with clutch pedal released and transmission in neutral? Belt tensioner, Harmonic Balancer (HB), crank shaft, engine uneven combustion, flywheel, clutch plate, pressure plate check
3. If the car is standing still, depress clutch pedal with transmission in neutral and note what engine rpm vibration occurs? Belt tensioner, HB, crank shaft, engine uneven combustion, flywheel, transmission pilot bearing, transmission input shaft, pressure plate, clutch plate check
4. If the car is standing still with transmission in gear and clutch pedal depressed does vibration exist? Pilot bearing, clutch plate, transmission input shaft check

Assuming no vibration in steps 2-4 above.
3. If car is driven, does vibration occur in all gears at that same rpm (different speeds mph)? transmission input shaft check
4. If car is driven, does vibration occur in all gears at same speeds mph? Drive shaft U joints, drive shaft, short shaft U joints between differential and wheels, wheels, road (try a different road) check
5. If car is driven, does vibration occur with clutch pedal depressed? Let the car maintain speed mph and depress clutch pedal letting engine rpm drop to idle with transmission in gear (this will put maximum relative motion between transmission input shaft and pilot bearing in flywheel). Clutch plate, pilot bearing, transmission input shaft check
6. If car is driven, does vibration occur with clutch pedal not depressed? Let the car maintain speed mph and release clutch pedal (clutch pedal not depressed) letting engine rpm drop to idle with transmission in neutral. Clutch plate, transmission input shaft, pilot bearing check

7. Did you recently (just before vibration issues) change anything? Tires, wheels, drive shafts, clutch plate, pressure plate, flywheel, pilot bearing, "C" Beam bolts, "C" Beam, transmission, tansmission input shaft, transmission input shaft bearings, transmission output shaft bearings, injectors, plugs, belt tensioner, HB, etc. check (The reason I ask is there is always a possibility of an improper installation of new parts or new parts require balance).

What you cannot separate doing steps 1 through 7 above are the following:
A. Clutch plate from transmission input shaft.
B. Drive shaft from differential, short shafts from differential, wheels from short shafts.
C. Flywheel from pressure plate.
D. Flywheel from crankshaft, belt tensioner, HB, uneven combustion.
E. Transmission output shaft from drive shaft.

You can separate the following doing steps 1 through 7 above:
A. Pressure plate from clutch plate.
B. Flywheel from clutch plate.
C. Transmission input shaft from pressure plate.
D. Transmission input shaft from transmission output shaft.
E. Transmission input shaft from drive shaft and drive train beyond drive shaft.
F. Clutch plate from crankshaft, belt tensioner, HB, uneven combustion.

Last UPDATE of post 37 Aug, 2012

Dynomite 08-03-2012 07:23 PM

Throwout Bearings and Clutch Forks
 
Throwout Bearings and Clutch Forks

1. Throwout Bearings.

I have a 91' ZF S6-40 Transmission (Black Label) Parts List No 1052-000-035 with a collar diameter of 1.373 inches and a 94'-95' ZF S6-40 Transmission (Blue Label) Parts List No 1052-000-087 with a collar diameter of 1.305 inches.

a. Here is a source for the 90'-93' ZR1/LT5 Throwout Bearing Power Torque Systems Throwout Bearing Part #: 23243
b. Here is a source for the 94'-95' ZR1/LT5 Throwout Bearing Power Torque Systems Throwout Bearing Part #: 23244
c. This is exactly what the Throwout Bearing looks like as cited above in both cases as the differences in internal diameter is not noticeable from a picture only.

https://cimg4.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...8d047bb84f.jpg

d. The square end of the Throwout Bearing is prevented from rotating on the transmission collar by the Clutch Fork. The Throwout Bearing slides in and out on the transmission collar when you depress the clutch pedal (Lubricate the transmission collar when installing the transmission so the Throwout Bearing slides freely during operation of the clutch pedal).
e. The other end of the Throwout Bearing which rides against the pressure plate fingers is locked to the pressure plate fingers by a wire clip and always rotates with the flywheel with the clutch engaged or not (the three tabs on the Throwout Bearing are locked between three sets of fingers of the pressure plate).
f. If the Throwout Bearing locks up with the square end forced to rotate, the square end will spread the Clutch Forks completing the failure of the Throwout Bearing as well as the Clutch Fork.
g. As I recall, typically a Throwout Bearing does not rotate at all when the clutch is not depressed unlike the Throwout Bearing of the LT5.

2. Throwout Bearing has two Bearings.
https://cimg1.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...f28bd352c0.jpg
A. When you engage the clutch placing pressure (pulling with the Clutch Fork) on the Throwout bearing the inner bearing is working/spinning.
B. When you release the clutch, the outer bearing is always spinning.
C. The inside collar is prevented from spinning by the Clutch Fork. The Outside collar is always spinning with the Pressure Plate.
D. The Clutch Disk is spinning or not depending on if it is compressed between the Pressure Plate and the Flywheel.

3. Clutch Forks.

a. The Clutch Fork can be slid to the drivers side of the Bell Housing (elongated hole with spring clip) once the transmission is removed. This will disengage the Clutch Fork from the Throwout Bearing for Bell Housing removal and installation.
b. I have a 90 (L98) with ZF S6 40 trans also and I expect that the clutch fork is identical (90 ZR1 (LT5), 91 ZR1 (LT5), 90 Corvette (L98).

c. If a clutch fork fails, I would never try to weld or stiffen a clutch fork (the failure is an anomaly) and the heat treatment of the original is unknown.

d. I have seen clutch forks on Ebay as well as complete bell housings with clutch forks installed.

e. Clutch forks do have three wear points (fingers at the throwout bearing, pivot, slave cylinder plunger) all of which should be greased a tad upon installation.

Last UPDATE of post 38 Dec, 2017

Dynomite 08-03-2012 07:24 PM

C4 beam plates and Installation
 
C4 beam plates and Installation (ZF S6 40 Transmission)

For this Installation I am assuming the ZR-1 is lifted and on jack stands on the front and rear or on wheel Ramps/Jack Stands.

1. Advantages of C4 Beam Plates.
a. The C4 Beam Plates tie together each pair of bolts (Transmisison pair and Differential pair) with a SS Plate vice aluminum.
b. Each C4 Beam Plate also offers a larger contact area of the tensile bolt loads onto the C-Frame. This eliminates the wear on the "C" Frame from a smaller original washer and resulting release of bolt tension.
c. The C4 Beam Plate also acts like one big washer wherein the tensile load from each individual bolt is now shared a bit between bolts (minimum effect).
d. The C4 Beam Plates correct the condition caused by the bolt holes in the Aluminum C-Frame getting bigger or elongated with wear or the thickness of the Aluminum C-Frame from top to bottom between the original bolt two washers becoming worn so that thickness is less releasing bolt tension.
The C4 Beam Plates are definitley worth it if only for the Bolt Load Distribution (Two BIG SS washers on each end) on the C Frame and Ease of Installation. Take Note of the additional Stiffeners on each C4 Beam Plate (The BIG H). There is a BIG Difference between a Clamping Load distibution by two washers and the Clamping Load on ONE BIG PLATE on the Transmission Yoke as well as the Differential Housing.

2. Captured Free Floating Nut Design.
The C4 Beam Plates by Bill Boudreau have Free Floating Captured Nuts on the Top Plate as previously mentioned (which is a bit more complex in manufacture than a welded nut on a plate) This Captured Nut allows the Nut to Float a bit making it even easier to catch with the bolts as you insert them from the bottom.

This Captured Free Floating Nut Concept also allows self equalization of the distance between bolts (as if you are inserting them singularly THE TOP BOLT HOLES ONLY) especially after having one bolt started. The Nuts float and are prevented from turning by the design of the Capture. This Free Floating Capture of the Nuts in the Bill Boudreau Design is more important from an engineering concept (even if only floating on the TOP END) and overlooked by many in this discussion.

From a Structural Point Of View
The Top C4 Beam Plates (ZFdoc) are a little complex in that the Nuts are NOT welded in place but captured and free floating (not allowed to turn). The Bottom C4 Beam Plates are shown in this thread. I have NOT seen any photos of other C4 Beam Plates having that feature. This allows the C4 Beam Bolts to self align without any additional stress from tipping or lateral movement of the two Self Locking Nuts. A very Creative Design from other Load Distribution Designs (C4 Beam Clamping) I have seen :thumbs:

3. Removing existing Exhaust.

The Existing Stock Exhaust is the most difficult to remove. You may need a torch to heat the 6 bolts attaching the exhaust to the Catalytic Converters. I recall the bolts have 15mm Heads. You will need a socket wrench and maybe a cheater bar on the socket wrench handle to loosen the bolts.

A. Once the bolts are removed from the Catalytic Converters the two front and two rear 13mm Head Hanger bolts can be removed.
B. Place a rolling hydraulic jack under the rear of the center Exhaust and slide the exhaust to the rear about 1/2 inch to clear the bevel connector on the Drivers Side of the Catalytic Converter Flange Connector. The Front of the exhaust can then be lowered with the hydraulic jack and the entire Exhaust System slid forward releasing the rear slip joints on each side of the tail pipes. Slide the Complete Exhaust System out from under the ZR-1.
C. Remove the three lower 13mm Head bolts holding the front Exhaust Hanger so the hanger can be rotated forward and rearward clearing an area for removal of the C-Beam Transmission Bolts.

4. Installation of C4 Beam Plates.
a. ALIGN DRIVELINE COMPONENTS: Take the following measurements directly above and to the right of the Propeller shaft front yolk universal joint between the C-Frame and the inside of the underbody. Use a hydraulic jack under the transmission to lift/lower the transmission for proper alignment of the Driveline on the Transmission End.
b. To ensure proper alignment of the driveline, a clearance of 45 mm +/- 6mm (1.77 in +/- 0.236 in) must be maintained between the top of the support to the underbody. I set the clearance to 1.5 in to account for unloading deflection when I remove the hydraulic jack supporting the transmission.
c. A clearance of 28 mm+/-6 mm (1.1 in +/- 0.236 in) from the (passenger side of vehicle) right side of the support to the side wall.
d. Do not use any of the 4 original C-Frame bolt washers on the front (Transmission) or rear (Differential) bolts.
e. Tighten support bolts at Carrier (Differential) to 80 Nm (59 lb-ft).
f. Tighten support bolts at Transmission to 50 Nm (37 lb-ft).
g. Do not go over the Bolt Torque on the Carrier and Transmission or you risk changing the Dimensions of the Carrier and Transmission Connectons.

C4 Beam Plate Installed On Differential ......................C4 Beam Plate Installed On Transmission
........................................ ........................................ ..Note C4 Beam Plate Bevel Location
https://cimg6.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...78f2474316.jpghttps://cimg5.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...b996895a20.jpg

5. Why Take Measurements?
It is kind of a corny measurement since you are measuring between the C-Frame and the side wall/Underbody which is heavily coated and made of light steel and the accuracy of the measurement needs only to be within 1/4 inch + or -. I think you are just making sure you did not put an angle in that front driveline U-joint by moving the transmission appreciably during the installation of the new C4 Beam Plates.

A Quick Measurement in regard to Transmission Yoke height can be checked from inside the car by measuring the height of the Shifter. A height of 6.25 inches from the counsel to the top of the shifter (at the center of the shifter in neutral) will be very close to the correct transmission height.

https://cimg9.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...b7f5b50ff0.jpg

a. The 1.77 in spacer should fit between the top of the driveline support to the underbody. The 1.1 in spacer should fit between the right side (passenger side) of the driveline support to the side wall.
b. You might check that alignment spacing before you start the project to see where your alignment is now. Then just keep that alignment with the installation of the new C4 Beam Plates.

https://cimg0.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...1c8cf9614e.jpg

Secondary to Transmission/Driveline Alignment is ground clearance of Transmission Drain Plug. The Transmission Drain Plug clearance to ground is approximately 4 to 4.5 inches on my ZR-1s which is NOT the lowest point on the ZR-1 Drive Train/Chassis. The Ground Clearance depends on many things including Tire Pressure, Tires, Wheels, and Suspension.

6. Re-Installing the Exhaust.

The Exhaust System can be re-installed after the C-Beam Plates are torqued and the front Exhaust Hanger is re-installed in the location of the Front C-Beam Plates.

The Entire Exhaust System can be reinstalled by sliding the Exhaust System under the ZR-1 and setting a rolling hydraulic jack under the rear of the center Exhaust and lifting up to within about 8 inches of the final position.

A. Lift the two rear Tail Pipes and slip the slider into position on the slip joints. Slide the Entire Exhaust System to the rear of the ZR-1 about 1 inch completely engaging the slip joints holding the Tail Pipes.
B. Raise the front of the Exhaust System with the rolling Hydraulic Jack to the final height aligning with the Catalytic Converter Connections. Slide the Entire Exhaust System Forward and install 6 NEW SS 10mm x 1.5 bolts. (10mm x 1.5 x 30mm on Passenger Side and 10mm x 1.5 x 50mm on Drivers Side). The SS Bolts shown have 17mm Hex Heads and Washers are NOT required.

SS 10mm x 1.5 x 30mm and SS 10mm x 1.5 x 50mm Bolts

https://cimg1.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...73008d3cb6.jpg

C. Reinstall the two Front 13mm Head Hanger Bolts and the two Rear 13mm Head Hanger Bolts.

7. Questions/Answeres Originally Posted by Hammer Regarding C4 Beam Plate Installation.
a. Exactly where do you check the alignment? I checked between C-Frame and side wall/underbody at location of C-frame bolts (transmission extension housing).
b. Do you jack the transmission towards the upper and right tunnel to get the alignment right? I placed jack under transmission (with a little upward pressure) BEFORE I loosened C-frame bolts.
c. Do you tighten the back differential bolts and then check alignment? I installed the C-Frame Plates at the rear (differential) first after placing a jack with a little pressure under the transmission (but not loosening the transmission extension C-Frame bolts). I tightened those differential C-Frame bolts and then moved to the front of the C-Frame (transmission extension housing).
d. Are all the bolts just snug and then you check alignment? That is the idea......but on mine I tightened them up and found that the alignment was perfect anyway since I did no jacking or moving of the transmission after loosening the C-Frame bolts. And, since I did the differential C4 Beam Plates first.
e. Do you use red or blue locktite on the threads? I used blue Loctite since I might recheck from time to time. I use blue Loctite on anything I think I will recheck such as the Plenum bolts for example.
Red loctite on the starter bolts, and the crankcase ventilation cover for example. Blue loctite on the oil pan and red loctite on the the oil pickup and baffle within the oil pan for another example.
f. Do not use the 4 original C-Frame bolt washers on the rear (Differential) bolts. Use 2 of the 4 original C-Frame bolt washers on the front (Transmission) bolts as they were originally. The Tranmsmission C4 Beam Plate beveled corner faces toward the front of the transmission.

8. Caution on Jacking the Engine.
Always remove the C4 Beam plate bolts on the transmission yoke when jacking/lifting the engine to minimize potential of twisting transmission yoke or C-Frame. .

USE A TORQUE WRENCH

="2"%Last UPDATE of post 39 Feb, 2020

Dynomite 08-03-2012 07:24 PM

Tires and Selective Ride Control
 
Tires and Selective Ride Control

Just installed another set of Nitto Tires on a 1990 ZR-1 (#2067) :thumbs:

Discount Tire

FRONT........................................ ..............................REAR
Nitto NT 555 Extreme Performance..................................Nitto NT 555R Drag Radial
P275/40ZR-17 98W........................................ .............315/35R-17 102V B
https://cimg3.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...5931534020.jpg........................................ .....................https://cimg6.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...0ef31208e5.jpg

1. Total for ALL four tires (two FRONT and two REAR) $666 with free shipping.
2. Tires arrived 3 days by UPS after ordered from Discount Tire
3. Took new tires and two sets of rims with original good tires and old tires to local WW Tire
4. WW Tire removed original good tires from A-Molds and installed them on another 1990 ZR-1 (#3032) with original SawBlades then installed new Nitto tires on 1990 ZR-1 A-Molds (#2067).
5. Cost to install ALL tires including balancing was $20 each tire (including removing a nail from one original tire).
6. Confirmed tire balance at 135 mph on both ZR-1s with zero vibration at any speed 0 - 135 mph.
7. WW Tire installation was Absolutely the best balanced tires I have ever had.
8. Tires (some helpful hints from Marc Haibeck)
a. There are four or more brands available for the ZR-1. Sumitomo, Kumho, Nitto, Vredestein, etc.
b. Sumitomo's may flat spot when cold because there is one nylon cord. They will thump for about the first five miles when cold.
c. Kumho's racing tires are excellent.
d. The Nitto NT 555 provides 95% of the performance of the Goodyear D3 at about 60% of the price. The soft thread on the NT 555R wears out in about 20k miles.
e. The Tire Rack does not sell Nitto. Discount Tire has them Discount Tire.
f. AFS Wheels sells Vredestein tires Vredestein. AFS Wheels are the same as "Cleanin-out-the-garage" on Ebay. Cleanin-out-the-garage has Lots of information on Vredestein Sessanta tires on Ebay Vredestein Tires.

Selective Ride Control
FX3 Selective Rid Control TIPS
FX3 Actuator Rebuild TIPS

See this from Captain Z
Please take a moment to inspect the small metal gear located on the top of the shock. Often they are broken and must be replaced before the fx3 system will be restored to working order. We have original equipment gears in stock for 1989 to 1991. We have replacement gears for 1992 and later models in stock also. These gears are made of steel finished in yellow zinc dichromate. There are two different gears used on the shocks in the fx3 system. The difference is in the size of the stop located along the lower edge of the gear. The year of your Corvette determines the type of gear used. See photo below.
Visually inspect the gear for breaks and for cracks. Also the gear should not be able to turn in complete circles without stopping. If you can turn it continuously without hitting the stop then it is broken and must be replaced. The gear can be replaced in either position without affecting the operation of the shock.

https://cimg7.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...3102434d29.jpg

From this it appears to me the setup of the FX-3 is self aligning in all regards...........just want to make sure.


Originally Posted by Dynomite (Post 180353)
Got a new front actuator on Ebay and installed it with shock gear centered. Appears the positon of shock gear makes no difference because the actuator does a self alignment on startup. Got rid of Service Ride Control warning ......it went away immediately and never returned

See this from Captain Z
When the ignition key is turned, the system will do a check to be sure it is working properly. The service ride control light should come on momentarily and then go out if all is well. If the light stays on then the system most likely has problems.

The two following observations suggests FX3 Bilstein self alignment IS what I think it is........


Originally Posted by We Gone (Post 192805)
I've had my front actuator motors off every time I clean the front suspension, blow the grit out of the cups and put a drop of gun oil on the shock gear even turn the gear and never paid attention to the position when I put them back on with 0 issues.


Originally Posted by Jagdpanzer (Post 192809)
I changed out my front shocks recently and all I had to do was carefully reinstalled the actuator by rotating it back and forth as it went down on shock the to make sure the actuator and valve gear teeth properly engaged. When fully inserted the splines on the outside of the actuator cap will lock into the metal cup on top of the shock and the retainer clip will insert easily then. As mentioned above when you turn the ignition key on the actuator cycles in both directions sensing the location of the valve hard stops by the resulting increase in current draw when the stops are reached. Then you’re ready to go. If for some reason the control system cannot find either of the valve hard stops (in case of broken gear) or senses the calibration time is taking too long it will trip the “Check Ride Control light”.

Last UPDATE of post 40 Dec, 2017

Dynomite 08-13-2012 11:46 PM

ZR-1 (90' and 91') Wilwood Rotors and C4 to C5-Z06 Conversion
 
ZR-1 (90' and 91') Wilwood Rotors and C4 to C5-Z06 Front Brake Conversion with A-Molds

Specific Brake Parts by Wilwood

The KEY Element is the offset of the Rotor to match the offset of the Caliper Bracket.
This Wilwood Rotor with Z06 Caliper Modification described herein is IDENTICAL on BOTH the 90' ZR-1 and 91' ZR-1.

1. Rotors.
Wilwood SRP Drilled Performance rotors 12.8 inch diameter and 1.25 inch width with 12x7.06 Rotor Bolt Circle (160-7744-BK RH and 160-7745-LH).

https://cimg8.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...7c7f07c373.jpghttps://cimg9.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...aebbed1f42.jpg

2. Hats.
Two Wilwood Big Brake short offset (offset 1/4 inch) Hats (Aluminum Alloy) with 5x4.75 Wheel Stud Circle and 12x7.06 Rotor Bolt Circle (#170-7746) will fit the Wilwood SRP Drilled Performance Rotors.

https://cimg5.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...b2c84d9627.jpghttps://cimg6.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...d72c7571e4.jpg

3. Brake Pads.
Four (4) 15Q-8012K PolymatrixQ pads for a C5-Z06 (Wilwood is souce).

4. C5-Z06 Calipers and Brackets.
https://cimg7.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...9faa399f66.jpg

C5-Z06 Calipers Ebay
C5-Z06 Caliper Brackets Ebay

5. Bracket Bolt Kits.
#14121 (Caliper Guide Pin) and Brake Hardware Kit (Spacers and Seals) #H5634Q at O'Reilly Auto Parts.

6. Adapters.
(Corvette C4 to C5-Z06 conversion brackets, late spindle) C4 to C5-Z06 Conversion Adapters (Ebay)
(Note the countersunk surface for Bracket Boss)

https://cimg9.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...d5ba60759a.jpg

7. SS Brake Lines.
C5 SS Brake Lines (Ebay)

https://cimg1.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...f8b43819b8.jpg

8. Adapter Washer Spacer.
One Washers (about 1/16 inch thickness are used on each of two adapter bolts) between the Adapter and
Wheel Assembly. This setup centered the calipers on the rotors having 1/4 inch offset.

You can see the washer (one washer on each bolt) spacer between the adapter and wheel assembly. Used Red Loctite 262 on all adapter bolts.

https://cimg2.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...a72e100cb2.jpg
https://cimg6.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...720face8a7.jpg

9. Wheel Weights and Sensor Cable Bracket.
a. I had to move wheel weights as there is only 1/8 inch clearance between inside of wheel hub and C5-Z06 calipers.
b. The wheel sensor cable bracket was twisted just a bit. This assures clearance between the wheel sensor cable and the SS brake line at maximum steering angles.

Wheel weights that were between spokes moved .......Weel weights in line with a spoke moved inside spoke
inside two adjacent spokes

https://cimg7.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...834fd7d07c.jpghttps://cimg9.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...f727d535d8.jpg

10. 91' Brake Upgrade to C5-Z06 with Wilwood Rotors.

https://cimg0.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...a36e4cb5bf.jpghttps://cimg1.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...be0013a5d6.jpg
https://cimg2.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...6e4d8b2303.jpghttps://cimg3.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...b9ca4f35b4.jpg

11. 90' Brake Upgrade to C5-Z06 with Wilwood Rotors.


https://cimg8.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...7c7f07c373.jpghttps://cimg5.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...8cd8afe930.jpg

12. Performance of the Wilwood SRP Drilled Performance Rotors with Hats.

Originally Posted by mike100 (Post 183487)
It has been so long since I changed over...What are your impressions from J55 to C5 brakes?

and those are some trick a55 rotors you got there. I thought my black anodized EBC slotted units were pimp.

I have this same Wilwood SRP Drilled Performance Rotor brake set up on my 91' and I can tell you there is no fade.

Also the Bearing Hub does not see near as much heat on a high speed stop.

The trick with the Wilwoods is the Hat. As you can see there is limited transfer of heat possible from the Rotor to the Hat. That keeps the Hub cooler than a solid mass Rotor/Hub. So the front end Hub Bearings do not see near as much heat when I stop in my relatively short 1/4 mile runouts from 120 mph ;)

https://cimg7.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...3c280f75bc.jpghttps://cimg5.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...b2c84d9627.jpg

13. Wheel Dimensions that will fit on this brake Set-Up.

This would be the limit of a wheel inner dimensions which would fit/clear the C5-Z06 Brake Caliper Set-UP.
Rather than try to measure the offset and the maximum radius of the Caliper it was easier just to measure the A-Mold wheel which just clears the spokes as well as the C5-Z06 Caliper outer radius as shown below. I would say this is Minimum Clearance. The clearances of this Set-Up is on the order of 1/4 inch on spoke and 1/8 inch on wheel inner radius so very close. There is slop in the Caliper pins riding in the bracket so this clearance is definitely required.

https://cimg0.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...c023dc6586.jpg

A. Spoke Offset.
The Spoke Offset from hub surface is 1 inch at the widest part (outer edge) of the Caliper.
The wheel weights are located on the inner rim and single stacked.

https://cimg1.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...3ae60dd72c.jpghttps://cimg4.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...0528325b28.jpg

B. Wheel inner diameter.

Two Inner wheel diameters are shown. The one on the left is the wheel diameter at the hub surface which is 15.25 inches (this would coincide with the the radius of the outer part of the caliper) . The Second wheel diameter on right is the wheel diameter at 4.5 inches up from the spoke where the inner (larger radius) part of the caliper which is larger radius sits which dimension is 15.75 inches.

https://cimg5.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...fa58fb66cd.jpghttps://cimg7.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...b54e28cbf7.jpg

14. Will this brake Set-Up work with Stock Sawblades.

I measured a stock Sawblade wheel and found the inside diameter of Saw Blade Rims is about identical to A-Mold Rims at the two critical locations of the Calipers. I also measured the spoke Offset from the Hub and found it to be .75 inch as compared to 1 inch for A-Molds. When installing the Sawbade wheel the spoke of the Sawblade JUST came into contact with the C5 Z06 Caliper as shown. In other words I would say the offset of the stock Sawblade wheel is 1/4 inch short of what would be required (3/4 inch vrs 1 inch).

https://cimg8.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...1250b373d1.jpg

It would be easy to place a 1/4 inch spacer on the Hat of the Wilwood Rotor but you would then be 1/4 inch shorter on the stud length for the wheel nuts which you end up with 1/4 inch less than the bit over 1/2 inch threaded contact now (as I view my Hubs with the Wilwood Rotors installed with Hats).

Last UPDATE of post 41 Dec, 2017

Dynomite 08-13-2012 11:47 PM

Going from 3:45 to 4:10 Differential
 
Going from 3:45 to 4:10 Differential

I need Ratech 'Deluxe' Install kit-3012K from http://ratech.stores.yahoo.net/coax84d44.html

Mopar P5007043 viper gears, from http://www.trademotion.com/auction/i...50&catalogid=0 Call Jeromy for prices, under $300 shipped.

Spicer # 707018X from http://www.drivetrainspecialists.com...oduct-446.html

Marc Haibeck 13/43 speedometer gears from http://www.zr1specialist.com/HAT%20W...on%20Gears.htm

I convert the carrier caps from 1/2" bolts over to 1/2' ARP studs. ARP Part Numbers:
4 x Stud - AR4.060-LB
4 x Hex Nut - 200-8607
4 x Washer - 200-8514
To order I call ARP Order Desk & Technical Support: 800.826.3045
Use a 1/2"-13 bottoming tap to deepen the threads.

As long as I am there under the differential, Get a Denny's Driveshafts 1350 kit for C4 aluminum half shafts from http://www.dennysdriveshaft.com/p422...build_kit.html

Install the differential drain plug from Corvette Central
http://www.parts123.com/parts123/yb....Z5Z5Z50000050F

To permanently stop rust I use POR-15 Stirling Silver and Gloss Black paint
http://www.por15.com/POR-15-Rust-Pre...nt/products/1/


Last UPDATE of post 42 Aug, 2012

Dynomite 08-13-2012 11:48 PM

LT5 Final Inspection, testers, including Brake Tricks
 
LT5 Final Inspection including Brake Tricks

1. Firing Order Check
a. 18436572
b. Drivers side bank from front of engine is 1357
c. Passenger side bank from front of engine is 2468

2. Oil Pressure check at 55 lbs...........................3. Fuel Pressure Test at 45 psi.
https://cimg2.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...283025ef7a.jpghttps://cimg5.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...cbd2c58acc.jpg

4. Compression Check
a. 220-230 lbs on all cylinders with throttle closed.
https://cimg6.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...ff7781e42f.jpg

5. Leak Down Testers
a. Low pressure (15 psi) Leak Down tester....... b. High pressure (100 psi) Leak Down Tester (Longacre Racing Products).
https://cimg7.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...f454125304.jpghttps://cimg0.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...be93cf4004.jpg

6. Wilwood Rotors with C5 ZO6 Calipers
a. Wilwood rotors with C5 Z06 Calipers will stop a freight train.
b. Had to move wheel weights from Caliper area for clearance.

https://cimg1.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...4b516d3d7a.jpg

It is running perfectly idling at a smooth 850
All coolant hoses are hot so coolant refill trick is proven to work. NO issues after I finally got my SAMCO hoses to stay on...LOL.

7. Battery disconnect trick (rough cold idle)
Marc Haibeck descibed this unique situation regarding an initial rough cold idle. Fuel Trims are fueling data that are displayed on an engine data scanner. I have been disconnecting the battery several times during the day after each ride to correct a vibration issue I had behind the speedometer in the dash. The vibration was actually my top lose which telescoped down to the dash. I also did some wiring mods around the battery and installed a rebuilt BOSE system which I disconnected the battery several times.

Each time I disconnected the battery, I lost the system's learned fuel corrections (Fuel Trim). The system self tunes the low load fueling after it is warmed up. It then uses the learned values on the next cold start until it is warm enough to go into closed loop and resumes learning. Exactly what I was experiencing as it goes into closed loop around 167 deg engine temperature. Then ran smooth having to relearn low load fueling.

It has some heavy duty acceleration and it is smooth at any and all rpm. No hesitation at all. Unbelievably smooth and very very fast.......WOW!!!!


Last UPDATE of post 43 Dec, 2017

Dynomite 08-13-2012 11:48 PM

Accessories
 
Accessories

1. Cobra XRS-9955 15 Band 360° Police Cop Radar Laser Detector w/DataGrafix Display.

But the mount that comes with Cobra is too small so get this mount.
Power Grip Suction Mount For the COBRA Radar Detector 9-15 Band & Recent Models

https://cimg2.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...ab2c98b3de.jpg
https://cimg3.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...2925cf89b9.jpg

The Cobra's seem to catch everything including garage door openers ;)
Still trying to get a range for a hand held radar gun....will confirm when I catch one.

And sometimes I get a message Rail Crossing and I should be looking for Trains :D
But you can tune most unnecessary things out with settings.

Just last night found five police/patrol cars I did not know were around until Cobra blasted me (I turned down Cobra Volume).

The Cobra will also tell you battery voltage (digital) on the fly.

The reviews of the Cobra XRS-9955 on line seem pretty good.
I have four Cobras including my wife's who needs a radar detector much more than myself just because she is not normally looking for "cops" :yesnod:

2. Suction Window Mount and C340 Garmin.

The mount which was ordered separately (Super Grip Suction Mount For the COBRA Radar Detector) is the same mount I use for my Garmin StreetPilot c340s. The C340s are a bit older technology but hot damn...they are good and very easy to use. I always have a C340 in the C4 Corvette.

3. USB Adapter.

And....last but not least........I use this USB adapter for the Corvette Cigarettes Lighter which is dual port and allows the cover to be closed.

https://cimg4.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...23fecd963f.jpg

Last UPDATE of post 44 Dec, 2017

Dynomite 08-13-2012 11:49 PM

Exhaust System Replace with Headers
 
Exhaust System Replace with Headers

On a 91' the CATS are welded to the exhaust manifolds and the mufflers are welded to the exhaust pipes. There is only one joint that is bolted with a flange between the CATS and the "pipes" on each side (you can see the flanges in the picture). The exhaust hangers are all bolted (two on the twin pipes and one each on the exhaust mufflers).

I am sure a 90' exhaust unbolts just like my 91' . Also got rid of the Air Induction System.

https://cimg6.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...3a75451669.jpghttps://cimg6.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...92f3e915f3.jpg

You need two new exhaust manifold gaskets and maybe a dipstick tube seal.
Exhaust Manifold Gasket
Dipstick Tube Seal

And Maybe Stage 8 Header Bolts.
LT5 Summit Racing 8905 LT5 8mm x 1.25 The underhead length is 25 mm or about .98 inches

1. Remove REAR innner wheel panels (Drivers side and Passenger side) first.
...a. Two Torx T15 to rear louvered side panel.
...b. Three Torx T27 to rear louvered side panel.
...c. Four 10mm bolts in vertical line attached to center panel.
...d. One 10 mm bolt under rear wheel panel attached to frame.
...e. Two 10 mm bolts lower rear attached to rear frame.
...f. Two 7 mm bolts along top edge drivers side of rear wheel panel attaching secondary injector module.
2. Remove 10 mm bolt that holds dipstick tube to manifold.
3. Remove Dipstick Tube. (plug dip stick tube hole temporarily)
4. Loosen exhaust connecting flanges just to the rear of the CATS (three bolts each) Use some WD40 to start with on all bolts.
5. Leave the CATS connected to the Exhaust Manifolds.
6. Remove Two Hanger bolts (Trans and Differential). Leave hangers in place.
7. Remove rear "L" Hanger on Stock Mufflers and drop mufflers a few inches supporting mufflers on blocks.
8. Finish removing 3 bolts from connecting flanges (step #4 above) and drop exhaust system to floor (drag out to rear).
9. Remove exhaust manifold tin heat isolation covers.
10. Remove Air Induction main tubes and rest of Air Induction system including pump.
...a. Associated with the Air Injection system is one vacuum line on the drivers side fender skirt above the shock tower.
...b. I eliminated the "T" and just moved the "Y" in front of "T" about 3 inches and plugged the "Y" back in where the "T" was.
11. Remove (I think 13 mm) nut on stud (stud may come out) in center lower of each Exhaust Manifold (90's - 92's only).
12. Remove exhaust manifold bolts (10mm) using various 3/8 inch socket extensions, universals, and flex head ratchet wrench.
Do NOT slip wrenches on the 10mm hex head of the exhaust manifold bolts when you try to first loosen them jimming the hex in any way!!!
13. Drop Stock Exhaust Manifolds with CATS to floor and slide out to side.
...a. Leave the CATS connected to the manifolds.
14. Remove old Exhaust Manifold Gaskets and clean exhaust surfaces on block.

https://cimg6.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...3a75451669.jpg

I use the wobble extensions on almost everything. The wobble extensions are in first picture and flex ratchet combination wrenches in second picture.
https://cimg0.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...d4be171545.jpghttps://cimg9.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...83b51a852a.jpg

You will notice what allows the wobble. A 3/8 inch universal in the second picture.

https://cimg1.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...c1def1e1eb.jpghttps://cimg2.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...f7a89f99be.jpg

There are all sorts of socket combinations you can get but these four tools/tool sets will get er done assuming you have a good 3/8 inch and 1/4 inch socket wrench and set of metric sockets. The BIG problem in removing the exhaust manifold is getting wrenches in such a small space. I actually use 1/4 inch socket, 1/4 inch socket extensions, 1/4 inch socket wrench, and 1/4 inch universal as the 1/4 inch are much easier to work in tight areas. When you get to installing Headers....I sometimes use two universals and two extensions with one 1/4 inch ratchet wrench with Stage 8 Header bolts (it actually works).

Post 87 - Installing Headers and Exhaust

Now if you drop stuff....here is the tool.

A 16 inch straight Hemostat (Ebay has many). On the Ebay Search....just type in Hemostat and the length you would like and also type in Curved or Straight (Hemostat 16 straight for this one). The beauty in addition to being sleek to reach tight spaces is that it can be locked (ratched locked) once you get hold of what you dropped.
https://cimg3.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...247446228b.jpg

Particularily useful for Stainless steel and Aluminum Nuts, Bolts and Washers.

Last UPDATE of post 45 Dec, 2017

Dynomite 08-13-2012 11:49 PM

Exhaust Headers Locking Bolt Tricks
 
Exhaust Headers Locking Bolt Tricks

Use a bit of antiseize on Header Bolts with the Stage 8 Locks. Also use a bit of antiseize on all spark plugs.

Here are Locking Header Bolt Kits (LT5 and L98) :cheers:

LT5 Summit Racing M-9432-A54
LT5 8mm x 1.25 The underhead length is 22 mm or about .87 inches
https://cimg5.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...e262528e28.jpg

LT5 Summit Racing 8905
LT5 8mm x 1.25 The underhead length is 25 mm or about .98 inches

L98 Summit Racing 8911A
L98 3/8 x 16 the underhead length is 1.00 inches

https://cimg6.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...4ef0287eed.jpg

Only works with Headers however as the individual locks use the header pipes as a stop. You do not need a Header Bolt in EVERY threaded hole. On my installation of SW Headers, removed the motor mount insulation each side as the insulation on top of mount was touching the headers.

https://cimg7.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...5b92482bb9.jpghttps://cimg3.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...821b014f27.jpg

Last UPDATE of post 46 Dec, 2017

Dynomite 08-13-2012 11:49 PM

Installing the LT5 with Headers and the O2 Sensors Functionality
 
Installing the LT5 with Headers and the O2 Sensors Functionality

1. The first two items to be removed before the engine can be lifted (with Headers Installed) are the Wiper Motor and AC Temperature Sensor (Passenger Side Fire Wall). The last items to be installed will be the Wiper Motor and AC Temperature Sensor. The LT5 was lifted with Headers, Injector Housing, Alternator, Pressure Plate, Belt Tensioner, and lower engine Radiator Hose installed. See How to Replace the Wiper Motor

A/C Temp Sensor........................Wiper Motor.........Do NOT use standard Lift Eyes installing LT5 with Headers
https://cimg8.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...05a3b29704.jpghttps://cimg2.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...ef329e8805.jpg

The Hood was NOT REMOVED for this installation of the LT5 with Fuel Rails, Plenum, and Bell Housing installed on the LT5 after the LT5 installation in the ZR1.

2. LT5 Lifting Attachments.

Make sure the LT5 sits level from side to side and a Leveler Bar is used to tip the engine to the rear. Do not use the standard Lift eyes (Passenger side rear and Drivers side front) because as you tilt the engine to the rear the load leveler will shift to the Drivers side rotating the engine lower on the passenger side. I use nylon straps around Harmonic Balancer (front) and Pressure Plate (rear). The LT5 then does not rotate from side to side with each Header remaining at the same height. The LT5 can be tilted to the rear with the Load Leveler.

See Lifting the LT5

https://cimg3.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...12075d654e.jpg

3. The Installation and verification of O2 Sensors Functionality.

A. O2 Sensor Wiring and Codes.
1. The O2 sensor uses two wires for a heating circuit.
2. The third wire is for voltage generated by the O2 sensor transmitted to the ECM.
3. Codes:
Code 44 Oxygen Sensor (Left Bank Lean)
Code 45 Oxygen Sensor (Left Bank Rich)
Code 63 Right Oxygen Sensor Circuit Open
Code 64 Right Oxygen Sensor (Right Bank Lean)
Code 65 Right Oxygen Sensor (Right Bank Rich)

B. O2 Sensor Functional Requirements.
The O2 sensor readings are not used at first until the O2 sensor becomes heated and functional which it will then generate a voltage of which .45 volts is average for optimum oxygen. The two heating wires will show a resistance of .40 ohms more or less when functional.

C. Verifying the Oxygen Reading Functionality of the O2 Sensor.
1. The O2 sensor can be checked by removing it from the vehicle.
2. Connect a digital voltmeter to the sensor;
3. Use a propane torch to heat the sensor element.
4. With a zirconia O2 sensor, connect the positive test lead to the O2 sensors lead wire, and the negative test lead to the sensor housing or shell (ground).
5. Hold the sensor with pliers, then use the propane torch to heat the sensing element.
The flame consumes most of the oxygen, so the sensor should generate a “rich” voltage signal of about 0.9 volts within 60 seconds or less.
6. Next, remove the flame while observing the voltmeter. The sensor reading should drop to less than 0.1 volt within three seconds if the sensor is good.

D. Verifying the Functionality of the O2 Sensor Heating Circuit.
1. To test the sensor’s heater circuit, connect an ohmeter (set on low scale) across the sensor’s two
heater wires.
2. If the heater circuit is okay, the meter will register a resistance reading. The actual reading is not important so long as the meter registers
something other than an open circuit.
3. Marc Haibeck suggests An easy way to test the heating Circuit of the O2 Sensor is to turn the ignition on with the engine off and the engine cold. After two minutes you will be able to feel the sensors warming up with your hand.

E. Verifying the Continuity of the O2 Sensor Connections to the ECM.
1. Marc Haibeck suggests The O2 Sensor voltage can be measured at the ECM pin A16 for the right side and Pin C15 for the left side.
2. One can Test the Voltage Output of the O2 Sensors on a warmed up and Running Engine (after the O2 Sensor has warmed up from its Own O2 Sensor Heater or by Running the Engine for a short time).
3. Stick a needle in Pin A16 or Pin C15 at the ECM with a Volt Meter attached and read .45 volts for a normal running engine or up to .9 Volts for an Engine Running Rich Situation and less than .45 Volts for an Engine Running Lean Situation.

NOTES:
Originally Posted by XfireZ51
Originally, O2 sensors were single wire with no heating circuit. Heating was included strictly as a means of "lighting" the O2 sensor quicker rather than wait for the Hot Exhaust to heat the O2 Sensor up to operating temperatures (Get into Closed Loop operation sooner). Most of the emissions happens in start up and warm up. The sensor ground is internal to the ECM. The ECM reads the signal coming through the Pins A16 and Pins C15 wire at the ECM which is white wire or terminal C at the sensor. More than .45v and its an engine rich situation and less than .45v an engine lean situation. The 2 black wires at the sensor (terminal A&B) are strictly for the heating element (power and ground).

The variation in voltage comes from the outside air versus the air within the sensor. That is why it is important NOT to cover up the wires as they go into the O2 sensor. Essentially, the outside air is reference.

Last UPDATE of post 47 Dec, 2017

Dynomite 08-13-2012 11:49 PM

1990 and 1991 Fuses/Additional 12V Connector
 
1990 and 1991 Fuses/Additional 12V Connector

1. 1990 Primary and Auxiliary Fuse Panel.
The Primary Fuse Panel is located on the passenger side to the right of the glove box and can be accessed by opening the passenger side door. The Auxiliary Fuse Panels are located under the passenger side dash. Remove the hush panel two screws (7mm heads near front of black plastic hush panel and one 7mm head screw located inside the passenger side Primary Fuse Panel Cover). The Primary Fuse Panel Cover frame has three screws (either Torx (91') or 7mm hex head (90')).

https://cimg8.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...dff900bc64.jpghttps://cimg1.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...2315e34d0a.jpg


Originally Posted by Paul Workman (Post 207432)
Initially depending on memory (first mistake) I did some testing/verifying to discover what is really what with regard to the 90, CTSY fuse (upper left corner of the main fuse panel), and the AUX FUSE BLOCK and was able to verified the following:

The foot courtesy lights - come on when the door is unlocked with the key, but if the door is left open/adjar OR the ignition switch is turned to the ON position, they will go out.
The MAP light on the rear view mirror will operate w/ or w/o the IGNITION (IGN) switch ON or OFF.
The outside TEMPERATURE reading display will register with the switch ON. But, if the fuse is pulled/blown, the temp display back lighting will be present, but no digital temp display
The speaker amplifiers AND the antenna will operate IF the radio itself is turned ON along with the IGN switch is either in the ON or the ACC position. (Note, however, the radio itself IS NOT powered by the CTSY FUSE, but rather a separate fuse. This is a little tricky, because the radio pre-sets display will indicate the radio is working, but there's no sound (and the antenna will not raise) which can perhaps lead one to conclude the radio is not working and lead them in that direction instead of the CTSY fuse.)
The climate controls; A/C, heat, etc. will operate IF the IGN switch is ON
The cigarette lighter IS ALWAYS HOT.

2. The AUX FUSE BLOCK.
https://cimg1.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...2315e34d0a.jpg

The block is located under the passenger hush panel. The panel is held by two screws on the bottom edge, and one screw under the bottom right of the cover for the main fuse panel. (that panel cover is held by 3 screws). Find the AUX FUSE BLOCK located right of center of the hush panel, directly above where a passenger's right ankle might rest. The AUX BLOCK might be obscured by some wire harnesses that might have to be pushed aside to view/access the fuses thereon.

from the top:
the primary fuel pump (FP2 - correction) is the 10A fuse (red) at the top
the THEFT deterrent fuse, a 15A fuse (blue) is second from the top
the power door lock is the third fuse fuse a 15A fuse (blue)
the "CRNK A/B" fuse is a 10A (red) fuse (ref the FSM).

Sometimes when in the midst of troubleshooting problems consisting of several circuits which are further complicated by layers of switches and relays, and the occasional misprint in the manual, what controls what can get confused: - as apparently I became during my trek through these very circuits only a couple months ago. So, my apologies if I confused anyone earlier.

3. Changes to the Fuse Panels in 1991.
In 1991 some changes were made to the Primary Fuse Panel and a second Auxiliary Fuse Panel was added.
1. The L INST was added to the 1991 Auxilary Fuse Panel. The INST on the 1990 Primary Fuse Panel was relabled to R INST on the 1991 Primary Fuse Panel.
2. The CRUISE amps was increased from 3 amps (1990 Primary Fuse Panel) to 10 amps on the 1991 Primary Fuse Panel.
3. The A/C amps was decreased from 25 amps (1990 Primary Fuse Panel) to 10 amps on the 1991 Primary Fuse Panel.

On the 1991 Aux 2 Fuse Panel (The 1991 Auxiliary Fuse Panel is located under the passenger hush panel).
10 AMP is radio, B CONV is lighter and B+ for the accessory harness in console, I CONV is switch wire in console.

10 AMP top is L INST......left door courtesy, LH window switch, Heater and AC control, DIC. Power mirror and radio control lamps. There's a R INST 10 AMP in the main block.

1991 Primary and Auxiliary Fuse Panels.

https://cimg7.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...416abed30e.jpghttps://cimg8.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...0640f949d4.jpg

4. Marc Haibeck and Electrical Issues.

Marc Haibeck Checking Injector Resistance With Plenum In Place
Marc Haibeck Checking Secondary Operation Plenum In Place
Marc Haibeck and the ALDL Connector

5. 12V Swivel Lighter Plug with 2 Outlets and USB Port

The RoadPro RPP2SWVUSB 12V Swivel Lighter Plug with 2 Outlets and USB Port provides additional 12v power (Cobra and Garmin for example) as well as USB power for charging cell phones.

https://cimg9.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...4d06fba4f5.jpghttps://cimg0.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...e1caedda98.jpg

The RoadPro easily fits into the existing and only 12v Auxiliary receptacle and is on a swivel so can be tilted as required. Also the RoadPro has a green light when powered. I use the coiled charging cords on everything for a cleaner installation.

https://cimg2.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...06a293f7f6.jpg

Last UPDATE of post 48 Dec, 2017

Dynomite 08-13-2012 11:50 PM

Backup Tail Light Switch and Alternators
 
Backup Tail Light Switch and Alternators

1. Backup Tail Light Switch.

Sources.....
Backup Tail Light Switch

https://cimg4.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...3431737abc.jpg

I think the backup tail light switch is that connector on the top left
You would have to remove the Clutch Slave Cylinder to get to that switch for sure.

The switch is 22mm and I could get a 22mm box wrench on it even though the switch is recessed a bit (I am not sure if you can sneak a box wrench up there with transmission installed). The electrical plug to the switch has one tab you have to disengage to remove the electrical plug.

https://cimg5.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...c8104e52db.jpg

2. Alternators.

The Ultima 124 Amp Alternator - Remanufactured R111799A from O'Reillys fits the 1990 ZR-1 perfectly. This Alternator costs $100. The Ultima is a bit heavier with the body a bit larger in diameter with identical mounting points as the stock Alternator. The Ultima 124 Amp Alternator fits perfectly under the Plenum of the LT5.

I have taken this #72 ZR-1 with Phil's Improved Fuel Pressure Regulator and the Rebuilt Ultima 124 Amp Alternator on several Quarter Mile Runs and one 100 mile round trip with NO ISSUES. I have yet had to replace any Rebuilt Alternators from O'Reillys :thumbs:

https://cimg2.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...6c4b44d089.jpghttps://cimg4.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...aeb8918b1e.jpg

3. Installing All Aluminum Alternator Pulley.

Both the bottom and top Alternator Mountings and the threaded hole at rear of Alternator that excepts the bolt from the small angled brace that attaches to the Injector Housing Bolt are ALL identical to the stock Alternator. The Hot wire can be seen just above the rear mounting bolt and is actually better positioned on this Ultima 124 amp alternator than the stock alternator.

See All Aluminum Alternator Pulley

https://cimg7.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...0e2279bda7.jpghttps://cimg5.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...a6a82f6943.jpg

4. Minor Modification of Air Horn.

The smaller single vacuum port (nipple) on the Air Horn pointing back under TB on 90' (90' only) is for vapor Canister Control and which vacuum line is connected to the Charcoal Vapor Canister control valve under the Drivers Side Headlight (on the 90'). This single Vapor Canister Control vacuum nipple almost touches the Ultima 124 Amp Alternator body and has to be bent just a bit as shown in the second photo. This assures the Alternator is not touching the rubber vacuum connector that fits on the vacuum nipple of the Air Horn.

https://cimg6.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...34868992b3.jpghttps://cimg9.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...b328c90ec1.jpg
https://cimg8.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...ed82cbefb6.jpghttps://cimg2.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...c0d92c4989.jpg

Last UPDATE of post 49 Aug, 2020

Dynomite 08-13-2012 11:50 PM

Replacing the Windshield and Wiper Motor
 
Replacing the Windshield and Wiper Motor (ZR-1 #72)

A. Windshield.
I bought a New Windshield and weather stripping for a 1990 ZR-1 (#72) and had the Windshield replaced by Safelite (I specifically said I did not need a warranty since I was furnishing the molding as well as the windshield).

Windshield BEFORE Replacement showing severe Delamination.
https://cimg9.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...63464672ab.jpg

Safelite Just installed a Windshield and Weather stripping in a 1990 ZR-1 for $150. I furnished the Windshield and Weather Stripping :)

This is number 72 one of the first 1990s built.
I also have the last 1990 ZR-1 sold to public (#3032) and it has no windshield issues.

This is BEFORE and AFTER photos :D

Safelite did a Perfect Job :thumbs:

I got the Windshield and Weather Stripping from David Johnson and have to say the Windshield is perfect in every way as is the Weather Stripping. Safelite was pleasantly surprised how good this Windshield Installation ended ....and they have done other Windshield Installations on Corvettes with Windshields and Weather Stripping they have provided themselves (This was the best they had seen).
https://cimg9.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...63464672ab.jpghttps://cimg0.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...a612dbcdce.jpg
https://cimg2.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...bb99a2439c.jpg


B. Wiper Motor.
I remove the wiper motor when removing and installing the LT5 engine.
Have a Magnetic Pick Up Tool handy as you may drop nuts or the Wiper Motor Arm as you remove the Wiper Motor.

REMOVAL of Wiper Motor
1. Reach through Windshield Wiper Grille (the small removable access cover above windshield wiper motor arm connection should pop off using a flat screw driiver). See Left Photo below.
2. With socket wrench just loosen the two 10 mm nuts on each (left and right) windshield wiper arm (DO NOT REMOVE THOSE NUTS).
3. Slide both windshield wiper arms off the Wiper Motor Arm sockets Relube those windshield wiper Arm sockets when reinstalling the windshield wiper arms.
4. Remove the 13 mm nut holding the Wiper Motor Arm to the Wiper Motor and remove the Wiper Motor Arm (The Wiper Arm should be pointing toward the Drivers Side).
5. Remove the three Wiper Motor bolts (10 mm socket using 1/4 inch socket wrench) holding the Windshield Wiper Motor in place on the Fire Wall and Lift the Wiper Motor.
6. With the Wiper Motor lifted, disconnect three electrical connections to the Wiper Motor and Remove Wiper Motor.

INSTALLATION of Wiper Motor
1. Connect the Lower Electrical Connector to the Wiper Motor and position the Wiper Motor on the Fire Wall.
2. Install the three Wiper Motor Bolts (10 mm Socket using 1/4 inch socket wrench).
3. Locate the Wiper Motor Arm pointing horizontally toward the drivers side and install the 13 mm nut on the Wiper Motor Drive Shaft (the Wiper Motor Drive shaft is keyed to match a slot in the Wiper Motor Arm).
4.To reinstall the wiper arms reaching through the removable access with a long needle nose pliers and slip the arms back onto the Wiper Arm sockets.
5. Position each wiper blade at the bottom (stored position) and tighten each pair of 10 mm nuts on each Wiper Arm. (this is an adjustment if after testing the Wipers you find they Swing too far off the windshield or do not return to their proper resting position).
6. Connect the two remaining Wiper Motor Electrical Connectors.
7. Test the Windshield Wipers for total Swing (a wet windshield will make a difference) and adjust as cited in step #5 above.
8. Snap the small Windshield Wiper Grille back in place.

Front and Back of Windshield Wiper Motor, Wiper Motor Arm, 13 mm Wiper Motor Shaft nut
https://cimg4.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...09734b7d5e.jpghttps://cimg5.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...bf29768b14.jpg

Windshield Wiper Grille........................................ .....Magnetic Pick Up Tool just in case you drop anything ;)
https://cimg7.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...8709b2f633.jpghttps://cimg8.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...379a39e393.jpg

Notes:
1. You want to remove the wiper motor if you are removing the engine to gain adequate clearance between the drivers side Cam Cover and Firewall.

Last UPDATE of post 50 Dec, 2017

Dynomite 08-13-2012 11:51 PM

CMHSL LED, Full Power Key and Alternator Pulley
 
1. CMHSL LED install on my ZR-1

Ecklers has the chrome billet louvers and they are not cheap...but then again...they are billet 3D and very very nice.

https://cimg0.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...f28419605b.jpghttps://cimg2.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...c1bf196c76.jpg

Ecklers has the LED tail light kit (48 LED per light)
I assume you have the 48 LED per tail light?

CorvetteHID has both the LED tail light kit (30 LED per light) as well as the CHMSL LED (3 LED per bulb). CorvetteHID will send a (6 LED per bulb) CHMSL kit as long as supplies last even if you buy the 3 LED bulb CHMSL kit shown on their web site. CorvetteHID suggests 30 LED tail lights are as bright as 48 LED tail lights which I am not sure.

https://cimg3.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...c189a5d91f.jpg

2. Full Power Key Reconditon


Originally Posted by Kevin (Post 119818)
Recently I had an issue with my power key not staying on all the time (thread can be found here ) and seeing as there was no good how to on how to fix this I decided to make one. I didn't bother taking pictures of most of these steps because they are pretty straight forward. All steps are given from sitting in the drivers seat.

Step one: disconnect the battery...if you need pictures here you're probably better off not tackling the rest of this yourself

step two: start to remove gear shift trim piece to gain access to the bolts at the bottom of the radio surround. This is quite easy. Lift up the arm rest and remove the two bolts covered by fabric at the front of arm rest storage area. 8mm and 7mm bolts I believe they are. then remove the bolt in the cupholder/ashtray area to the right of the gear shift in the front cup holder. I believe this in an 8mm bolt. Carefully lift this piece up and disconnect the interior hatch release, it's just two connects that slide off, and the cigar lighter which is also two clips then rotate this piece out of the way...no pictures here because....well I forgot

step three: remove the radio/ac trim piece and the center vent. the radio/ac peice is held on by three bolts with two at the bottom and one at the top right. The ac vent is held on by two torx screws.

Step four, remove the vent and place aside.

step five: remove the radio/ac/power key surround and disconnect the power key. this is attached by a black piece with three holes in it which serves as a guide and power supply to the key. Take this to a work bench or other location to work on it....I used the kitchen table...don't tell my wife.

The car should look like this now
http://www.zr1.net/forum/picture.php...pictureid=3258

step six: removal of the key cylinder. You should now be looking at this:
http://www.zr1.net/forum/picture.php...pictureid=3259

This is the only part that gave me trouble because I was afraid of breaking the surrounding plastic and being out of pocket to try and find a new one. There is a black metal ring that holds the key cylinder in place under tension pictured below and can be seen above in the second picture if you look closely. I used a set of channel locks to remove the ring and the cylinder came out of the trim piece.
Ring:

http://www.zr1.net/forum/picture.php...pictureid=3263

Step seven disassembly: You will now have the cylinder and the switch in your hand. I forgot to take a picture of this assembled. Sorry, about that. Here's where you may want to take a sharpie and make a mark on the metal and the white part of the assembly as a reference point. It will save you a few minutes later in the process, I used a sharpie but use whats handy. Now you will want to get a small flat head screwdriver or other such tool and work these two little clips out. These clips can be seen in the first picture posted in this thread.

http://www.zr1.net/forum/picture.php...pictureid=3260

once you do the top part will slide out...either easily on its own or after you work at it with the screw driver to get it out. Either way you're going to end up with this.

http://www.zr1.net/forum/picture.php...pictureid=3262

Once you get that part out turn it so that the open side is facing you and look for the side with two very small disks on it. It can....kinda...be seen on the top right of this picture....I need to remember my blackberry isn't a dslr when doing this...

http://www.zr1.net/forum/picture.php...pictureid=3261

You want to crimp the two disks so that they are close together and make a good connection. How close you ask? I don't know. I guessed and then checked with an ohm meeter.

Reassemble is just the reverse of this process. I used dielectric grease to make reassembly of the contacts into the cylinder easier this is your choice. The one thing you want to check before you reinstall the black ring is that the key is positioned properly inside the trim piece. Cycle the key and make sure it stops at "normal" and "full" and rotate the key until it does. Very easy, of course I had help from an expert so I wasn't as terrified as I would have been otherwise. Thanks for the help, you know who you are. The whole thing is very painless and quite easy. I hope you found this as helpful as I found it enjoyable to write. If you are unclear on any steps please ask about them and I'll try and give more info as best I can.

Total time including fighting with the ring, fishing my fat *** in and out of the car to get tools, and some interior cleaning/change removal, ~2hrs.

Pro-tip, take the roof off. you don't feel so fenced in then

Great work Kevin :thumbs:

Kevin......I have used your write up to rebuild three 1990 Power Keys so far and they ALL function perfectly.....You DA MAN :thumbs:

Especially the use of Channel Locks to remove the locking ring :thumbsup:

Using needle nose pliers I bent the "blades" shown in red to their new position shown in yellow (the bending taking place at point A and point B). This allows the cam of the switch to fully contact the yellow "blades" while fully closing the silver contacts located in the top right corner of the photo of the Full Power Switch.

The original position of the "blades" shown in red actually did not stay in contact with the cam requiring jiggling the switch back and forth until contact was made of the cam with the "blades". Then vibration would break that contact and you have a non working Power Switch or intermittent working Power Switch in which the silver contacts on the top right would not stay fully closed. You could feel that the Power Key was loose with no resistance in the Full Power Mode indicating there was no contact with the "blades".

I used a bit of white grease on the cam and cam pin.

http://www.zr1.net/forum/picture.php...pictureid=3264

I think this applies to a 1990 ZR-1 only.......


3. Calculating Alternator Pulley Diameter for various current loads related to engine rpm.

We first calculate diameter of belt surface on Harmonic Balancer to convert rpm to surpentine belt speed?

The Harmonic Balancer diameter is 7-1/8 inch to outer lip (90' ZR1). The surpentine belt riding surface is about 1/8 in less radius so surpentine belt riding surface diameter would be 6-7/8 inches (6.875 inches).

If the alternator puts out 150 amp max and 120 amp at idle....the question is at what rpms is alternator spinning when the engine is idling at 850 rpm with a surpentine belt speed of 18,349 inches per minute. (6.875 inches x 3.14) in per rev x 850 rpm = 18,349 inches per minute.

My alternator pully is about 68mm (2.7 inches) diameter (I just bought two new alternator pulleys recently).

https://cimg5.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...5210a46d63.jpg

At a Surpentine Belt speed (idle) of 18,349 inches per minute, that alternator would be spinning at (18,349 inches per minute)/(2.7 inches x3.14) = 2,164 rpm (alternator spin rate) at idle (engine idle speed 850 rpm).

Or...just divide the Harmonic Balancer Diameter by the Alternator Pulley Diameter and multiply by engine idle speed to get Alternator Idle speed.

So the question might be at what Alternator idle speed the alternator still puts out the current needed to keep up with ZR1 current usage at idle (assuming you are not sitting there with head lights on at idle). Size that alternator pulley accoringly and then see what the maximum alternator rpm might be at 7,000 rpm engine speed (making sure you are not overspinning the alternator). If you are overspinning the alternator and do that often, get a larger alternator pulley and suffer the consequences when sitting at a stop light with lights on loosing battery charge as your alternator cannot keep up with current load.

After figuring out the alternator pulley size required, get a surpentine belt length accordingly.

4. Perfect Size identical to Stock Billet Aluminum Alternator Pulley.

See Also a Perfect Size identical to Stock Billet Aluminum Alternator Pulley All Aluminum Alternator Pulley

https://cimg0.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...03ddde9fdd.jpg

Last UPDATE of post 51 Aug, 2019

Dynomite 08-13-2012 11:51 PM

Starter, Starter Relay, Wiring Harness, Battery, and Plugs Tricks
 
Starter, Starter Relay, Wiring Harness, Battery, and Plugs Tricks

1. Starter Contacts.

I had a NO START condition on a 90' and after I towed it for a start....got home and it fired right up. I would have liked to hot wire the starter (purple wire) when that happens to see if it is the starter or starter ground circuit. Or check that purple wire for 12 volts when I turn the switch to start. I lean toward ground circuit or sticky starter solenoid. Another indication would be if when you turn the ignition key to start do the lights dim for example indicating a current draw to the starter solenoid/starter.

If the solenoid does not move (no clicking indicating the Starter Solenoid moved) as in my case then a sticky Solenoid or Solenoid Ground Connection. If the Solenoid clicked/moved...then bad Solenoid contacts or bad connection Battery cable (Positive) to starter/battery or bad ground (Negative) engine to battery. The moving Solenoid contacts can be easily wire brushed and the fixed contacts can be easily shined up with emery cloth.

The Starter Solenoid is shown in the left photo with slight burnt contacts in right photo.
https://cimg1.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...5c5b00e0f3.jpghttps://cimg2.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...0edc6d6515.jpg

The Solenoid contacts in left photo were wire brushed clean in right photo.
Also use a bit of emery cloth on the two fixed contacts.

https://cimg4.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...e33847e510.jpghttps://cimg5.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...10cdaa0afb.jpg

Photo provided by mgbrv8 Complete starter rebuild by mgbrv8 (Dave)

Check the two bearings on each end of the Armature for roughness by spinning with your fingers. If any roughness, replace with new bearings (pulling the bearings with a small bearing puller).

https://cimg7.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...9f2fd28c97.jpg

2. Starter Relay Tricks.

See Item #2 Electrical Ground Connections and Installing Starter Relay

60 / 80 AMP RELAY SPDT SINGLE POLE DOUBLE THROW NEW 654
Installed under ECM and in slot between brake booster and fire wall (perfect place for location of Relay).

Wiring modified a bit to assure Pin #87a is not hot at any time.
Pin #30: Purple wire to starter (use 3/8 inch connector on relay).
Pin #87: Red wire battery positive 12v use 3/8 inch connector on relay
(Same gauge wire as purple wire connected to battery positive multiple connection post).
Pin #86: Battery ground (1/4 inch connector on relay connected to ground where battery 12 gauge wire grounded).
Pin #85: Purple wire from clutch switch in wire bundle under ECM use 1/4 inch connector on relay (Red wire on early 1990 ZR-1).
Pin #87a: Not hot at any time and not used.
https://cimg8.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...750e50d0c9.jpghttps://cimg9.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...818c7bffaa.jpg

Insert a short 1/2 inch long section of plastic hose
over the center connector on the Relay which is NOT
used in this application.

https://cimg1.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...6a5fbb6e0a.jpg


Originally Posted by tccrab (Post 98493)
SPDT Relay : (Single Pole Double Throw Relay) an electromagnetic switch, consist of a coil (terminals 85 & 86), 1 common terminal (30), 1 normally closed terminal (87a), and one normally open terminal (87) (Figure 1).
Pin #87: Purple wire to the starter
Pin #30: Battery positive 12v
Pin #86: Battery ground
Pin #85: Purple wire from clutch switch in wire bundle under ECM
Pin #87a: Not used
The purple wire lives in the big loom just under the ECM. Peel back the ribbed covering and dig around. There is only one purple wire.
Cut the purple wire carefully noting which end leads down to the starter and which end comes from the Clutch Switch out of the wire bundle under the ECM.
Use similar sized wire (10 or 12 gauge if I recall correctly).
Black wire doesn't stand out like bright red or yellow.

TomC
'Crabs

3. Primary Front Wire Harness Relocated Tricks.
The Drivers side wire harness to the front (lights, fans, etc.) has been relocated UNDER the Drivers Side A Arm cleaning up that area near the Oil Catch Can.
a. Jack Drivers side such that front wheel is off ground (free spinning) and remove disconnect upper "A" Arm.
b. Slide large wire harness below "A" Arm sitting directly on frame rail and reconnect "A" Arm.
c. I disconnected wire going to front wheel from small frame bracket and used that bracket to attach the larger wire harness under the "A" Arm.

Passenger Side HVAC Wire Harness...............................Drivers Side Wire Harnes to Radiator Fans
https://cimg4.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...484c75e386.jpghttps://cimg5.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...c41efb4bf1.jpg

4. Battery Disconnect for Storage.

I am the only one that disconnects the battery negative cable ;)
Just like ALL the batteries on the Walmart shelf :thumbs:

I used to use battery tenders (many of them) on tractors, ATVs, trucks, cars and had electrical extension cords running all over in the shed. I figured there was more chance of fire than damage from a sulfated/dead battery.

I finally got rid of all electrical extension cords and just disconnected the battery negative terminals. I have found that over winter storage (including the Z) and even compared to a week of leaving the battery connected there is a BIG difference in battery condition (with disconnected negative battery cable) with all batteries now fully charged condition all the time with the Disconnect Switch (I make sure the battery is FULLY CHARGED before disconnecting the battery negative cable) :thumbs:

From experience I get normal battery life using the battery negative cable disconnect method with no issues (not even an issue of wearing out the battery side connect stud on the Z) :D

Even after several months of battery disconnect I can reconnect the battery and the Z (as well as all other tractors, ATV, trucks, cars) start normally. And....I have NO battery cable connection corrosion and have possibly reduced corrosion of ALL ground connections on frame and engine block.

The Battery Disconnect Switch TIPS

https://cimg6.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...f05d564abe.jpghttps://cimg7.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...5ab9c31138.jpg

5. Spark Plugs Tricks.

For my 91' NGK Iridium BKR5EIX Eagle
Gapped .043".

I will use anti-sieze on stainless steel bolts, spark plugs, and header bolts (Permatex Anti-Sieze 133A).

https://cimg9.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...dbf1ae8d75.jpghttps://cimg1.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...3fbf84d548.jpg


Last UPDATE of post 52 Dec, 2017

Dynomite 08-13-2012 11:52 PM

Electrical Grounds and Installing Starter Relay
 
Electrical Grounds and Installing Starter Relay

1. Electrical Ground Connections.
There are two engine block ground connections (multiple grounds each) located just above the Bell Housing (rear of engine block) one on each side of the engine. There are several ground connections on the chassis near the battery frame rail and other ground connections near chassis components. There is also an engine to chassis ground strap from drivers side of engine block (on side rear of engine block) to drivers side frame rail. The main Battery negative cable attaches to the side of the engine block just in front of the Bell Housing (primarily for the starter ground).

Check for ground continuity of any suspect component using an ohm meter. With one probe on the negative battery terminal and the other probe on the negative terminal of the suspect component you should get zero ohms with ignition key off as most components are not grounded through any switch.

Loosening those two engine block connections will not be easy as I mistakenly left the HVAC fan ground disconnected when installing the engine last time from the passenger side engine ground connection. I tried to get at the passenger side block ground connection from underneath (It could be very difficult) and I have Headers which makes the underneath approach considerably different.

I decided to connect that HVAC fan ground to the rear most Plenum bolt instead which works perfectly as it helps keep that passenger side wire harness in place.

Disconnect ground wires, clean surfaces, clean grounding bolts or screws, use star washers if applicable.

As an aside.....and I am prolly the only one on this Forum......I do NOT use trickle chargers but rather disconnect negative battery connection if ZR-1, Toyota Truck, JD Tractor sits for a period of time without starting. When I reconnect the negative battery connection (even when sitting disconnected over winter) the ZR-1, Toyota Truck, JD Tractor fires right up. I do not have power leaking through all the ground connections or trickle chargers powered up with wires strung all over. Disconnecting a trickle charger takes longer than just reconnecting the negative battery connection.

In one of the photos below there is a Green Ground Wire to Chassis.
that Green Wire is the New Starter Relay Ground Wire
Starter Relay, Wiring Harness, Battery, and Plugs Tricks

Ground Connection from Bat and Engine to Chassis .............................Ground Strap Connection to Engine
(green wire is NEW starter Relay ground)


https://cimg2.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...2217b4731e.jpghttps://cimg3.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...e2373a84b0.jpg

Ground Connections Bolt to Engine Pass Side....................Ground Connections Bolt to Engine Drivers Side
https://cimg7.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...7aa30f84a2.jpghttps://cimg2.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...b1529fc17c.jpg

Torx #30 to remove Drivers side Batt Panel....................5/16 inch Flex Ratchet to remove Negative Batt Terminal
SS Allen Head Bat Hold Down bolt shown..........................I remove if ZR-1 left sitting for more than two days
https://cimg4.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...e540f8d3a8.jpghttps://cimg6.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...2dfff9973f.jpg

2. Starter Relay Installation.

Marc Haibeck describes the electrical schematics and further identifies that "in ’93 GM improved the starter solenoid circuit wiring. The clutch switch connections were moved to the armature side of the start relay. This reduces the load on the clutch switch from 30 amps to .2 amp. It also eliminates the approximately .050 volt normal voltage drop across the clutch switch and its wiring at 30 amps". See Starting Issues by Marc Haibeck

Look at this on eBay:
60 / 80 AMP RELAY SPDT SINGLE POLE DOUBLE THROW NEW 654

I have had several types of No Starts in 1991s and 1990s and the Starter Relay in conjunction with Starter Solenoid Restoration cured them all.

Keep in mind the starter Solenoid wiring in this very early 1990 is 12 gauge red (NOT PURPLE) which is rare.

I will start here but keep in mind these posts will be deleted in a day as I do not want to Hijack this thread with a No Start Relay Detailed Installation Discussion.

Remove ECM Top Cover and two 10 mm Nuts holding ECM in place.
Remove three Torx T-30 Fender Bolts holding the side cover in place.

https://cimg9.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...c1816ae256.jpghttps://cimg0.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...739fdf2ff7.jpg

Remove Top 10 mm Bolt holding Side Cover in place.
Loosen (do not remove) lower 10 mm bolt in the slot provided.

https://cimg2.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...dd7ba5d189.jpghttps://cimg3.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...ca2305bcbd.jpg

The side cover will slide out as the lower bolt pad is slotted.
https://cimg5.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...1599f2a0c6.jpg

Remove the battery Hold Down Bolt (I modified that bolt with an 8 mm Allen Head Stainless Steel bolt).
https://cimg6.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...53e194a7a4.jpghttps://cimg7.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...da88a94087.jpg

Remove Battery Connections using 5/16 Flex Ratched Wrench. Remove two 10 mm bolts from Battery Platform.

https://cimg8.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...7aa3c280da.jpghttps://cimg0.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...96352943e7.jpg

Remove cable tie which is inserted in hole in plate securing bottom of Battery Platform.
Remove two lower 10 mm screws holding Battery Platform.

https://cimg1.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...d2dc6e4797.jpghttps://cimg4.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...8d372324f6.jpg

Remove second 10 mm screw using open end 10 mm wrench. Remove Battery Platform.

https://cimg5.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...c596f41412.jpghttps://cimg7.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...df86417ef2.jpg

Use 12 gauge wire and 12 gauge 3/8 inch female and 1/4 inch female Connectors which connect to the Relay.
Use 1/4 inch Connectors for Battery and Ground Connections. All 12 gauge Connectors.

https://cimg2.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...62deae1661.jpghttps://cimg6.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...0a965317a8.jpg

Insert a short 1/2 inch long section of plastic hose
over the center connector (87a) on the Relay which is NOT
used in this application.

https://cimg7.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...5985d3cfc0.jpg

The ground wire for the relay will be attached to the frame rail just behind the battery
(behind the INFL REST Sensor) in the same location as the Battery 12 gauge Ground wire.
Make two 24 inch 12 gauge wires with the 1/4 inch bolt connection on one end.
One wire will have the 3/8 inch 12 gauge female connector on the other end and
one wire will have the 1/4 inch 12 gauge female connector on the other end.

Use a couple cable ties to secure the two 24 inch 12 gauge wires away from the battery
but secured to existing cables. Paint with Black Rustoleum over the frame rail ground connection
to provide a moister barrier.

https://cimg8.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...4c268421d6.jpghttps://cimg9.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...b2a5054504.jpg

Locate the 12 gauge purple wire (red 12 gauge wire in my case of the Early 1990 ZR-1) and
cut the wire such that the end leading to the starter Solenoid sticks our far enough that
it can be connected directly to the Relay. Solder a 4 inch 12 gauge wire extension to the 12 gauge
purple wire coming from the Clutch Switch making it long enough to reach the Relay being installed.
Install a 3/8 inch 12 gauge Female Connector on the wire leading to the starter Solenoid.
Install a 1/4 inch 12 gauge Female Connector on the wire coming from the Clutch Switch Installed
on the end of the 4 inch wire added as an extension.

The Hot wire is attached to the Junction Block with a 12 gauge 1/4 inch connector
(one of the 24 inch wires made up with a 3/8 inch 12 gauge female Connector) and
secured to the top of the Junction Block as shown with a 10 mm nut).
The other 24 inch wire made up with a 1/4 inch 12 gauge Female Connector is secured
with a bolt to the same location as the battery 12 gauge ground wire (bolted to the frame rail
just behind the INFL REST Sensor).

https://cimg0.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...8978bd9ab3.jpghttps://cimg1.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...c45d02ad3e.jpg

We now have four 12 gauge wires (two with 3/8 inch 12 gauge Female Connectors and two with 1/4 inch
12 gauge Female Connectors shown.

The 12 gauge wire with 3/8 inch 12 gauge Female Connector going to Starter Solenoid
connects to post #30 of the Relay. The other 12 gauge wire with 3/8 inch 12 gauge
Female Connector connects to Post #87 of the Relay (this is always HOT when the key is on).

The 12 gauge wire with 1/4 inch 12 gauge Female Connector coming from the Clutch Switch
connects to either of the two smaller connections on the Relay. The second 12 gauge wire
with 1/4 inch 12 gauge Female Connector (one of the 24 inch wires) which is connected to ground
connects to the other of the two smaller connections on the Relay.
Make sure the clear plastic hose section is secure on the middle post (#87a) of the relay as an insulator.
This post is not hot at any time if wired correctly.

https://cimg2.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...d04f365b1d.jpghttps://cimg3.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...517ced09f7.jpg

Tape the Relay and connectors secure with black electrical tape and tuck away down and under
(between large wire cluster and fire wall) under the ECM. The Main Junction Block is shown
located between the Battery and Fire Wall.

https://cimg4.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...4680424d9d.jpghttps://cimg5.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...f6b849b2b0.jpg
https://cimg7.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...83b585a146.jpghttps://cimg9.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...d498a9ac42.jpg

Summary of Starter Relay Installation on a 1990 and 1991 ZR-1

On the Early 1990s the wire to cut is RED (there is no 12 gauge purple wire)

Starter Relay, Wiring Harness, and Plugs Tricks

I locate the Relay UNDER the ECM which is right next to the wire harness/wire to be cut.

60 / 80 AMP RELAY SPDT SINGLE POLE DOUBLE THROW NEW 654
Installed under ECM and in slot between brake booster and fire wall (perfect place for location of Relay).

Wiring modified a bit to assure Pin #87a is not hot at any time.
Pin #30: Purple wire to starter (use 3/8 inch connector on relay).
Pin #87: Red wire battery positive 12v use 3/8 inch connector on relay (connected to battery positive multiple connection post).
Pin #86: Battery ground (1/4 inch connector on relay connected to ground where battery 12 gauge wire grounded).
Pin #85: Purple wire from Clutch Switch in wire bundle under the ECM use 1/4 inch connector on relay (Red wire on early 1990 ZR-1).
Pin #87a: Not hot at any time and not used.

https://cimg0.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...b835ce8e27.jpghttps://cimg1.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...d53337100f.jpg

3. Start Switch on 1990 (L98).

On my 90' (6 speed transmission) the clutch start switch linkage tab wore so I could not depress the clutch far enough to activate the starter selenoid. I finally (today) took a torch to it :D

I removed the clutch start switch just North of the steering wheel in line with the clutch pedal (corvette facing east). I also removed the linkage (about 2 inches long).

I heated the switch end of the linkage with a torch and straigtened out the first L (there are two Ls on that end). I then heated cherry red the linkage end again and created a new L making the straight part of the linkage effectively 1/8 inch shorter. Then reinstalled the clutch start switch and linkage.

Works great as I can now start the engine with the clutch depressed about 1/2 the way to the floor board.

Last UPDATE of post 53 Dec, 2017

Dynomite 08-13-2012 11:52 PM

Ignition Key Codes and Clearing INFL REST Codes
 
Ignition Key Codes and Clearing 1990 INFL REST Codes

It appears if you have your own original key, you can for maybe a total under $30 buy a correct blank from MidAmerica (or Ebay) and go to WalMart and get that blank key cut as a spare key.

So....where can I get key blanks for $25?

MidAmerica http://www.mamotorworks.com/corvette?frame=1.1033

1. Key Codes.

Ohms-----------------------------------------------VATS Key Code #

402 ohms pellet----(acceptable range 386-438 ohms)----------1
523 ohms pellet----(acceptable range 520-564 ohms)----------2
681 ohms pellet----(acceptable range 650-728 ohms)----------3
887 ohms pellet----(acceptable range 850-942 ohms)----------4
1130 ohms pellet---(acceptable range 1085-1195 ohms)--------5
1470 ohms pellet---(acceptable range 1411-1549 ohms)--------6
1870 ohms pellet---(acceptable range 1795-1965 ohms)--------7
2370 ohms pellet---(acceptable range 2275-2485 ohms)--------8
3010 ohms pellet---(acceptable range 2890-3150 ohms)--------9
3740 ohms pellet---(acceptable range 3590-3910 ohms)--------10
4750 ohms pellet---(acceptable range 4560-4960 ohms)--------11
6040 ohms pellet---(acceptable range 5798-6302 ohms)--------12
7500 ohms pellet---(acceptable range 7200-7820 ohms)--------13
9530 ohms pellet---(acceptable range 9149-9931 ohms)--------14
11800 ohms pellet--(acceptable range 11328-12292 ohms)------15

2. Clearing 1990 INFL REST Codes.

For the 1991 through 1993 the Air Bag Sensors do not have to be grounded to work in a crash....they DO need to be attached to the Frame Rails however. The Grounding on the 1990 was set up to assure the sensors were attached to the Frame Rails. If the bolts were removed from the sensors the sensor would pass as air bag deployable but would not actually deploy the air bag for obvious reasons. This explains why I got NO INFL REST warning on the panel when I totally removed the 1991 Sensor from the Frame Rail in my test.

I am now thinking the Air Bag Sensors on the 1990 ZR-1 will function and Deploy the Air Bag even if not grounded. The 1990 Air Bag Sensors will only appear not grounded/not connected on the panel as INFL REST indicating/suggesting the Air Bag Sensors are not installed when in fact they ARE Installed. To get rid of that INFL REST Indication on the Panel (as well as the Red Seat Belt Indication) requires the Air Bag Sensors be Re-Grounded. I am not going to jar the Air Bag Sensor to see if the Air Bags Deploy to test that theory.

a. Make sure the ignition is off before you start.
b. Ground the ALDL Termal A to K. A is the grounding terminal BTW.
c. Turn the ignition on and wait for the INFL Rest light to start flashing (It should take about 5-7 Seconds).
d. When it starts flashing unplug the A-K for about 3 seconds then ground it again for an additional 3 seconds.
e. Remove and wait about ten seconds and ground it once more.
f. You should see a code 12 flashing 6 times indication the codes have been cleared and the DERM is operating normally (Dignostic Energy Reserve Module).
Note: The Fault Code Reader/Eraser described in the next post #55 can be used to Erase INFL REST Fault codes as described in steps a through f above by pushing a red button on the Fault Code Reader/Eraser. The SIR is NOT available using a Flash Code Reader on the 1994-1995 ZR-1s and The RED BUTTON is NOT used on the 1994-1995 ZR-1s.

https://cimg2.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...8e9f8d7759.jpghttps://cimg3.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...6d6fecb006.jpg

Do Both Drivers Side and Passenger Side Accelerometer Sensor for Infl Rest.

Yep.....I just did this successfully on two 1990 ZR-1s. I used two alligator clipped leads and grounded A to K. I tuned the key on and watched the Infl Rest light disconnecting the leads from each other when the Infl Rest blinked....then one thousand 1, one thousand 2, one thousand three connecting the leads grounding A to K one more time and counting one thousand 1, one thousand 2, one thousand 3 disconnecting the leads from each other.

I did this several times and finally found my panel clear of the Infl Rest light once and for all.

And....the Seat Belt red indicator light on the panel also disappeared :thumbs:

3. Remove, Clean Contacts, and Re-Install Accelerometer Sensor for Infl Rest Codes (1990 ZR-1 ONLY).
Remove both right and left sensors and re-ground both then spray paint over each sealing the moisture access to the grounding surfaces.

For the Drivers side 1990 Accelerometer Sensor for Infl Rest Code 16.
Remove side panel. Leave tire and wheel well in place.
Remove Battery.
Remove battery platform (4 bolts and allows access to frame/sensor).
Remove Sensor (one 10 mm bolt and one 13 mm bolt).
Use Emory Cloth and sand contact surfaces on Frame Rail and Sensor
or best......use 1/4 inch drill with small (1 inch or 2 inch wire wheel).
Replace sensor (10 mm and 13 mm Bolts).
Spray Paint with Black Rustoleum all around sensor and sensor Bolts.

For the Passenger side 1990 Accelerometer Sensor for Infl Rest Code 26.
Remove the side panel. Leave tire and wheel in place.
Remove wheel well (rear of front wheel.....all 10mm bolts (three on slider, one below slider, two lower middle, one under wheel well)
Remove Windshield Washer Bottle (three 10 mm bolts).
Remove Sensor (one 10 mm bolt and one 13 mm bolt).
Use Emory Cloth and sand contact surfaces on Frame Rail and Sensor.
or best......use 1/4 inch drill with small (1 inch or 2 inch wire wheel).
Replace sensor (10 mm and 13 mm Bolts).
Spray Paint with Black Rustoleum all around sensor and sensor Bolts.

4. Details on how to remove Drivers Side 1990 Accelerometer Sensor.

Remove three Torx T-30 Fender Bolts. .....................Remove Top 10 mm Bolt holding Side Cover in place.
https://cimg0.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...739fdf2ff7.jpghttps://cimg2.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...dd7ba5d189.jpg

Loosen (do not remove) lower 10 mm bolt in the slot. ..The side cover will slide out of slotted bolt pad.
https://cimg3.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...ca2305bcbd.jpghttps://cimg5.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...1599f2a0c6.jpg

Remove the battery Hold Down Bolt (I modified that bolt with an 8 mm Allen Head Stainless Steel bolt).
https://cimg6.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...53e194a7a4.jpghttps://cimg8.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...d0b5aeceb1.jpg

Remove Battery Connections using 5/16 Flex Ratched Wrench. Remove two 10 mm bolts from Battery Platform.

https://cimg9.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...7a8ad385b4.jpghttps://cimg0.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...b9c0de6b48.jpg

Remove cable tie which is inserted in hole in plate securing bottom of Battery Platform.
Remove two lower 10 mm screws holding Battery Platform.

https://cimg1.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...6bf90fd976.jpghttps://cimg5.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...2ca66bc651.jpg

Remove second 10 mm screw using open end 10 mm wrench. Remove Battery Platform.

https://cimg6.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...3dcbf7c883.jpghttps://cimg7.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...11dea35834.jpg

The INFL REST Drivers Side Sensor can be seen as it looks re-installed bottom of photo with 13mm bolt next to loose Lock Washer.

Temporarily remove the top assembly with the tip up red nozzle from a can of WD-40. Remove the white top spray nozzle from the top of a can of Black Rustoleum. Place the WD-40 top on the can of Black Rustoleum (it snaps perfectly in place identical to the top of a can of WD-40). Spray Black Rustoleum in those tight areas around the Sensor (Infl Rest Accelerometer) sealing the sensor contact areas in contact with the frame rail.
https://cimg8.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...18ef4909ec.jpghttps://cimg9.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...cff088f26f.jpg
https://cimg2.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...7e9935e19f.jpghttps://cimg3.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...3b7e2658fc.jpg

5. Clearing SIR Codes using the ALDL.
Ground K to A (I actually grounded K to the Seat Frame).
Turn on key to ACC
Wait for Infl Rest to flash and remove ground for 3 seconds. (I actually waited for the Code 26 (or code 16) to start flashing).
Re-apply ground for 3 seconds.
After removing ground wait 10 seconds.
Turn key off and remove ground to K.
Note: The Fault Code Reader/Eraser described in the next post #55 can be used to Erase INFL REST Fault codes as described in Item #2 steps a through f above by pushing a red button on the Fault Code Reader/Eraser. The SIR is NOT available on the 1994-1995 ZR-1s and the Red Button is NOT used on the ALDL Code Reader when using the Adapter for the 1994-1995 ZR-1.

6. If Codes 16 and 26 cannot be cleared on the 1990 ZR-1.....check the yellow Crash Sensor Connectors INSIDE the car.
AFTER Re-grounding the INFL REST Crash Sensors on both Left and Right Frame Rails the Code 16 could not be cleared until the Crash Sensor Connector Inside the Car was Disconnected and Re-Connected.

The air bag wiring is connected with a three pin yellow round connector (One on Drivers Side and One on Passenger Side). The Drivers Side is located just in front of Left Speaker at the same level as the top of the speaker. All you have to do is disconnect the Connector (round yellow plug type Connector with three pins inside) and reconnect the Connector. Code 16 goes away after resetting codes. The Yellow Plug Type Connector is about three inches long and 1/2 inch diameter. The same applies for Code 26 which yellow connector is on passenger side front floor carpet.

To Reset SIR Diagnostics Codes using ALDL connect A to K and turn key on. When you see INFL REST flash disconnect A to K for 3 seconds.....then reconnect A to K for 3 seconds then disconnect A to K.

Last UPDATE of post 54 Dec, 2017

Dynomite 08-13-2012 11:52 PM

ALDL Fault Code Reader/Eraser
 
ALDL Fault Code Reader/Eraser

The ALDL Fault Code Reader/Eraser Module can be plugged into the present ALDL Socket under the Drivers Side Panel. The ALDL Fault Code Reader/Eraser will ground the appropriate connectors of the ALDL when depressing and holding any of five Buttons depressed and turning the ignition key ON....(not all the way to START). The Fault Codes are flashed on the Panel just above the Bose Radio and the CCM Fault Codes flashed on the Speedometer Cluster. This ALDL Fault Code Reader/Eraser Module has a 12 Pin ALDL Connector which is compatible with 1990, 1991, 1992, and 1993 ZR-1s. An Adapter is available such that the 12 Pin ALDL Code Reader/Eraser can be used on the 94'-95' ZR-1.

https://cimg4.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...7c8e85fe52.jpg

To use.......connect the ALDL Fault Code Reader/Eraser to your ALDL Connector while sitting in the Drivers Seat (in front of your right knee) with Ignition OFF. Push/Hold Green, Yellow, Black, or White Button and then turn on Ignition (Do NOT start the engine). The Codes will Flash (Code 12 will flash for three times first followed by three flashes of each Fault Code) on the Panel just above the Bose Radio (ECM, SCR, ABS, SIR) and within the Speedometer cluster for the CCM.


Originally Posted by Franke (Post 179872)
From 1984 until the end of the 1993 model year a 12 pin ALDL was used. After that, a 16 pin ALDL connector was used. The 1994 and 1995 model year still used the OBD-I system even though they have 16 pin connectors. The 16 pin connector in the 1996 C4 is used for the much more complex OBD-II system and a scan tool is required to discover the OBD-II system's secrets.
The early ALDL connector has room for 12 pins however only 7 are populated and of those we are only interested in Pin "A" and "B" for this procedure
.

1. ZR-1 12 Pin ALDL.
The ZR-1 Assembly Line Diagnostic Link (ALDL) pins are configured like so:

https://cimg5.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...6ed3ed1bb4.jpg

Pins F, -, -, J, L, and M are removed from the ALDL Molded Connector attached to the ALDL Fault Code Reader/Eraser as they are NOT used in this Application.
A Photo of the Five ALDL Fault Code Reader/Eraser Buttons is shown just below the Modified ALDL Molded Connector.


https://cimg6.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...d7ffd9d47f.jpghttps://cimg7.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...b177431af2.jpg

2. ZR-1 16 Pin ALDL.

An Adapter that connects to the 16 Pin ALDL ZR-1 Connector found on the 94'-95' ZR-1 with 12 Pin Connector on the other end that is identical to the 12 Pin Connector located on the 90'-93' ZR-1 has been developed. There are NO CHANGES in the EXISTING 12 Pin ALDL Fault Code Reader/Eraser when using the Adapter described here. The Adapter you can make yourself as described here as you like.

An Adapter that connects to the 16 Pin ALDL ZR-1 Connector found on the 94'-95' ZR-1 with 12 Pin Connector on the other end that is identical to the 12 Pin Connector located on the 90'-93' ZR-1 has been developed. There are NO CHANGES in the EXISTING 12 Pin ALDL Fault Code Reader/Eraser when using the Adapter described here.

https://cimg1.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...ca185d3776.jpg

Existing ALDL Code Reader for 90'-93'.........................ALDL Code Reader used with Adapter for 94'-95'
https://cimg8.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...8a28612560.jpghttps://cimg9.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...6faa152913.jpg
https://cimg0.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...1c9f25c52c.jpghttps://cimg1.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...48a4010cb1.jpg

For the 16 Pin ALDL.......
Ground is Pin 4
Ground to Pin 6 is LTPWS/ECM
Ground to Pin 8 is PKE (Alarm System)
Ground to Pin 12 is CCM
Ground to Pin 3 is SRC
https://cimg2.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...0b2f6e0a28.jpg

The 16 Pin Adapter has Pins 1 - 8 on bottom row from left to right as shown and Pins 9-16 on top row as shown.

So....in the adapter if I Connect the 16 Pin end to the 12 Pin end as follows:
16 Pin (94'-95')......12 Pin (90'-93')
Connect Pin 4 to.... Pin A [[B]Black Wire]
Connect Pin 12 to.. Pin G (White Button) [[B]Blue Wire]
Connect Pin 8 to.... Pin H (Black Button) [[B]White Wire]
Connect Pin 3 to.... Pin C (Yellow Button) [[COLOR="Red"]Red Wire]
Connect Pin 6 to.... Pin B (Green Button) [[COLOR="Yellow"]Yellow Wire]

Rear view of 12 Pin ALDL Connector.
https://cimg5.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...da47af0780.jpg

Ebay Sources for 16 Pin OBD1 and 12 Pin OBD1 Connector
16 Pin OBD1 Connector
12Pin OBD1 Connector

We still have Pin K available (Red Button). So we could cover the CCM, PKE. SRC and ECM of the 94'-95' ZR-1 with the existing ALDL Code Reader as used on the 90'-93' ZR-1s using the Adapter.

3. ALDL Fault Code Reader/Eraser Buttons.
Green is ECM the one you are mostly interested in for Engine Issues.
Yellow SRC or Ride Control....FX3 shocks are Yellow.
Black is ABS....Wheels are Black.
CCM is White Elephant.....as the codes are read on the Speedo Cluster....
Red is SIR or INFL REST .......the HOT Button.....or the Button to check the Issues related to Safety (Not used on 94'-95').

A. ECM (SERVICE ENGINE SOON on Panel) Green Button.
B. SRC (SERVICE RIDE CONTROL on Panel) Yellow Button.
C. ABS (SERVICE ABS (PKE on 94'-95') on Panel) Black Button.
D. CCM (CCM Codes on Speedometer Cluster) White Button.
E. SIR (INFL REST on Panel) Red Button (Not used on 94'-95').

The ALDL Fault Code Flasher/Eraser Module has 5 colored mini switches (Push Buttons Close when depressed and held) mounted on a Billet Aluminum small block (5 inches x 1 inch x 3/4 inch) connected to an ALDL Connector (24 inch lead) that plugs into the ALDL under Drivers Side panel. All Buttons are Push and Hold completing the Grounding Circuit as long as the Button is Held.

4. ALDL Construction for ease of maintenance.
The Nut on each Button is to hold the Brass Washer in place. DO NOT tighten the nut more than finger tight. The purpose of the Nut is to also PULL the switch loose from the Aluminum Socket should it have to be removed. All switches and main line into the Aluminum Block are NOT GLUED for ease of maintenance such that the switches can easily be pulled from the Aluminum Block and the ground pin bent if the contacts have been moved in any way (The main line can be pushed into the Aluminum Block to provide slack for removal of the switches just in case a switch fails to ground the circuit provided).

There are 5 colored mini switches (Push Buttons) mounted on a Billet Aluminum small block connected to an ALDL Connector (24 inch lead) that plugs into the ALDL under Drivers Side panel. For the 94'-95 the Red Button is NOT used.

5. INFL REST appears on the Panel with engine running and does not go away.
A BIG thanks to Marc Haibeck for answering my questions regarding the SIR for 1990-1995 (The Red Button) :thumbs::thumbs:

This from Marc.......
For the 1991 through 1993 the SIR Air Bag Sensors do not have to be grounded to work in a crash....the Sensors DO need to be attached to the Frame Rails however. The Grounding requirement (Code 16 and Code 26) of the Air Bag Sensors on the 1990 was set up to assure the sensors were attached to the Frame Rails. If the bolts were removed from the sensors the sensor would pass as air bag deployable but would not actually deploy the air bag for obvious reasons. This explains why I got NO INFL REST warning on the panel when I totally removed the 1991 Sensor from the Frame Rail in my test.

I am now thinking the Air Bag Sensors on the 1990 ZR-1 will function and Deploy the Air Bag even if not grounded. The 1990 Air Bag Sensors will only appear not grounded/not connected on the panel as INFL REST indicating/suggesting the Air Bag Sensors are not installed when in fact they ARE Installed. To get rid of that INFL REST Indication on the Panel (as well as the Red Seat Belt Indication) requires the Air Bag Sensors be Re-Grounded. I am not going to jar the Air Bag Sensor to see if the Air Bags Deploy to test that theory.

If any of the listed faults 21 - 26 for the 1991-1993 were detected in a self test the INFL REST will appear on the panel.

21 Steering Column Resistance Too High
22 Steering Column Resistance Too Low]
23 Steering Column Circuit Voltage Too High
24 Steering Column Circuit Voltage Too Low
25 Short to Battery in Steering Column
26 Open in Steering Column

Now for the 1994-1995 since two air bags are used has different codes and there is NO diagnostic terminal as indicated.
The design requires a TECH 1 diagnostics because the data is sensitive as a result of Government Regulations. On the 1994-1995 ALDL Code Reader when used with Adapter I have noted SIR diagnostics is NOT used. All other Codes are readable using the 94'-95' Adapter with the ALDL Code Reader.

Marc Haibeck ALDL Connector Functional Description

To Read the Fault Codes while sitting in the Drivers Seat......just plug the ALDL Fault Code Flasher/Eraser into ALDL and push/Hold Green Button for ECM (Yellow Button for SRC, Black Button for ABS, White Button for CCM, Red Button for SIR then turn the ignition switch ON (Do NOT start the engine) and see the Fault Codes flash on the Panel above the Bose Radio.

6. Fault Codes are Flashed on Panel above Bose Radio (except for CCM Error Codes) for the 90'-93' and 94'-95'.
All Codes (ECM, SRC, ABS, SIR) will Flash in Yellow on the Panel (90'-93') above Bose Radio when either the Green Button, Yellow Button, Black Button, or Red Button are depressed (turn the ignition key ON but do NOT Start the Engine). The ECM, SRC, ABS Fault Codes Flash on the Panel in Yellow and the Flashes must be counted to determine the Fault after an initial Digit 12 (One Flash followed by Two Flashes) is flashed three times for the ECM, SRC and ABS. An Example is the SERVIDE ENGINE SOON light which is always on when you are checking ALDL Fault Codes.

The CCM Codes will show on the Speedometer Cluster when the White Button is depressed and ignition key turned ON.
A CCM Code C12 indicates No Fault Codes are present.

For the '90-'93
ECM........................................ .....................................SERVICE RIDE CONTROL
https://cimg2.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...60ac1658a9.jpghttps://cimg5.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...ff1a995ab1.jpg

SERVICE ABS ........................................ .....................................CCM Fault Codes
https://cimg7.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...110818ae5a.jpghttps://cimg8.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...5aa3dd1eed.jpg

INFL REST
https://cimg0.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...56269124eb.jpg

For the '94-'95 Using the adapter
LTPWS/ECM........................................ ............................SERVICE RIDE CONTROL
https://cimg3.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...d1fdb41250.jpghttps://cimg4.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...80ca0d3b38.jpg

SERVICE PKE ........................................ .....................................CCM Fault Codes
https://cimg5.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...f8c8b9d84e.jpghttps://cimg6.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...2973c00519.jpg

7. How To Erase ALDL Fault Codes.
To Erase Fault Codes....Depress/Hold the appropriate Diagnostic Button and turn the Ignition Key ON....(not all the way to START). Wait for the Diagnostic light to start flashing for the Button Depressed. Release the Button for 3 seconds and then Depress/Hold the Button for about 3 seconds and Release. Turn the Ignition Key OFF.

To check that Fault Codes are Erased Depress/Hold the appropriate Diagnostic Button and turn the Ignition Key to On (do NOT Start the engine). The Code 12 should appear continuously indicating ALL Fault Codes are cleared.

8. How To diagnose the ALDL Fault Code Reader/Eraser.
Using an Ohm Meter, connect red wire to Pin A and black wire to Pin B. Do you get Zero Ohms when pressing Green Button.
Using an Ohm Meter, connect red wire to Pin A and black wire to Pin C. Do you get Zero Ohms when pressing Yellow Button.
Using an Ohm Meter, connect red wire to Pin A and black wire to Pin K. Do you get Zero Ohms when pressing Red Button.
Using an Ohm Meter, connect red wire to Pin A and black wire to Pin H. Do you get Zero Ohms when pressing Black Button.
Using an Ohm Meter, connect red wire to Pin A and black wire to Pin G. Do you get Zero Ohms when pressing White Button.
If zero ohms as indicated above, the Code Reader is reading correctly.

https://cimg7.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...5729d9c43e.jpg

9. How To Obtain the ALDL Fault Code Reader/Eraser.
The ALDL Fault Code Reader/Eraser is $50 shipped anywhere in USA.
My PayPal is Dynomite07@prodigy.net

When you PayPal....let me know your Shipping Address and your Registry or CF ID in the PayPal Notes.

For those that are not regulars here....the ALDL Fault Code Reader/Eraser is also on CF ALDL Fault Code Reader/Eraser on CF.

See Last Post or close to Last Post for List of those Interested ALDL Fault Code Flasher/Eraser.

Those Interested (Reg and CF)
Paid-P, Shipped-S. Received-R
Kevin (PSR)
GOLDCYLON (PSR)
HAWAIIZR-1 (PSR)
93 Vette (PSR)
MysticZR-1 (PSR)
PhillipsLT5 (PSR)
diamond zr1 (PSR)
RussMcB (PSR)
G8nightman (PSR)
Scrrem (PSR)
Agpilot1 (PSR)
Andy (PSR)
Racinfan83 (PSR)
z proud (PSR)
Billy Mild (PSR)
LT5Vette (PSR)
FI250 (PSR)
BlackZR1 (PSR)
edram454 (PSR)
George Maz (PSR)
32valvesftw (PSR)
spork2367 (PSR)
txtode (PSR)
jmglyder (PSR)
Geezer (PSR)
jrd1990zr1 (PSR)
KFoster (PSR)
Halinmontana (PSR)
KGV (PSR)
IMZZ (PSR)
steve1263 (PSR)
MuRCieLaGo (PSR)
Intruder (PSR)
goriffle (PSR)
rush91(PSR)
Xdt (PSR)
Chedberg(PSR)
apbreg(PSR)
G-Sting (PSR)
Johnny5 (PSR)
garyhugo (PSR)
Dds1990 (PSR)
jcruz (PSR)
ZR71Blackbird (PSR)
max76 (PSR)
TX '90 ZR1 (PSR)
NJVII (PSR)
Dustin Koppit (PSR)
Marshall Neel (PSR)
mrimd (PSR)

Each ALDL Fault Code Reader/Eraser shipped will include ALL the information shown in the ALDL Fault Codes Thread.

Note: A Code 12 indicates No Fault Codes are present with the exception of the SIR.

SIR Code 13 will be displayed (In addition to Code 12) only if no history codes are in memory. To read history codes, a SCAN/TECH tool must be used. Read more: The Seat Belt Question

See Fault Codes and post any questions regarding any Fault Codes in the Fault Codes Thread as that is a great question regarding the SIR Codes.

Last UPDATE of post 55 Nov, 2020

Dynomite 08-13-2012 11:53 PM

ABS, Ride Control (SRC), CCM, SIR Code Definitions
 
1. ZR1 ABS Code - Definition

1990 Service Manual:

(* = Requires Tech 1 Daignostic Tool)

12 - Diagnostic System Operational

21 - RF Wheel Speed Sensor Fault
22 - RF Toothed Wheel Frequency Error
25 - LF Wheel Speed Sensor Fault
26 - LF Toothed Wheel Frequency Error

31 - RR Wheel Speed Sensor Fault
32 - RR Toothed Wheel Frequency Error
35 - LR Wheel Speed Sensor Fault
36 - LR Toothed Wheel Frequency Error

41* - RF Solenoid Valve Fault
45* - LF Solenoid Valve Fault
55* - Rear Solenoid Valve Fault

61* - Pump Motor or Motor Relay Fault
63* - Solenoid Valve Relay Fault
71 - EBCM Fault
72 - Serial Data Link Fault

75 - Lateral Accelerometer Fault (Short to B+ or Ground, or Open Circuit)

76 - Lateral Accelerometer Fault (Signal Out of Range or Incorrect)

Clearing Codes

The fault codes in the EBCM's memory are erased in one of three ways:

1. Diagnostic Enable Line Procedure
2. Tech 1 "Clear Codes" Selection
3. Igniton Cycle Default

Whichever method is used, be sure to verify proper system operation and absence of codes when clearing procedure is completed.

2. ZR1 Ride Control (SRC) Codes.
12 = Start of sequence
13 = Left rear time out
14 = Right Front time out
21 = Left Front time out
22 = Right Rear time out
31 = Left Front out of position
32 = Right Front out of position
33 = Left Rear out of position
34 = Right Rear out of position

Out of position codes are triggered if the computer senses that the actuator has not found the end stop position on the shock. Remove actuator at the indicated shock. Turn the valve gear on the shock stops after about 3 / 4 of turn, then you have a bad actuator. If it spins around continuously then it is a bad shock

41 = Selective ride control switch short to voltage
42 = Selective ride control switch open contacts
You can have a code 42 if you leave the switch in between indented positions
43 = selective ride control switch circuit open.

23 = If you start the car more than 3 times and do not move the car this code will set. Drive 3-6 feet and the light will go out.

The ride control controller is located in the bin behind the drivers seat mounted with the ABS controller.

3. ZR-1 CCM Codes
Code Definition
1.1 DISPLAY CCM fault codes
12 On-board diagnostics no codes (this is a good thing: no problem found)
13 DIC switches open or shorted to battery
14 DIC switches shorted to ground
16 Ignition 3 fuse circuit open
21 Horn relay coil shorted to battery or CCM internal open circuit
22 Rear defogger relay coil shorted to battery or CCM internal open circuit
24 Courtesy lamp relay coil shorted to battery or CCM internal open circuit
25 Courtesy lamp relay coil circuit open or shorted to ground
26 LCD blanking control circuit shorted to battery or CCM internal open
27 LCD blanking control circuit open or shorted to ground
31 LCD data circuit shorted to battery or CCM internal open
32 LCD data circuit open or shorted to ground
33 Data clock circuit shorted to battery or CCM internal open circuit
34 Data clock circuit open or shorted to ground
35 Data strobe circuit shorted to battery or CCM internal open circuit
36 Data strobe circuit open or shorted to ground
37 M clock circuit shorted to battery or CCM internal open circuit
38 M clock circuit open or shorted to ground
41 Loss of ECM serial data communications
51 Pass-key invalid key detection
52 Pass-key key detection circuit shorted
53 Pass-key – key detection circuit open or shorted to battery
54 FEDS fuel enable failure
61 Pass-key – key #1 programming resistance out of range
62 Pass-key – key #2 programming resistance out of range
63 Pass-key – key #2 programming resistance low
71 LCD dimming output circuit shorted to battery or CCM internal open circuit
72 LCD dimming output circuit open or shorted to ground
73 LED display dimming output circuit shorted to battery or CCM internal open circuit
74 LED display dimming output circuit open or shorted to ground

4. 1990 SIR Codes
For 90-93 Cars jumper A to K on the ALDL and the INFL REST light will flash

1990 SIR Codes
14 Front Sensor #1 (LH); Short to Ground
15 Front Sensor #1 (LH); Open Circuit
16 Front Sensor #1 (LH); Sensor Fault
24 Front Sensor #1 (RH); Short to Ground
25 Front Sensor #1 (RH); Open Circuit
26 Front Sensor #1 (RH); Sensor Fault
31 Inflator Squib; Current leakage to Battery
32 Inflator Squib; Current shorted to battery voltage
33 Inflator Squib; Current leakage to ground
34 Inflator Squib; Current shorted to ground
35 Inflator Squib; Open circuit
36 Inflator Squib; Squib fault
41 Indicator lamp circuit; Shorted to battery or ground
42 Indicator lamp circuit; Open circuit
51 Diagnostic unit faulty
52 Firing sequence confirmation set
53 Firing current confirmation set
54 Squib current has flowed

5. 91 & 92 & 93 SIR Codes
21 Steering Column Resistance Too High
22 Steering Column Resistance Too Low
23 Steering Column Circuit Voltage Too High
24 Steering Column Circuit Voltage Too Low
25 Short to Battery in Steering Column
26 Open in Steering Column Circuit
31 Open 36 VLR to Deployment Loop
32 Grounded 36 VLR to Deployment Loop
33 Diode B Shorted in Wiring Harness
34 Open in Ignition 1 Feed to Deployment Loop
35 Discriminating Sensor Open
41 Deployment Loop Energy Reserve Voltage Fault
42 Deployment Loop Energy Reserve Voltage Fault
51 Accident Detected
52 EEPROM Accident Data Area Full
61 Force Low or “INFL REST†Warning Lamp Circuit
71 Internal DERM Fault

6. 94 & 95 SIR Codes
For 94-95 Cars, jumper Terminal 4 to 12 on the ALDL and enter the CCM diagnostics, or use a Tech1

14 Dual Pole Arming Sensor Disconnected
15 Passenger Initiator Circuit Resistance High
16 Passenger Initiator Circuit Resistance Low
17 Passenger Initiator Circuit Open
18 Discriminating Sensor Interconnect Open
19 Passenger Initiator Circuit Voltage High
21 Driver Initiator Circuit Resistance High
22 Driver Initiator Circuit Resistance Low
23 Driver Initiator Circuit Voltage High
24 Driver Initiator Circuit Voltage Low
25 Initiator Circuit Short to Ignition
26 Driver Initiator Circuit Open
28 Current Sink or Source Failure
31 Driver Loop Energy Reserve Feed Open
34 Dual Pole Arming Sensor Ignition Feed Open
35 Discriminating Sensor Open or Missing
36 Passenger Loop Energy Feed Open
42 Loop Energy Reserve Volatage Low
43 Driver Source Feed Low
44 Passenger Source Feed Low
51 Frontal Crash Detected
52 Data Area Full
53 Driver Side Low High Resistance
54 Passenger Side Low High Resistance
55 DERM Incompatibility
61 SIR Indicator Circuit Failure
62 Redundant Indicator Circuit Failure
71 and or 75 Internal DERM Fault
81 Driver Ignition Diode Open
82 Passenger Ignition Diode Open
83 Driver Reserve Diode Shorted
84 Passenger Reserve Diode Shorted

Last UPDATE of post 56 Sep, 2015

Dynomite 08-13-2012 11:53 PM

ZR1 90'-95' ECM Interchangeability and CODES 90' TO 92'
 
1. ZR1 90'-95' ECM Interchangeability'


Originally Posted by Marc Haibeck (Post 156570)
I was wondering about ZR-1 ECM interchangeability. I did some testing and it appears that any model year ECM will work in any car. That is a 1990 ECM will work in a 1995 and a 1995 ECM will work in a 1990. The details of the testing are described below.

GM used three ECM part numbers across the six model years.
01228331 1990 to 1991.
16163993 1992 to about 1993 1/2.
16196394 about 1993 1/2 to 1995.

AC/Delco supplied the 16163993 as a remanufactured unit for repairs from about 2004 until about 2009. They shipped 16163993 regardless of what model year was ordered.

I removed a factory installed 1990 01228331 from a 1990 car. Then installed a 1995 BMCB calibration chip and installed the ECM on a 1995 car. Everything worked normally. The engine went into closed loop fuel control, it went into learning mode, the EGR worked normally, the ASR worked, the momentary contact full power key worked, and the engine data scanner displayed engine rpm with a resolution of 1 rpm. The ALDL data stream ran at 6.6 frames per second, just like a 1995 ECM.

I removed a factory installed 1995 16196394 ECM from a 1995 car. Then installed a 1990 AYBK calibration chip and installed the ECM on a 1990 car. Everything worked normally. The engine went into closed loop fuel control, it went into learning mode, the full power key worked. The engine data scanner displayed engine rpm with a resolution of 25 rpm. This is normal for a 1990 car. The ALDL data stream ran at 6.6 frames per second, just like a 1990 ECM.

A 16163993 ECM was tested in a 1995 car and it worked normally as a 1995 ECM would.

2. CODES 90' TO 92'.

Code #12: Normal No Codes.
Code #13: Left Oxygen Sensor Circuit.
Code #14: Coolant Temperature Sensor Circuit High.
Code #15: Coolant Temperature Sensor Circuit Low.
Code #16: Direct Ignition System (DIS) Fault Line Circuit
Code #21: Throttle Position Sensor Circuit High.
Code #22: Throttle Position Sensor Circuit Low.
Code #23: Manifold Air Temperature Sensor Circuit Low.
Code #24: Vehicle Speed Sensor Circuit.
Code #25: Manifold Air Temperature Sensor Circuit High.
Code #31: Camshaft Sensor Circuit.
Code #33: Manifold Absolute Pressure Sensor Circuit High - Low Vacuum.
Code #34: Manifold Absolute Pressure Sensor Circuit Low - High Vacuum.
Code #36: Direct Ignition System (DIS) Circuit (missing or extra EST signal)
Code #41: Cylinder Select Error (Faulty or Incorrect Mem-Cal)
Code #42: Electronic Spark Timing (EST) Circuit.
Code# 43: Electronic Spark Control (ESC) Circuit.
Code #44: Left Oxygen Sensor Circuit Lean.
Code #45: Left Oxygen Sensor Circuit Rich.
Code #46: Vehicle Anti-Theft System (VATS)(PASS-Key) Circuit.
Code #51: Mem-Cal Error.
Code #52: Engine Oil Temperature Sensor Circuit Low.
Code #53: System Voltage.
Code #54: Fuel Pump Circuit (Low Voltage)
Code #55: System Voltage
Code #56: Vacuum Sensor Circuit.
Code #61: Secondary Port Throttle Valve System.
Code #62: Engine Oil Temperature Sensor Circuit High.
Code #63: Right Oxygen Sensor Circuit Open.
Code #64: Right Oxygen Sensor Circuit Lean.
Code #65: Right Oxygen Sensor Circuit Rich


3. ECM Related Explanations.

31 LCD Data Circuit-Circuit shorted to battery voltage or CCM driver open
33 Data Clock Circuit-Circuit shorted to battery voltage or CCM driver open
35 Data Strobe Circuit-Circuit shorted to battery voltage or CCM driver open
37 M Clock Circuit-Circuit shorted to battery voltage or CCM driver open
72 LCD Dimming Open Circuit-Circuit open or shorted to ground (radio & Climate control)
H History code. May be intermittant.
Code 31, 33, 35 related to the circuit from the CCM to the Instrument panel LCD.
CCM 74 is also a lighting circuit problem.
CCM 41 is loss of communication with the ECM.

4. ECM Code #52 Engine Oil Temperature Sensor Circuit Low Explanation


Originally Posted by WVZR-1 (Post 1590339326)
Same sensor just different terminal. Terminal B DRK GRN/ORN to the ECM and terminal C DRK GRN/WHT to dash. Yours is a '90 I guess as the '91 is the same except that the wire changed to solid GRN (no stripe).

The Oil Temperature Sensor Terminal B or circuit B discontinuity would prevent Full Power operation it would appear.

"When the key is in “Full” power position, the ECM enables the secondary operation only if no trouble codes are stored and other criteria are met such as; engine oil temperature (not too hot or too cold)."

Basic Conditions that allow Secondaries to open:
"In order for the Secondary Port Throttle Valves (Secondaries) to open, the following parameters must be met:

Coolant Temperature 20 Deg C (68 Deg F) or above
Oil Temperature 20 Deg C (68 Deg F) or above See ECM Code #52 Item #3. ZR1 ECM CODES 1990 TO 1992
System Voltage 10 V. or above
Trouble Codes (SES Light) None
Power Key On"

https://cimg8.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...139c819ecb.jpg

Last UPDATE of post 57 Dec, 2017

Dynomite 08-13-2012 11:53 PM

Recharging the AC System
 
1. R12 compared to R134a.

Now since I have R12 Adapters and R12 I (and my EPA certified technician) are ready for 90' and 91' (LT5) and 90' Corvette (L98) if they ever need an AC boost for almost nothing additional over what I have for an older Toyota and GMC AC system.

R12 and E134a Connectors.
I know the Connector for R12 is different than the Connector for R134a.
On the Can end as well as on the AC end.

Freon R12 and R134a Adapters
https://cimg9.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...1d99f43c5a.jpg

R12 Engine End ........................................ ..........R12 Can End
https://cimg0.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...3d23075f06.jpghttps://cimg1.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...97732fbdac.jpg

R134A Engine End........................................ ........R134a Can End
https://cimg2.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...1172dc51ca.jpghttps://cimg3.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...75271ae9f1.jpg

Adapter Connections R134a to R12.................................R12 Can Connector and Gauge
https://cimg4.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...94872973d0.jpghttps://cimg8.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...4b65085905.jpg

2. Vacuuming an R12 System and installing a New Drier.

The technical information in this post is provided by VetteVet VetteVet How To Evacuate and Re-Charge A/C System on C4 ZR1.

I have a vacuum pump with an R12 fittings (actually two fittings) and a set of gauges (red and blue) with R12 adapters. I also have a new Accumulator/Drier (not installed yet as I assume I do not want to expose that to air). Have a few cans of R12 and a couple cans of R12 plus oil.

Vacuum the A/C System and check for leaks.
1. The A/C connector on the passenger side with black cap (just inside of shock) is High Side.
2. The A/C connector on the Accumulator/Drier is the Low Side.
3. Connect gauges to the Vacuum Pump (yellow line center of Manifold).
4. Connect Low Side (Blue Line) to Accumulator/Drier connection.
5. Connect High Side (Red Line) to High Side connection just inside passenger wheel well (lower line on Evaporator Housing).
6. Open both High Side and Low Side Manifold Valves and turn on Vacuum Pump for 60 minutes.
7. Shut Manifold Valves (then shut OFF Vacuum Pump) and make sure Vacuum does not leak down indicating a System Leak.
8. If NO LEAKS, Install New Accumulator/Drier and repeat this process.

A/C Connections for Vacuum and Leak Test System....Vacuum System Setup with Vacuum Pump Connected
https://cimg6.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...491051a02e.jpghttps://cimg0.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...ccecdbbc59.jpg

Stage Vacuum Pump........................................ ..........Manifold and Gauges
https://cimg9.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...85e37da0e9.jpghttps://cimg0.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...ccecdbbc59.jpg

ZR-1 R12 Freon Connector (Low Side)..........................Accumulator/Drier
https://cimg1.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...001768f7b6.jpghttps://cimg2.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...7d10fd67e2.jpg

3. Charge the A/C System.
1. With both Manifold Valves closed, hook up a can of R12 to the yellow middle hose (see Note #1 below).
2. Turn the can valve fully counterclockwise to open the valve.
3. With the can upright, crack the fitting on the yellow hose where it attaches to the gauge manifold to purge the air out of the hose, then retighten it.
4. You can now invert the can and crack the blue Low Side valve and charge until the pressure equalizes between the can and system (no more flow is felt or heard). Never open the Red High Side valve during the Freon Charging process.
5. Now start your car and set the climate control for Max cooling with blower on high. Ensure that the compressor clutch is engaged at this point (see Note #2 below). You can now charge the remainder of the first can with can in an upright position. Always charge with can upright when compressor is running.
6. Once the first can is in, (you'll know it's all in when you can shake the can and not feel any liquid sloshing in it) you can shut the low side valve and swap to the second can.
7. Remember to purge the yellow line again prior to charging.
8. Continue this until you have added the correct amount of Freon, per the FSM. Once the sytem is fully charged, shut off the compressor and allow High Side and Low Side pressures to equalize before disconnecting the gauge manifold from the system.
9. Once the manifold is disconnected, cap the high and low side fittings, reconnect the pressure cycling switch and you're done.

Notes:
1. Prior to connecting the valve to the freon can, unscrew the valve stem fully(you will see the needle in the valve retract up into the body). Then screw the valve onto the can. Now turn the valve fully clockwise to puncture the can.
2. If the compressor clutch is not engaged, you will have to pull the connector on the pressure cycling valve in the low side line and jumper it. The compressor clutch should now engage.
3. The better you vacuum the system, the better it will perform. You won't hurt the vacuum pump if you want to let it run for 5 hours.
4. Always purge the air from the charging(yellow) line when you connect a can of Freon.
5. When the compressor is running, always charge to the low(blue) side with can upright.
6. NEVER, EVER open the high side valve when the compressor is running. That flimsy Freon can will not contain the pressure(can you say SHRAPNEL!!!). I've never done it and don't want to try.
7. If you follow these Notes, no harm will be done.
Thank you VetteVet (Jep) for the "How To" including these Notes.

4. AC Cycling Switch.

Check your AC cycling switch. Disconnect the AC Cycling Switch connector and with engine running and AC on see if you have 12 volts to one side of the connector. Then measure the resistance between the two pins of the AC Cycling Switch. If there is NO resistance and you have 12 volts to one side of the connector your compressor clutch should engage.

If you do not have zero resistance between the two pins of the AC Cycling Switch you either have not enough Freon in your system or a bad AC cycling switch. I am thinking with 65 psi on the low side with engine off the AC Cycling Switch should be on (Connectors/points closed or zero resistance between Connectors/points).

I am thinking the cycling switch should turn off at 25 PSI (compressor clutch disengaged), and back on at 40 PSI (compressor clutch engaged) low side pressure. I am thinking greater than 400 psi on the high side will turn off the compressor (disengage compressor clutch).
See AC Normal Low and High Side Pressures TIPS

It is my understanding that moisture gets trapped in the oil (compressor lubrication) and you have to pull a significant vacuum to rid the oil of moisture. It is also my understanding that the Accumulator/drier should always be replaced if you open up the AC system to atmospheric pressure.

Make sure one Female Contact of the AC Cycling Switch Connector has 12 volts with Key On and Air On.
The AC Cycling Switch on the Low Pressure Side of the AC System is shown in the background in this photo. With engine running, the shorting across the connector should engage the AC clutch if the AC compressor is functional.


https://cimg9.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...f4b5fc8394.jpg

Last UPDATE of post 58 Dec, 2017

Dynomite 08-13-2012 11:53 PM

Crankshaft Sensor and Camshaft Sensor
 
1. Crankshaft Sensor Testing/Replacement by Alberta ZR1.

I figured I would do a quick write up on my recent no start concern with my 93. The engine would turn over but would not fire and it turned out to be the crankshaft sensor.

There were no codes during the final failure of this part and I was having the following symptoms prior to complete no start failure.
A.) The car had a hard time starting when it was hot
B.) The car quit for no reason when driving, but would re-fire after extended cranking
C.) The car finally quit and would not start again

If you run into a similar situation where the engine turns over, but does not fire, there are few things to consider before looking at the crankshaft sensor. However in my situation, when I was doing the preliminary checks, I determined that all my other systems were working correctly, and I simply had no spark.

Crankshaft Description (As noted in 1993 GM Service Manual)
The magnetic crank sensor is used to determine engine crankshaft position. The sensor is mounted inside the block near a nine slot wheel on the crankshaft. The rotation of the wheel creates a flux change in the sensor which produces a voltage signal. The ignition control module processes this signal and creates the reference pulse needed by the ECM to trigger the correct coil at the correct time.

Step1: Removed the crank sensor connector/harness from ignition control module and probed terminals A and C on the connector of the wiring harness with an ohm meter. You are looking for a reading of 800-1200ohms. I had an open circuit indication.
(Note: To access this sensor, you need to remove the MAP sensor and bracket as well as the PCV hoses from behind the intake.)

https://cimg0.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...e26108a6a2.jpg
https://cimg1.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...2456434772.jpg

Step2: The FSM says less than 800ohms means the sensor leads have shorted together or the sensor is faulty. If you have a reading greater than 1200ohms, there there is an open sensor circuit or faulty connection at the sensor, or faulty sensor.

Step3: Since the crankshaft sensor is so inconvenient to get to, I decided that I would purchase a new one to replace it with since I would be under the car anyways. I went to Napa and picked up the sensor (Part# CSS109)

https://cimg2.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...775b6a56e8.jpg

Step4: As soon as I attempted to remove the sensor, the head broke off leaving the rest of the sensor inside the engine block. I attempted to extract the remaining piece of sensor with epoxy and a bolt, a screw, and o-rings piks. The sensor would not move, so I ended up having to drop the oil pan and punch the sensor out from the inside.

Step5: After replacing the sensor and buttoning everything up, the car started and all systems checked out!

https://cimg4.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...e53cd64342.jpg

2. Camshaft Position Sensor Failure by Marc Haibeck.

"The Camshaft Position Sensor has a very low failure rate. I have replaced about three bad ones in 20 years. After a lot of exposure to heat it can leak oil due to a crack in the case. However, leaky ones continue to operate correctly.

The most common cause of a code 31 is a worn out battery not filtering electrical noise as it should. A defective crankshaft sensor can cause a false code 31. The ECM can fail and cause a false code 31.

The engine will start and run normally with the Camshaft Position Sensor disconnected. It is used for emissions purposes.

They are very hard to find. It's a simple Hall Effect sensor.

Marc"

P.S. Jagdpanzer on the ZR-1 Registry Forum has built a successful Replacement Camshaft Position Sensor Replacement Camshaft Position Sensor

Last UPDATE of post 59 Dec, 2017

Dynomite 08-13-2012 11:54 PM

Bose Speaker Amp Options
 
BOSE Speaker Amp Options for 1990 and 1991 ZR-1

Thanks Mike :thumbs:

Originally Posted by mike100 (Post 174398)
As requested, I put together some pictures and part numbers for 95-99 Nissan Maxima and Infiniti I30 cars that use the same type of Bose amps as the C4 does. They are functionally swappable, but the exact speaker tuning may be slightly different. I found that they sound great in the C4 as they have a similar small/large front to rear (respectively) speaker arrangement.

History- At first I set off to buy a replacement amp for one in the rear that squealed. Once I got that working with a good used Corvette unit (that I parted with $50 for), I realized other amps were weak and another completely dead- I think I had one good one in the whole car. You just couldn't tell because the squealing one was very loud. After reading up on the how-to to replace the capacitors, I redid mine (with used caps from some junkers I procured). Not using new caps was a mistake, but I got 2 out of the 3 working again. One of them failed three weeks later, but I did realize that some would be serviceable. For awhile I was trying to keep it proper using exact oem parts like an NCRS collector would do, but after having taken apart the enclosures a couple times too many, and having spent money for little gain, I considered the information I had found on the Nissans that used this same amplifier.

Nissan front amp- marked 'Sigma 975 Front (there is also a Nissan Rear Amp marked Sigma 975 Rear):
https://cimg0.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...44294046cd.jpg

Nissan Front Amp opened:
https://cimg5.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...bb9d68babc.jpg

Nissan Rear Amp marked 075 Rear (there is also a Nissan Front Amp marked 075 Front):
https://cimg8.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...0d930d6a39.jpg

Rear Amp side-by-side with oem C4 amp:
https://cimg7.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...2486a6e947.jpg

note on the last picture that some of the electrolytic caps appear missing on the Nissan part, but they are still there, just in different locations as the board had a layout revision. They work and I was hard pressed to hear a difference. You can tell bass/treble tuning if you swap a front to the rear and visa-versa so it is important to get that straight, but they are a good match for the vettes IMO.

I have been able to get mine from a local pull-it-yourself dismantler for $7 each. They are newer than the ones in our cars, and few people care to restore maximas, so this is the prime age for finding tons of these cars in the scrap yard. I have been able to find at least 4 amps each time I visit my local spot. (No, I have not been buying more).

I picked up some more 975 Bose Amps from 1995 96 97 98 99 Nissan Maxima and Infiniti I30. I also picked up some 075 amps which also work from Nissan Maxima and Infiniti.

I just disconnect this connector (shown in photo) and plug and Play New (used) Amps into the 1991 ZR-1 (the 1990 ZR-1 has soldered connectors on the Bose Amp so have to get the pigtail with white connector for 1990 ZR-1s)....they ALL sound great (I have 975 Front and 975 Rear).

Just be careful you do not break two little white tabs on the Amp that catch and hold the Connector in place. You can usually wiggle the plug loose without breaking the tabs.

Doctor Don has extra Pigtails with connector and wire harness plug on other end for $5 (the short wire harnes that is mounted on the speaker frame attaching the Amp to the ZR-1 wire harness (two different lengths for Front and Rear the Front being longer).

https://cimg8.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...64001d5b3f.jpghttps://cimg0.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...89cfe2a73d.jpg

I now have more amps (975s and 075s) which both work plug and play perfectly in the ZR-1. The 928s and 984s do NOT function in a ZR1. You can plug either Front or Rear Amps in the ZR-1 rear speaker board for testing and yes....there is a bit different tuning as Mike pointed out. What you are really looking for is the 1995 96 97 98 99 Nissan Maxima and Infiniti I30. Just make sure you are pulling a 975 (Front and Rear) Amps.

The 1995 96 97 98 99 Nissan Maxima and Infiniti I30 Front and Rear Bose Speakers PAIR Sigma 975' look like this.....

1995 96 97 98 99 Nissan Maxima Front Speakers..........1995 96 97 98 99 Nissan Maxima Rear Speakers
https://cimg2.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...8573a73e9e.jpghttps://cimg3.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...1fb6d4c1dd.jpg

To Remove the Front Amps On the Maxima...
1. Remove three bottom phillips screws on door panel.
2. Remove little button in bottom of ash tray and remove that phillips screw.
3. Pop out ash tray.
4. Pop out side of door panel as the sides are held in with plastic expanded plugs which pop loose.
5. Remove trim around door latch and pull out trim a bit so it does not get caught on door latch.
6. Lift door inner panel and remove...there are some electrical wires but you can now set the door panel aside.
7. Remove the four small phillips screws on the Amp Cover.
8. Slip the amp out and disconnect the amp electrical connector shown above.

To Remove the rear Amps On the Maxima...
9. In the trunk.....remove three small 7 mm head screws from plastic cup tabs holding Amp under speaker.
10. Disconnect electrical plug from cup or cut electrical wire.
11. Remove 4 small phillips screws holding the Amp inside the cup.
12. Disconnect the electrical connector shown above but make sure you do not break the two little plastic latches holding the plug in place.
13. Most the time you can just wiggle the plug and the plug will come free without breaking the latches.
14. If the rear glass is broken out.....just remove the 4 phillips screws holding the speaker down and lift the speaker up and out with the plastic cup attached.

When at Pick UR Parts
All one needs is a bucket for the amps and three or four tools.

A nice small shaft (and one larger shaft) phillips screw driver, a medium flat head screw driver, a 1/4 inch socket wrench (with 3 inch extension) with 1/4 inch socket, 7mm socket (maybe a 6mm socket) and a small electrical wire cutter just in case.

Oh....and do NOT call the Amps ....AMPS as they have a listed parts prices and Amps are more expensive meaning the main audio Amps.
Call the Amps switches or Tuners.....and offer $5 for each (you definitely should not pay more than $9 each) as they are not a HOT item ....UNTIL NOW....

Just ran into an experience where the Pull UR Parts gal wanted $22 for Nissan Maxima Speaker Amps.....when in fact the whole speaker with Amp (Amp is part of same plastic speaker case) would cost $16. Then she called the Amp a Relay and Relays cost $19. I explained that several of the Amps came from cases in which the speaker was already taken. I left that place with their Amps on the counter. Went down the street (competitor Pull UR Parts) and explained several of the six Amps I found at that Pull UR Parts came from cases with no speaker.....Amps cost $5.50 at the Pull UR Parts down the street :thumbs:

https://cimg4.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...ef4ffcae51.jpghttps://cimg5.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...04ecbe8ad0.jpg
https://cimg7.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...d9b07a2511.jpghttps://cimg8.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...0d930d6a39.jpg
https://cimg0.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...54c8096f64.jpg

Oh......There are no more 975 Bose Speaker Amps in Fresno.

Thank You mike100 for that Superb Information on ZR-1 Speaker Amps.

NOTES:
Background Diagnostics Information.

Did the sound deterioration start all at once?
Do you get any sound at all?
Did this happen on all four speakers at the same time?
Does it happen with CD as well as AM/FM?

I usually start at the speaker amps (exchanging Nissan Max 975s or 075s).
If one speaker amp exchange for a known good amp does not work...then Bose or CDM
.

Last time I had issues I exchanged Bose for a known working Bose....found I had no sound after switching in a good Amp and good Bose. So exchanged CDMs and got all the sound back in great order.

If you have someone near by with a good Bose....it is about a 10 minute job to exchange a known working Bose for your Bose.

Same goes with amps....use the rear drivers side amp and exchange that for a known good amp.

Start with the easiest replacement and that be an amp....then the Bose.

Now if nothing as suggested above works.....have fun removing and exchanging the CDM :D

See Bose Speaker Amps and CDM Replace

The usual problem with Bose is the CD player does not take and run a CD.....that is Doc Dons department.

Last UPDATE of post 60 Apr, 2018

Dynomite 08-23-2012 12:11 PM

Typical Low Mileage ZR-1 Restoration starting with Audio.
 
Typical Low Mileage ZR-1 Restoration (Audio, Windshield, Injectors, Starter, Clutch Master and Slave Cylinder).

1. Audio.
BOSE Speaker Amp Options for 1990 and 1991 ZR-1

See Bose Speaker Amp Options TIPS

I picked up some more 975 Amps from 95 Nissan Maxima and some 075 Amps from Infinities I think or newer Nissan Maxima.

I just disconnect this connector (shown in photo) and plug and Play New (used) Amps into the ZR-1....they ALL sound great (I have 975 Front and 975 Rear). WOW....what great sound in all four speakers....speaker Fade, Base, Treble works perfectly and volume will drive you out of the Z as you like. Had to re-install the CDM as someone removed it thinking that was the lack of sound issue and they just stuck it back held in place by the right lower knee bolster.

2. First was to Replace the Delaminated Windshield (after checking compression).

This 38K mile ZR-1 Compression test showed 230 lbs on ALL 8 cylinders.
One Major problem was a highly Delaminated Windshield which was NOT a Typical requirement of a Restoration.

Safelite Just installed a Windshield and Weather stripping in a 1990 ZR-1 for $150. I furnished the Windshield and Weather Stripping :)

This is number 72 one of the first 1990s built.
I also have the last 1990 ZR-1 sold to public (#3032) and it has no windshield issues.

This is BEFORE and AFTER photos :D

Safelite did a Perfect Job :thumbs:

I got the Tinted Windshield and Weather Stripping from ZZZZZR1/LT5corsa (Dave) and have to say the Tinted Windshield is perfect in every way as is the Weather Stripping. Safelite was pleasantly surprised how good this Windshield Installation ended ....and they have done other Windshield Installations on Corvettes with Windshields and Weather Stripping they have provided themselves (This was the best they had seen).

https://cimg2.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...1e8c4cd09c.jpghttps://cimg3.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...3c62905435.jpg
https://cimg5.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...c743a104ca.jpg

3. Fluids and Injectors.

ALL Fluids changed out (AMSOIL 10W-40, Castrol 10W-60, Mobile 1 75W-90, DOT 4)......and Differential Case Drain Installed.
See Item #4 LT5 Added Systems

The Standard Dynomite Top End Restoration.......
a. New Gaskets (Inj Housing, Plenum, Crank Case Vent).
b. TB Coolant blocked.
c. New SL4-205 RC Injectors (Check Resistance of Injectors first - 12 Ohms and even among Injectors more or less).
d. New Coolant Hoses with rounded edge clamps.
e. Pressure wash (hot water) under Plenum and total engine pressure wash (with everything under Plenum removed and valley drain cleaned).
f. Starter Solenoid restored and Alternator polished (not painted).
g. A Billet Aluminum Belt Tensioner Pulley was added.
h. Checked all Oil Pan bolts and Water Pump bolts for tightness (One bolt at a time).

Before Alternator/Starter Removal (Note Injector Housing Coolant Blocked to TB - Red Allen Head Plug)

https://cimg6.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...4d305d78bb.jpg

After Alternator/Starter Removal (One Hour Later....took extra time to pressure wash Engine with Hot Water and to recondition the Starter Solenoid). See Starter, Starter Relay, Wiring Harness, Battery, and Plugs Tricks

https://cimg0.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...b0ee0bcf62.jpg


https://cimg4.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...5772b25360.jpg

4. Clutch Slave Cylinder Issues.

The Clutch Pedal was SOFT indicating low Clutch Fluid and it was difficult to shift the ZF 6-40 Transmission into various gears including reverse.

Typically the Clutch Fluid Reservoir Fluid Level is not maintaned on low mileage ZR-1s simply because the Clutch Fluid Reservoir cannot be found. The Clutch Fluid Reservoir is located under the ECM (disconnect the two 10mm nuts and swing the ECM upside down to locate the Clutch Fluid Reservoir. Clean the Reservoir of old Brake Fluid and fill full indication with DOT 4 Brake Fluid. Pump the Clutch Pedal many times slowly self bleading the air from the Clutch lines. The Clutch Pedal will become a bit harder to push from the initial depression all the way down indicating the Clutch is being fully released. This will allow easy shifting of the ZF 6 -40 Transmission in all gears including reverse.

Just in case it is a leaking Slave Cylinder (as in the case for this low mileage 90') or Leaking Master Cylinder, you will have to install a new Clutch Master and New Clutch Slave Cylinder. The New Slave Cylinder has a much better bleeding system wherein the original Save Cylinder was almost impossible to bleed. I installed a New Clutch Master Cylinder and New Clutch Slave Cylinder from Jerry's Gaskets and Clutch functions perfectly.

5. Fired it up (March 13).....WOW....runs so smooth in all gears :thumbs:
The TB Coolant Elimination at the Injector Housing is hidden and cannot be seen from an external inspection (the return line to the Coolant Overflow tank in front of Passenger Side was blocked internally with a soldered nipple) ;)

https://cimg6.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...b53006dc8d.jpg
https://cimg0.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...e40ad50676.jpg

The 10 minute Plenum Removal has been confirmed (once coolant is drained as in this case without TB coolant blocked at the start) The 10 Minute Plenum Removal TIPS :thumbs:

6. New Tools These from Harbour Freight......

a. 1/4 inch drive Torx #40 hardened steel for Plenum and Cam Cover Bolts (just long enough to reach between those two tight runners on the Plenum).

b. 14 inch long combination 1/4 inch and 3/8 inch drive Flex Head Socket wrench strong enough (even using the 1/4 inch end) to remove the hardest to remove Torx Cam Cover Bolts. The 14 inch leverage eliminates the need for a cheater bar on the typical socket wrench.

https://cimg2.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...b93a720ddd.jpg

Notes:

1. If I had the gaskets in hand and new coolant hoses.....this complete restoration I would expect to take maybe a day with the wrenches. It is almost a must to have a high pressure washer connected directly to HOT water. The Transmission, Under the engine, front of engine, front suspension.....and particularly around the Oil Filter Adapter and below the Dipstick seem to be places where the most oil has been spilled over the years. Also have on hand a can of engine degreaser. Spray with degreaser and let it sit for a few minutes before hitting it with Hot High Pressure water.

2. On this LT5 it will appear TB coolant is intact as I plugged the rubber hose (going to Coolant Surge Tank) at the connection to Plenum and inserted 1/8 inch Allen Pipe Plug in Injector Housing. Also will retain original #40 Torx Plenum and Cam Cover Bolts. Carter Bling in Engine Compartment will be added. Original LT5 Color will be retained.....making this engine appear TOTAL STOCK.

Last UPDATE of post 61 Aug, 2019

Dynomite 08-25-2012 01:31 AM

1990 (#2067) LT5 Top End Rebuild (Including Wilwood Front Brakes)
 
1990 (#2067) LT5 Top End Rebuild (Including Wilwood Front Brakes)

Summary of 1990 Reconditioning/Modifications (#2067)

Everything removed/restored/replaced on Top End (Plenum, Secondary Vacuum system, HVAC Vacuum, Plugs, Coils, Starter, Crank Case Vent Cover, Alternator, AC Compressor (not disconnected).

1. Degreased and cleaned Valley and entire engine including Valley Drain.
(Pressure washed BEFORE removing Original Injectors).
2. TB Coolant Eliminated.
3. Elite Oil Catch Can Added (with SS Hydraulic Hose).
4. SS Oil Cooler Hoses Added.
5. Air Induction Eliminated.
6. New Modified Fuel Pressure Regulator (May 2019).
7. Plenum and Cam Covers Painted and Detailed.
8. SS Allen Head Bolts Added.
9. New Coils.
10. New Water Pump.
11. Reconditioned Starter.
12 New Secondary Control Rod and Bushings From Jerry's Gaskets.
13. New Gaskets (Jerry's Gaskets).
14 Full compliment of Carter Bling Added.
15. New Charcoal Canister.
16. New Coolant Hoses from Marc Haibeck.
17. C4-Beam Plates Added (ZFDoc).
18. Differential Drain Plug Added.
19. Alumuninum Water pump and Aluminum Power Steering Pulleys Added (Randy Woods).
20. New Altrenator Pulley Added.
21. New LT5 Spark Plug Wires.
22. New Secondary Canisters installed correctly.
23. Compression Checks ALL Cylinders (210-215 psi).
24. Radiator Debree Screen Added.
25. Wilwood Promatrix Rotors and C5 Z06 Calipers.
26. Drivers Side Electronics for Fans, Lights etc., moved Under Drivers Side Upper A-Arm.
27. Starter Relay Added and positioned under ECM Connectors.
28. New PCV Dual Connector from Jerry's Gaskets.
29. Stock Radiator Hose Clamps replaced with SS Worm Gear Hose Clamps (with insert).
30. New Cam Cover PCV FIlters from Marc Haibeck.
31. New 180 deg Thermostat from Marc Haibeck.
32. Checked and verified correct engine timing.
33. SS Air Intake Added (George Braml).
34. New NGK Iridium BKR5EIX Spark Plugs.
35. All Injectors Ohmed (12.4 Ohms) and Cleaned with New "O" Rings
36. Cleaned Ground of both SIR Sensors.
37. SW Headers ZR1CORVOR and SW Exhaust ZR1CHAMSW.
38. New Secondary Vacuum System and Linkage (Complete)

1990 #2067 came with a new Aluminum Radiator.
Photos and descriptions of Specific Rebuild Tricks for a 1990 LT5 engine starting with removal of the Plenum are provided. The engine was cleaned in total and Plenum/Cam Covers/Injector Housing Painted (see item #5 below). This section will contain mostly photos of the Rebuild process with specifics on bolt torque, Loctite and Sealants. Specific Rebuild Techniques are highlighted with photos. This section is continually upgraded with the best methods described for each of the Post Heading Topics (Post #62 - Post #69).

The Set Up involves lifting the ZR1 off the floor about 18 inches. A hydraulic floor jack is then placed under the Transmission and the C-Frame bolts removed and C-Frame set to the side but not removed (Engine Mouning Bolts are also loosened). With this Set Up, the engine can be tilted as required for removal of Cam Cover Bolts and Cam Covers.

https://cimg3.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...e0337bdee0.jpg

This Set Up also makes it easy to remove the Stock Exhaust installing SW Headers and Offroad SW Exhaust.

1. Specific Modifications.

1990 LT5 SPECIFIC TOP END REBUILD TRICKS
Post 62 - 1990 LT5 Rebuild Tricks (Including Wilwood Front Brakes)
Post 63 - Removing Plenum
Post 64 - Removing Crankcase Ventilation Cover and General Inspection/Cleaning Valley
Post 65 - INFL REST grounds and Alternator Connector Boot
Post 66 - Inspection, Testing and Reconditioning the Secondaries
Post 67 - Removing Cam Cover and Camshaft Timing Inspection
Post 68 - Eliminating TB Coolant Flow and Air Induction Tricks
Post 69 - Installing Headers Engine In Car

2. Changed ALL Fluids and Installed Differential Drain Plug.

See LT5/ZR-1 Fluids

3. Checked Compression.
Did a Compression check......210-215 psi on all 8 cylinders.
Easy to remove even the Number 8 Spark Plug using one of these Blackhawk 5/8 Spark Plug Swivel Socket 3/8" Drive.

https://cimg6.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...8c21e1bafe.jpg
https://cimg9.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...2a50605df6.jpg

4. Making Sure We Have Engough Stopping Power.

ZR-1 Wilwood Rotors and C4 to C5 Conversion

See ZR-1 (90' and 91') Wilwood Rotors and C4 to C5-Z06 Conversion

I used adapters (Corvette C4 to C5-Z06 conversion brackets, late spindle) C4 to C5-Z06 Conversion Adapters (Ebay)
I had to move wheel weights as there is only 1/8 inch clearance between inside of wheel hub and C5 Z06 calipers.

1. Wilwood Rotors Extreme Performance - 13 inch #160-7744-BK
2. Wilwood Hats with .250 inch offset 5x4.75 bolt pattern, 12x7.00 Hats to Rotor, Hat #170-7746

The wheel sensor cable bracket was twisted just a bit. This assures clearance between the wheel sensor cable and the SS brake line at maximum steering angles.

Used Red Loctite 262 on all adapter bolts.

5. Now ready for Top End Reconditioning. ;)

a. First Added Starter Bypass Relay.

Starter, Starter Relay, Wiring Harness, Battery, and Plugs Tricks

Last UPDATE of post 62 July, 2020

Dynomite 08-25-2012 06:54 PM

Removing Plenum (including the 10 minute Plenum Removal)
 
Removing Plenum including the 10 minute Plenum Removal (91')
The 91' LT5 had been modified for Quick Plenum Removal before hand (TB coolant elimination, Oil Catch Can and SS Allen Head Plenum bolts).

1. For this Plenum Removal (1990 LT5) the coolant had to be drained (I completely drained coolant to replace thermostat (Stant Thermostats) and replace ALL coolant hoses). The TB Coolant was eliminated during this 1990 Top End Restoration so Coolant does not have to be drained at all next Plenum Removal. See Item #4 LT5 Eliminated Systems

90' LT5 Before Modifications for Quick Plenum Removal
https://cimg1.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...cb7a482888.jpg

2. The 10 Minute Plenum Removal (1991 LT5 after Eliminated TB Coolant, Installation of Oil Catch Can and Installation of SS Allen Head Bolts).

TB Coolant Elimination is Item #4 LT5 Eliminated Systems

A. Tools for Plenum Removal.

Two Allen Head wrenches (6mm and 3mm),
Two flat head Screw drivers and ...................................1/4 inch socket wrench with 1/4 inch socket
TB bracket wrenches (7mm and 9mm).
.........................and short extension for DIS Connector
https://cimg2.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...855b7551a6.jpghttps://cimg3.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...cfd256ba1a.jpg

B. Plenum Removal Steps (assuming you have TB Coolant Blocked). If not.....remove some coolant before you start.
1. Disconnect Battery (Check Battery Condition and Jumper GOOD Battery as FIRST CHECK).
2. Remove Samco (or stock) Air Duct (large flat screw driver).
3. Remove Oil Catch Can Hose (If Oil Catch Can Installed) to Plenum and PCV Dual Connector on back of Plenum (small flat screw driver).
4. Remove Throttle Body Cables (two including TB Shield and two top (I have 3mm SS Allen Head) screws on Plenum) and TB Connector (7mm and 9mm wrenches).
5. Remove Fuel Regulator Vacuum Hose "L" rear of Plenum.
6. Disconnect MAP Vacuum hose from MAP (Manifold Absolute Pressure) and from rear of Plenum.......
(in case it gets intangled with other wires/hoses as MAP is not disconnected from Plenum).
7. Disconnect Passenger Side Plenum Vacuum (and Drivers side Plenum Vacuum if secondaries not removed).
8. Disconnect Brake Boost Vacuum line Drivers Side Rear of Plenum.
9. Remove three 6mm Allen Head SS Fuel Line Bolts and two fuel lines (6mm Allen Ball Head Socket) or Torx-40 stock bolts.
10. Open gas cap to prevent fuel lines from leaking when removed from fuel rail.
11. Remove 12 Allen Head SS Plenum Bolts (6mm Allen Ball Head Socket with Extension) or Torx-40 stock bolts.
12. Lift Plenum from Gasket (front only) and remove two Cam Cover PCV Vent Rubber Connectors to Air Horn.
13. Disconnect two DIS (Distributorless Ignition System) Connectors front of DIS.
14a. Disconnect large Purge Vacuum line under front of Plenum (91').
14b. Disconnect small vacuum line under front of Plenum and larger vacuum line from drivers side of Plenum going to Charcoal Canister under left head light (90').
15. Disconnect two small electrical connectors rear under Plenum (MAP and DIS).
16. Unscrew 1/4 bolt in Main DIS Connector rear of Plenum.
17. Remove Plenum.

C. Starter Removal.
18. Remove Coil Pack Connector and 4 bolts (two pairs 8mm hex heads 6mm bolts front, 10mm hex heads 8mm bolts rear).
19. Remove Coil Packs with plug wires attached (remove all 8 plug wires from Cam Covers).
20. Check starter with hot wire but then disconnect Starter Solenoid connector.
21. Disconnect main HOT wire from Battery to Starter.
22. Remove two starter mounting bolts (13mm Hex Head 10mm bolts) and lift starter out of Valley.

https://cimg4.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...31e7fb4768.jpg

D. New Tools These from Harbour Freight......

a. 1/4 inch drive Torx #40 hardened steel for Plenum and Cam Cover Bolts (just long enough to reach between those two tight runners on the Plenum).

b. 14 inch long combination 1/4 inch and 3/8 inch drive Flex Head Socket wrench strong enough (even using the 1/4 inch end) to remove the hardest to remove Torx Cam Cover Bolts. The 14 inch leverage eliminates the need for a cheater bar on the typical socket wrench.

Last UPDATE of post 63 Dec, 2017

Dynomite 08-25-2012 06:54 PM

Inspection, Testing and Reconditioning the Valley, Starter, and Coils
 
Inspection, Testing and Reconditioning the Valley, Starter, and Coils

https://cimg5.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...ec25728bd0.jpg

1. Starter Solenoid Contacts.

I had a NO START condition on a 90' and after I towed it for a start....got home and it fired right up. I would have liked to hot wire the starter (purple wire) when that happens to see if it is the starter or starter ground circuit. Or check that purple wire for 12+ volts when I turn the switch to start. I lean toward ground circuit or sticky starter solenoid. Another indication would be if when you turn the ignition key to start do the lights dim for example indicating a current draw to the starter solenoid/starter.

If the solenoid does not move (no clicking indicating the Starter Solenoid did not move) as in my case then a sticky Solenoid or Solenoid Ground Connection. If the Solenoid clicked/moved...then bad Solenoid contacts or bad connection Battery cable (Positive) to starter/battery or bad ground (Negative) engine to battery.

Installed a relay in the start circuit of the 90' identical to what I have on the 91'. This is one of those intermittent issues and does sound like poor electrical connections in either the Starter Negative Connections or Starter Positive Connections.
Starter Relay, Wiring Harness, Battery, and Plugs Tricks

The Starter Solenoid is shown in the left photo with slight burnt contacts in right photo.
https://cimg7.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...d8c2ebdb3d.jpghttps://cimg8.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...8522661c36.jpg

The Solenoid contacts in left photo were wire brushed clean in right photo.
https://cimg0.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...e5da9a572e.jpghttps://cimg1.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...9597a9ce60.jpg

Complete Starter Disassembly.
Photo provided by others.

https://cimg3.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...e4908a1e4f.jpg

Last UPDATE of post 64 Dec, 2017

Dynomite 08-25-2012 06:54 PM

INFL REST grounds and Alternator Connector Boot
 
1. Reconditioning ALL Electrical Connections including Engine and Chassis Ground Connections. Also including Alternator Connection Boot.

Starter Relay, Wiring Harness, Battery, and Plugs Tricks
Electrical Ground Connections and Clutch Start Switch Linkage

https://cimg4.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...8c29371f54.jpg

2. SIR Sensors (INFL REST) Ground Reconditioned.

Only applies to 1990 ZR-1s (see below)

https://cimg5.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...96c9f61885.jpg

Both Right and Left Air Bag impact sensors were regrounded.
(The bolt sizes cited are the wrench sizes to remove the bolt)

a. For the Drivers side, the side panel was removed (top bolt and bottom bolt loosened and three Torx bolts removed from fender well).
The bottom bolt was loosened by sliding an open end 10mm wrench in the slot provided.
b. The battery was disconnected (plus and minus) and hold down clamp removed.
c. The battery platform was removed (two 10 mm bolts on top and two 10 mm bolts on bottom front side).
d. The Impact Sensor was removed (one 10 mm bolt and one 13 mm bolt) in additon to the battery ground cable and engine ground cable.
e. The two bolt holes of the sensor and grounds bolt holes were sanded clean and the bottom of the impact sensor was polished with steel wool.
f. The Impact Sensor was then replaced and the area spray painted black Rustoleum to seal and prevent corrosion of the polished areas.
g. The various components were then assembled in reverse order.

h. For the Passenger Side, the side panel was removed (top bolt and bottom bolt loosened and three Torx bolts removed from fender well).
The bottom bolt was loosened by sliding an open end 10mm wrench in the slot provided.
i. The rear wheel well cover was removed (four 10 mm bolts on forward edge loosened and two 10 mm bolts removed).
The 10 mm bottom bolt for the wheel well cover was also removed.
j. The windshield water bottle was removed and set aside without disconnecting the water line (three 10 mm bolts).
k. The Impact Sensor was removed (one 10 mm bolt and one 13 mm bolt).
l. The two bolt holes of the sensor were sanded clean and the bottom of the impact sensor was polished with steel wool.
m. The Impact Sensor was then replaced and the area spray painted black Rustoleum to seal and prevent corrosion of the polished areas.
n. The various components were then assembled in reverse order.

3. Inflation Rest Reconditioning ground only applies to 1990 ZR-1.

This from Marc.......(edited a bit) :thumbs:
For the 1991 through 1993 the Air Bag Sensors do not have to be grounded to work in a crash....they DO need to be attached to the Frame Rails however. The Grounding requirement (Code 16 and Code 26) of the Air Bag Sensors on the 1990 was set up to assure the sensors were attached to the Frame Rails. If the bolts were removed from the sensors the sensor would pass as air bag deployable but would not actually deploy the air bag for obvious reasons. This explains why I got NO INFL REST warning on the panel when I totally removed the 1991 Sensor from the Frame Rail in my test.

I am now thinking the Air Bag Sensors on the 1990 ZR-1 will function and Deploy the Air Bag even if not grounded. The 1990 Air Bag Sensors will only appear not grounded/not connected on the panel as INFL REST indicating/suggesting the Air Bag Sensors are not installed when in fact they ARE Installed. To get rid of that INFL REST Indication on the Panel (as well as the Red Seat Belt Indication) requires the Air Bag Sensors be Re-Grounded. I am not going to jar the Air Bag Sensor to see if the Air Bags Deploy to test that theory.

If any of the listed faults 21 - 26 for the 1991-1993 were detected in a self test the INFL REST will appear on the 1991-1993 panel. These faults are listed for the 1991-1993 in the ALDL Fault Code Sticky above this technical section.

21 Steering Column Resistance Too High
22 Steering Column Resistance Too Low]
23 Steering Column Circuit Voltage Too High
24 Steering Column Circuit Voltage Too Low
25 Short to Battery in Steering Column
26 Open in Steering Column

Now for the 1994-1995 since two air bags are used has different codes and there is NO SIR diagnostic terminal as indicated.
The 1994-1995 design requires a TECH 1 diagnostics because the data is sensitive as a result of Government Regulations. On the 1994-1995 ALDL Code Reader when used with Adapter I have noted SIR (the RED BUTTON) is NOT used See Item #3 ALDL Fault Code Reader/Eraser. All other Codes are readable using the 94'-95' Adapter with the ALDL Code Reader.

Marc Haibeck ALDL Connector Functional Description

4. INFL REST Connectors inside car.
There are a Left and Right Yellow INFL REST Connector inside the car that can accumulate resistance over time.
(Left - just in front of Drivers side Speaker at the level of the top of the Speaker)
(Right - Just to right of center hump front foot rest under carpet)
Depending if you have Code 16 (Drivers side) or Code 26 (Passenger side) locate the Left or Right Yellow Connector.
(3 inches long and 3/8 inch diameter three pin)
Disconnect and Reconnect Yellow Connector to regain continuity.

5. Erasing Codes.

a. Ground the ALDL Pin K to the base of the seat attachment metal (Pin K is 4th pin from Left on bottom row of ALDL).
b. Turn the ignition on and wait for the INFL REST light to start flashing (It should take about 5-7 Seconds).
c. When the INFL REST light starts flashing disconnect ground for about 3 seconds then ground pin K again for an additional 3 seconds.
d. Remove the ground and wait about ten seconds and ground pin K once more.
e. Code 12 flashes 6 times indication the codes have been cleared and the DERM is operating normally (Dignostic Energy Reserve Module).

6. Alternator Boot.

This Alternator Wire Boot fits perfectly on the main HOT wire of the Alternator connection and clips onto the Alternator Boot Retainer. Use a large FLAT HEAD screw driver to stretch the wire hole in the boot for insertion of the Alternator HOT wire connector. The wire hole in the boot retracts to normal size after wire connector insertion through the hole. This can be accomplished without removing anything from the Top End (The nut holding the HOT wire to the Alternator is removed, Old Boot Removed, New Boot installed, Nut Replaced).

See Alternator Wire Boot

https://cimg6.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...ac2974159a.jpg

Last UPDATE of post 65 Feb, 2018

Dynomite 08-25-2012 11:05 PM

Secondary Functional Test and Reconditioning the Secondary Actuators
 
A. One of the most important Tests of the LT5 is the Secondary Functional Test.

Marc Haibeck has identified a simple test to verify the Secondaries are functional without removing the Plenum SEE Verifying Secondary Operation with Plenum In Place. You only need a sharpened paper clip or needle and electrical grounding wire with alligator clips on both ends.

1. This simple test verifies if each/both Secondary Canisters activate the Secondaries equally and smoothly.
2. The complete opening of the secondaries should take only a second if the Canisters are functional.
3. The Vacuum Pump will cycle and then turn off when you turn the Key ON.
4. The Vacuum Pump may cycle every minute (vacuum system in great condition) or cycle every 5-10 seconds (vacuum system leaking which all vacuum systems leak a bit).

5. As the Canister shafts move/function during the grounding of Pin C17, the Vacuum Pump will cycle keeping vacuum as the canister plunger moves.
6. Once the canister is fully stroked, the vacuum pump will turn off for a period of time depending on the condition of the Vacuum System.
7. If there is a major Vacuum Leak between the Secondary Port Throttle Valve Solenoid and either Vacuum Canister, the Vacuum Pump will run continuously once Pin C17 is grounded.
8. The Vacuum Pump will turn off once Pin C17 is Un-Grounded.

With Key On........
Find the Pink Wire which is C17 (or pink wire with black strip) on the ECM. Insert a Sharpened Paperclip or needle along side the Pink wire
and attach a ground wire with Alligator Clip on both ends.
Pin C17 is located in the Green Connector
second connector on the ECM from the passenger side.
https://cimg7.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...cda794ab48.jpg

Look down on the Passenger Side in the ...........................Look down on the Drivers Side in the
direction of the screw driver (Use a Flashlight). ..............direction of the screw driver (Use a Flashlight).
You will see the shaft of the canister which will ...............You will see the shaft of the canister which will
move toward the FRONT of the engine when ...................move toward the REAR of the engine when
you ground the Alligator Clip (The Front of the ................you ground the Alligator Clip (The Rear of the
engine is to the Right in the Photo
)..................................(engine is to the Right in the Photo).

https://cimg8.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...f00cb1775e.jpghttps://cimg9.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...190f04b9f8.jpg

B. Reconditioning the Secondary Actuators.

I replaced the old vacuum canisters as well as the old Intake Manifold Control Valve Linkages. There was excessive play in the sockets of the old linkages.

Intake Manifold Control Valve Linkages

https://cimg0.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...ad68f24667.jpg
https://cimg3.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...994ca88b75.jpghttps://cimg4.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...f6bffd57c2.jpg

Last UPDATE of post 66 Dec, 2017

Dynomite 08-25-2012 11:05 PM

Removing Cam Covers (Engine In Car) for Inspections of Camshafts
 
Removing Cam Cover (Engine In Car) for Camshaft Timing Inspection, PCV Filter replacement, inspection of top Timing Chain Wear Strip. Replace PCV Filter, Top End Timing Chain Wear Strip as needed, and Cam Cover Spark Plug access "O" Rings (eight).
Use Loctite 518 when replacing Cam Covers on Cam Cover Mating Surfaces. See Item #1a Use of thread Lubricants, Loctite and Sealants

Removing Torx 40 bolts Not so easy......but then turned out very easy.
1. Cam Covers were removed by first removing Bolts from Transmission End of C-Frame, Loosening Engine Mount Bolts and then dropping Transmission a bit so cam covers could clear Brake Booster (two Torx-40 bolts near brake booster were removed with cam cover). On the Passenger side the Temperature sensor for Evaporator was removed easily and set aside (plenty room to then remove cam cover bolts and then cam cover on passenger side). The Transmission was lowered to remove the Cam Coover Torx-40s on passenger side and then raised to remove Cam Cover on Passenger side so Cam Cover could clear Fire Wall bolts. The Plenum was removed and the AC Compressor set aside to start the process.

2. Now the Hard Part......as can be seen five Torx-40 Cam Cover Bolts failed in the Torx receiver on the bolt head even though considerable downward pressure was applied to the Torx-40 socket/wrench. Several types of Torx 40s wrenches had to be used because of the clearance. Considerably more torque than the 19 ft-lbs for Torx-40 Cam Cover bolt installation was applied trying to remove them (a cheater on a 1/2 inch socket wrench) :lol:

3. Now the Easy Part........What to do.....Drill, Heat....Torch...

a. I tried drilling and ruined three drill bits (Drilling would not work on many of the Torx-40 bolts because of clearance).
b. I did not want to try heat (A little heat works great on Injector Housing for removal of Coolant Manifold Bolts) as there is no way to get heat where it is needed.
c. Chisel.....:yesnod:......well wouldn't you know it.....Using a chisel to first notch one side of the Torx-40 bolt to gain a purch and then pounding that side counter clockwise with the chisels about 10 times without touching the Aluminum Cam Cover surface popped the bolt loose (all five). I would never have guessed it but ran out of options. And holding the chisel on a slant allowed access to even the most difficult to reach Cam Cover Torx-40s.

Cam Covers Removed Engine In Car...............................Note the chisel marks on the Torx-40 bolt heads
https://cimg9.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...89075718ce.jpghttps://cimg0.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...ec71daf3d9.jpg

Cam Covers back on (The easy way with SS Allen Head Bolts) and Belt tensioner installed with belt
and New Belt Tensioner Pulley
:cheers:

https://cimg2.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...761d40a365.jpghttps://cimg3.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...45ae8577dd.jpg

Post 147 - LT5 Added Systems

="2"%Last UPDATE of post 67 Dec, 2019

Dynomite 08-25-2012 11:06 PM

Eliminating TB Coolant and Air Induction, Added Oil Catch Can, Painting
 
Eliminating TB Coolant and Air Induction, Added Oil Catch Can, Painting, and Installing Fuel Line Bracket

1. TB Coolant and Air Induction Elimination.

See this link for TB Coolant Blocking drilling and threading details Injector Housing TB Coolant Blocking

https://cimg4.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...5aacc0b36f.jpghttps://cimg5.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...91958d15d4.jpg

2. Oil Catch Can Added......................................... .........Elimination of Air Induction.
https://cimg8.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...0a39aceab3.jpghttps://cimg1.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...67d18d9822.jpg

3. Painting Top End.

Remove Plenum (with Air Horn and TB attached).
Remove Cam Covers for Painting and touch up Injector Housings (Paint) without removing them.

See Removing Cam Covers (Engine In Car) for Inspections of Camshafts

Painting Cam Covers ........................................ .............and Plenum with Air Horn/TB Attached.
https://cimg2.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...14acc0f254.jpghttps://cimg3.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...08b6c4666b.jpg
https://cimg4.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...c36e3b4957.jpg

4. Fuel Line Billet Bracket.

The Billet Fuel Line Clamp base for the fuel lines was installed replacing the original plastic clamp. The Billet Fuel Line Clamp is actually counter sunk underneath to provide more support as it sits on that screw/bolt that holds the fuel line clamp to the Evaporator Housing. The counter sinking provides more support for the Billet Clamp than the shoulder of the bolt only.

Hole in clamp is 1/4 inch with 5/8 inch hole (on bottom of Billet Clamp) recessed 1/16 inch so Billet clamp rests flush on mounting. Billet clamp is then held tight against Evaporator Housing rather than tight on bolt which may or may not be tight in evaporator housing.

87 Octane........................................ ....................................6 mm bolt uses 10 mm wrench
https://cimg5.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...e0153d2d0b.jpghttps://cimg6.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...11d3d5f6d0.jpg

Base of Fuel Line Bracket on Evaporator Housing....................Billet Clamp is 1-7/8 x 3/4 x 1/2 inch
https://cimg7.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...19f61d95db.jpghttps://cimg8.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...55e90674ae.jpg

Hole in clamp is 1/4 inch with 5/8 inch recessed hole
(on bottom of Billet Clamp). This allows the shoulder
of the bolt to sit inside the Billet Clamp.
https://cimg0.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...baff1e4f72.jpg
https://cimg1.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...a2eb179d2d.jpg

Last UPDATE of post 68 Dec, 2017

Dynomite 08-25-2012 11:06 PM

Summary of 90' Reconditioning/Modifications
 
Summary of 90' Reconditioning/Modifications (#2067)

1. Degreased and cleaned Valley and entire engine (including Valley Drain).
2. TB Coolant Eliminated.
3. Oil Catch Can Added (with SS Hydraulic Hose).
4. SS Oil Cooler Hoses Added.
5. Air Induction Eliminated.
6. New Belt Tensioner Pulley Added.
7. Plenum and Cam Covers Painted and Detailed.
8. SS Allen Head Bolts Added.
9. New Coils.
10. New Water Pump.
11. Reconditioned Starter.
12 New Secondary Control Rod and Bushings From Jerry's Gaskets.
13. New Gaskets (Jerry's Gaskets).
14 Full compliment of Carter Bling Added.
15. New Charcoal Canister.
16. New Coolant Hoses from Marc Haibeck.
17. C4-Beam Plates Added (ZFDoc).
18. Differential Drain Plug Added.
19. Alumuninum Water pump and Aluminum Power Steering Pulleys Added (Randy Woods).
20. New Altrenator Pulley Added.
21. New LT5 Spark Plug Wires.
22. New Secondary Canisters installed correctly.
23. Compression Checks ALL Cylinders (210-215 psi).
24. Radiator Debree Screen Added.
25. Wilwood Promatrix Rotors and C5 Z06 Calipers.
26. Drivers Side Electronics for Fans, Lights etc., moved Under Drivers Side Upper A-Arm.
27. Starter Relay Added and positioned under ECM Connectors.
28. New PCV Dual Connector from Jerry's Gaskets.
29. Stock Radiator Hose Clamps replaced with SS Worm Gear Hose Clamps (with insert).
30. New Cam Cover PCV FIlters from Marc Haibeck.
31. New 180 deg Thermostat from Marc Haibeck.
32. Checked and verified correct engine timing.
33. SS Air Intake Added (George Braml).
34. New NGK Iridium BKR5EIX Spark Plugs.
35. Cleaned Ground of both SIR Sensors.
36. SW Headers ZR1CORVOR and SW Exhaust ZR1CHAMSW.

Copper spacer added (two each 1 x 6 inch copper pipe
with coupler and end caps) to keep SW exhaust 1/4 inch
away from riding against Differential Housing. The end caps
and coupler actually keep the spacer in place without any ties.


https://cimg3.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...c928a37c56.jpghttps://cimg4.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...0d1791ce52.jpg

I set the two rear hangers so they pull the exaust up tight against
the copper spacer. Also set the rear "L" hanger so there is freedom
of the exhaust system to move to the rear at least 1/2 inch when hot
.

37. Modified Marc Haibeck Chip.
a. Spark Advance set up for 87 Octane Fuel.
b. Cooling Fans on at 205 deg and off at 200 deg.
c. Ingition spark advanced retarded when intake air temp reaches 160 deg.
d. ignition spark timing knock retard reduced bh 50%.
e. CAGS 1 to 4 shift disbled.
f. Fueling increased to support +35 hp with SW Headers and Exhaust.
g. Light load spark advanced increased 5% at all engine speeds.
h. Wide open trottle advanced set at 26 deg.

38. Modified Marc Haibeck Chip.
a. Spark Advance set up for 91 Octane Fuel.
b. Ignition spark advance increased 10% at all engine speeds.
c. 25 deg + 3 deg = 28 deg at WOT.
d. Enabled manual transmission.
e. Both fans to go on at 205 and both off at 200 degs.
f. Fuel added to support +125 HP.
g. Anti-backfire mode enabled.
h. Knock retard reduced by 50%.
i. CAGS (1 to 4 shift) disabled.
j. Secondary Port Throttle Control removed.
k. Power key mode default is ON.

https://cimg5.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...95672b8b27.jpg

You will notice this photo taken with engine running is not blury at all indicating absolutely NO VIBRATION
Of either the Alternator Pulley or Belt Tensioner Pulley.
See item #9 of Bling (Carter and Others)

https://cimg9.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...b25c0c3301.jpg

BEFORE Reconditioning/Modifications
https://cimg5.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...36cb9b6cd0.jpg

AFTER Reconditioning/Modifications
https://cimg2.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...6bb615be09.jpg
https://cimg0.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...920958af01.jpg
https://cimg4.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...5cb08aa3a8.jpg
https://cimg0.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...56f6ddd635.jpg

="2"%Last UPDATE of post 69 Dec, 2019

Dynomite 08-25-2012 11:06 PM

Bling (Carter and Others)
 
Bling (Carter and Others)

All Aluminum Caps are machined with very close tolerance and fit perfectly over existing caps.
All Aluminum caps are engraved.

https://cimg9.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...f65ae63d9f.jpg

1. POWER STEERING FLUID ........................... 2. RADIATOR 15 PSI CAP
https://cimg0.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...7a6168b1f8.jpghttps://cimg1.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...2b5d7502e5.jpg

3. WASHER FLUID ONLY (Wipers Etched).........4. ENGINE COOLANT OVERFLOW
https://cimg2.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...5aef49e977.jpghttps://cimg3.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...f885e8312a.jpg

5. IH Coolant Manifolds...................................6. TB Coolant
https://cimg5.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...6a76c84042.jpghttps://cimg7.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...a10e697856.jpg

7. Oil Filter Cap
https://cimg9.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...fe662bce48.jpg

8. BRAKE FLUID DOT 4 ONLY

https://cimg1.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...38d01b13a8.jpg

9. Carter Fuel Line Bracket Installed.

91 Octane........................................ ..............................87 Octane
https://cimg2.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...cf5859aff4.jpghttps://cimg3.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...f3dce540ba.jpg

Bracket Top and Bottom........................................ ........Bracket Center
https://cimg4.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...22044219bb.jpghttps://cimg5.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...79274c2487.jpg

91 Octane on one end of Bracket and 87 Octane on other end of Bracket.
91 Octane........................................ ...........................87 Octane
https://cimg6.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...4add191640.jpghttps://cimg7.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...0661c0abd5.jpg

10. Other Bling

A. Billet Aluminum Oil Cap
Search Ebay CORVETTE LT1 BILLET CHROME SCREW IN STYLE OIL CAP Ebay Billet Aluminum Oil Cap (fits 90' & 91' LT5 & L98).
The Billet Aluminum Oil Cap has an "O" ring.


https://cimg8.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...faa13e9974.jpg

B. Billet Aluminum Dipstick Handle
See Item #3 of Post 19 - LT5 Lubrication Tricks

https://cimg0.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...e8e9b60067.jpg

C. 95' With Aluminum Oil Filter Cover :thumbs:

https://cimg4.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...08b8898458.jpg

Last UPDATE of post 70 July, 2020

Dynomite 08-28-2012 11:08 PM

1991 ZR-1 (LT5) Performance
 
1991 ZR-1 (LT5) Performance

Marc Haibeck Chips (87 Octane and 91 Octane)
Pete Cams...........ZZZZZZOOOOOOOOM!!!!!!
Locobob Porting............ZZZZZZOOOOOOOOM!!!!!!
A26B Gaskets
Carter200 Machining
ZF Doc "C" Beam Plates
Doc Don's Bose
SW Headers and SW Exhaust

Way Over 115 mph in quarter mile down the street with no power shifts
(I will keep the details secret for a challenge........just in case)
:D

https://cimg1.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...9b90901190.jpg
https://cimg5.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...b2315cbfec.jpg
https://cimg7.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...a785de7873.jpg

Click on Video Link SW ZR1CORVOR headers and SW ZR1CHAMSW to hear 91' ZR-1 with SW ZR1CORVOR headers and SW ZR1CHAM exhaust.


Last UPDATE of post 71 Dec, 2017

Dynomite 08-28-2012 11:08 PM

1991 ZR-1 (LT5) Modifications (500+ HorsePower)
 
1991 ZR-1 (LT5) Modifications (500+ HorsePower)

Details here Summary of 91' Reconditioning/Modifications

1991 ZR-1 (LT5)

This is a 1991 ZR-1 (LT5) with SW Headers, SW exhaust and ZF S6-40 Transmission. The modifications include eliminated secondary vacuum system, eliminated plenum coolant, eliminated Throttle body coolant, eliminated air induction system, and eliminated CATS. Haibeck Chips and some other stuff are also included.

https://cimg8.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...3688909241.jpghttps://cimg0.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...b8a21c40d2.jpg
https://cimg1.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...1a4af47862.jpg
https://cimg2.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...d02e7e668d.jpghttps://cimg3.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...7811c6c046.jpg
https://cimg4.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...5d8f0e377b.jpg

Last UPDATE of post 72 Dec, 2017

Dynomite 08-28-2012 11:09 PM

Summary of LT5 Restorations
 
Summary of 5 LT5 Restorations

Summary of ZR-1 Restorations
All have Differential Case Drain, C4 Beam Plates, Billet Aluminum Pulleys (Alternator, Water Pump, Power Steering, Belt Tensioner). Carter Bling, Oil Cooler SS Braided Hoses, TB Coolant Blocked, New 180 deg Thermostat, New Radiator Hoses, Debree Screen, Haibeck Chips (91 Octain), New Aluminum Radiator, New Charcoal Canister, Starter Relay, Battery Disconnect, INFL REST Sensor Re-installed, New Linkage for Secondary Port Throttles.

1995 LT5 (#186)
1995 Z 1G1YZ22J5S5800186
CA 87,600 miles Apr 2016
BMCBG4 Haibeck 91 Octain
New 200 Amp Alternator
Rebuilt trans Aug 2015 ZFDoc
New U-Joints Main Driver Shaft
Wilwood Brakes
New Fuel Filter July 2016
INJ Fuse issue - ALL New Red Looms
NO Starter Relay
INFL REST Sensor NOT Re-installed

https://cimg5.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...372b525ae2.jpg

1991 LT5 (1427)
1991 Z 1G1YZ23J4M5801427
CA 50,000 miles Mar 2009
BFXBG2CS2 Haibeck 91 Octain
New 200 amp alternator
SS Exhaust
Wilwood Brakes
90' heads 27K miles with modified Injector Housings BAD Z
New Blue Label Transmission
New Nitto NT555 Tires
New Oil Pan Gasket

https://cimg6.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...c3e04939b6.jpg

1990 LT5 (#3032)
1990 Z 1G1YZ23J4L5803032
SD 57,750 miles June 2014
AYBKG4 Haibeck 91 Octain

https://cimg8.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...e9c9934177.jpg

1990 LT5 (#72)
1990 Z 1G1YZ23J1L5800072
CA 38,000 miles March 2014
AYBKG5 Haibeck 91 Octain
Air Pump Deleted
New Fuel Filter Sep 2016
New Windshield Apr 2016
New Oil Pan Gasket Sep 2016
New Nitto NT555 Front, Dunlop 8000 Rear
New Wheels Saw Blades

https://cimg2.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...be54c07a82.jpg

1990 LT5 (#2067)
1990 Z 1G1YZ23J7L5802067
SD 76,300 miles Nov 2012
AYBKG4 CS1a Haibeck 91 Octain
SS Exhaust
Wilwood Brakes
New Nitto Tires

https://cimg8.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...e9c9934177.jpg

1990 L98 (#8550)
1990 L98 1G1YY2382L5108550
CA 56,000 miles July 2009
ARFPCL1 high Octane installed

1991 Bebuilt
91' heads 28K miles Corvettenutz
with painted cam covers CA installed in rebuilt 91’
91' LT5 36K miles CA Jan 2015
Extras
91' Heads 36K miles CA Jan 2015
91' transmission 36K miles CA Jan 2015
95’ Tramsmission 88K miles CA (ZFdoc)
95’ Crate Engine
91’ Injector Housings PCV Restricted
91’ Heads Plained Bad Z CA
Rebuilt 91’ Bad Z Trans installed in 95’ Aug 2015
91zrocket 90’ Heads with 27K miles in BAD Z PCV restricted
91zrocket 90' Transmission 27K miles SD

AUAH 8555. Stock first half SD spare
91’ AXFK Stock Last Half
90’ AYBK Stock
91’ BFXBG2JE Fans On 165 deg Haibeck
91’ BFXBG2CS3 Low Octain

Last UPDATE of post 73 Dec, 2017

Dynomite 08-28-2012 11:09 PM

What Fluids to use in the ZR-1
 
I use Amsoil 10W-40 in the LT5 engines.
I use Mobile 1 (M1-207) LT5 Engine Oil Filter.
I use Castrol 10W-60 in the ZF S6-40 (Black Label or Blue Label) Transmissions.
I use Mobile 1 (75W-90) Differential Fluid in the ZR-1s.
I use NAPA coolant (GM 1825M) in ALL ZR-1s (-10 deg F).

https://cimg8.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...00970babe8.jpg........https://cimg3.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...7e39289f75.jpg.https://cimg4.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...e6438cbb72.jpg.http://partimages.genpt.com/partimages/213967.jpg

https://cimg7.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...0f5003d62d.jpg

Last UPDATE of post 74 Dec, 2017

Dynomite 08-28-2012 11:09 PM

1990 ZR-1 (LT5) Performance Reconditioning/Modifications
 
1990 ZR-1 (LT5) Performance/Reconditioning/Modifications

Details here Summary of 90' Reconditioning/Modifications
https://cimg2.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...8130576a9f.jpg

You will notice this photo taken with engine running is not blury at all indicating absolutely NO VIBRATION
Of either the Alternator Pulley or Belt Tensioner Pulley.
See item #9 of Bling (Carter and Others)
https://cimg9.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...b25c0c3301.jpg
https://cimg0.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...12b74a8ce1.jpg
https://cimg1.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...0f03ef61ae.jpg

Last UPDATE of post 75 Dec, 2017

Dynomite 08-28-2012 11:10 PM

1991 (#1427) LT5 Specific Rebuild Tricks
 
1991 (#1427) LT5 Specific Rebuild Tricks

Summary of 91' Reconditioning/Modifications (#1427)

1. New Starter (Sep 2019).
2. New 60/80 amp No Start Relay installed.
3. New Ron Davis radiator.
4. New 180 deg thermostat.
5. New Water pump.
6. New Red Samco hoses.
7. New Stainless powder coated cross over pipe.
8. New Modified Fuel Pressure Regulator (Sep 2019).
9. New Serpentine Belt (Gates K060798).
10. New Jeffvette braided stainless steel oil cooler lines.
11. New 200 amp alternator.
12. New Randy Woods Aluminum power steering pump pulley.
13. New Randy Woods Aluminum water pump pulley.
14. New Front cover oil seal.
15. New Primary timing chain.
16. New Primary timing chain guide.
17. New coils.
18. New LT5 plug wires.
19. New plugs NGK Iridium BKR5EIX.
20. New Randy Woods LT5X Head Studs.
21. New LH chain tension.
22. New RH chain tension (new style.)
23. New Jeffvette Billet aluminum Camshaft Retainers.
24. New Mellings JB 2236 Lifters.
25. New Elite Oil catch can.
26. New Revolution Marines Pre Oiler.
27. New RC SL4-205 injectors on fuel rails with new "O" rings.
28. New SW headers ZR1CORVOR.
29. New SW exhaust ZR1CHAMSW.
30. New Crankshaft rear oil seal housing gasket.
31. New Crankshaft rear oil seal.
32. New Center Force pressure plate.
33. New Center Force unsprung clutch plate.
34. New Throwout bearing.
35. New 95' ZF S6-40 Transmission.
36. New C4 Beam Plates.
37. New Differential oil drain plug (drilled and tapped).
38. New Differential oil drain plug.
39. New Brake pads in C5 Z06 calipers.
40. New Nitto NT 555 Extreme Performance FRONT.
41. New Nitto NT 555R Drag Radials REAR.
42. New Billet Aluminum oil cap.
43. New Cam Cover PCV FIlters from Marc Haibeck.
44. SS Air Intake Added (George Braml).
45. New Chrome Dip Stick Tube (LT5-1935).
46. New LED tail/brake lights (48 LED per light).
47. New Billet aluminum tail light louvers.
48. New LED CHMSL lights (6 LED per bulb).
49. Fluids Zerex Original 1825 on label antifreeze.
50. Fluids Mobile 1 75W-90 Differential oil (limited slip.
51. Fluids Mobil 1 M1-207 Oil filter.
52. Fluids Amsoil 10W-40 AMO Engine oil.
53. Fluids Castrol TWS 10W-60 Transmission oil .
54. Eliminated Secondary actuators.
55. Eliminated Secondary vacuum system.
56. Eliminated Plenum coolant.
57. Eliminated Throttle body coolant.
58. Eliminated Air Induction system.
59. Eliminated CATS.
60. Upgraded Powder coated air horn.
61. Upgraded Powder coated throttle body.
62. Upgraded Engraved throttle body (Carter.).
63. Upgraded Cam timing 114In 108Ex .
64. Upgraded Powder coated plenum.
65. Upgraded Powder coated injector housings.
66. Upgraded Powder coated coolant manifolds.
67. Upgraded Engraved coolant manifolds (Carter).
68. Upgraded Ported injector housings/plenum (Locobob).
69. Upgraded Ported heads/injector housing (Locobob).
70. Upgraded Ported Air Horn (Locobob).
71. Upgraded Regrind Intake Camshaft Intake .236 .425 (Pete).
72. Upgraded Regrind Exhaust Camshaft Exhaust .220 .425 (Pete.)
73. Upgraded Valves reconditioned.
74. Upgraded C5 Z06 calipers and Wilwood two piece rotors.
75. Upgraded C5 Z06 calipers repainted.
76. Upgraded Bose radio/CD player.
77. Upgraded Door amplifyers.
78. Relocated Oil Pressure Sensor.
79. Like New Red hard top from my 90 L98.

Photos and descriptions of Specific Rebuild Tricks for a 1991 LT5 engine starting with installation of Piston Sleeves and New Pistons are provided. This section will contain mostly photos of the Rebuild process with specifics on bolt torque, Loctite and Sealants. Specific Rebuild Techniques are highlighted with photos. This section is continually upgraded with the best methods described for each of the Post Heading Topics (Post #76 - Post #95).

Specific Modifications.
LT5 Eliminated Systems
LT5 Added Systems

The photo coverage of Engine installation (post # 87) is most important (engine removal can be envisioned from that description) see the first step associated with engine removal and last step of engine installation associated with the Wiper Motor How to Replace the Wiper Motor

https://cimg3.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...8976956237.jpghttps://cimg2.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...c0a614f148.jpg

Specific TIPS/cautions will be enumerated near the end of each post in (Notes:).

LT5 SPECIFIC REBUILD TRICKS
Post 76 - LT5 Rebuild Tricks
Post 77 - New Piston Sleeve and Piston
Post 78 - Timing Chain Guides Installation
Post 79 - Timing Chain Idler Sprocket Lubrication and Installation
Post 80 - Front Cover, OPRV Cover, Water Pump, Harmonic Balancer
Post 81 - Fywheel, Clutch, Bell Housing
Post 82 - Checking for Oil Leaks/Make SS Braided Oil Lines
Post 83 - Installing Heads and Camshafts
Post 84 - Camshaft Timing
Post 85 - Camshaft Timing Detailed Tricks
Post 86 - Cam Covers and Injector Housings Installation
Post 87 - Installing Headers
Post 88 - Installing Engine In ZR1
Post 89 - ECM Chip and Other Electrical Connectors
Post 90 - Alternator, AC Pump, Power Steering Pump
Post 91 - Installing Fuel Rails
Post 92 - Installing Plenum
Post 93 - Coolant
Post 94 - Preliminary Starting Checks
Post 95 - Engine Running First Time Checks

Last UPDATE of post 76 Sep, 2019

Dynomite 08-28-2012 11:11 PM

Installing New Piston Sleeve/Liner and Piston
 
Installing New Piston Sleeve/Liner and Piston (Information provided by Ben - bdw18_123)

1. How much Loctite 565 did you use and where?
The LT5 manual calls for a 12mm (.47 in.) wide band of sealer around the entire circumference of the liner, 25.4mm (1.0 in.) from the base of the liner (the parts that touch the surface when you set the liner down).
https://cimg8.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...0b1b7c9337.jpg

However, before you glue the liner in, you have to set the liner in place without glue first and measure the liner 'standout height' to make sure it is within spec. This is extremely critical because the head gasket can compensate for only a very small variance between the liners and cylinder case deck.

IMPORTANT!
Liner must be installed with flats positioned 90 degrees to crankshaft axis (flats facing front and rear of cylinder case).
Flats of adjacent liners should be parallel so that a small gap exists between them.

MEASURE
Measure liner standout height. This distance from the cylinder case deck to the lower ridge at the top of the liner should be 0.001 - 0.003 in. If standout height is not within specification, inspect liner ridge for damage, dirt or burrs. Clean as required. Recheck standout height. If still not within specification, Inspect Cylinder case liner seat for damage, dirt or burrs. Clean as required. Recheck standout height. If still not within specification, Replace cylinder liner. Recheck standout height.

Measure the liner for out-of-round and taper (a new liner should be OK in this regard).
Once the standout height is within spec, the liner can be glued in place.

2. Do all the sleeves fit the same way or does it depend on a cylinder by cylinder basis?
The cutouts are symmetrical at the base of the liner. The flats of each liner should be facing each other.
https://cimg9.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...231a1b7eb9.jpghttps://cimg2.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...ab5bc9ef8a.jpg

3. Can you just push that new sleeve/liner in or does that take some clamping to get the new sleave in place? Or tapping in with wood block and hammer?
You shouldn't need to tap or hit the liner at all to put it in place. It should just slide right in real easily. The only reason you need the puller to remove a liner is because of the glue.

4. Do you have to hold that new liner in place for how long?
The manual doesn't mention any specific time frame, it just says to install the cylinder liner retainers and leave them in place until head installation. You can make liner retainers using sockets and the head bolts.

5. Did you hone the new sleeve/liner to make sure the new rings seat?
No, because the manual specifically says: "DO NOT hone cylinder liners!", which I assume is due to the hardened nikasil coating. Completely different deal compared to what you would do in this case on, say, an iron block. So yeah, definitely don't do that.

6. Which way do the rings go on the piston?
Top compression ring should be installed with chamfer (or bevel) facing downward.
Second compression ring should be installed with manufacturer mark (TOP) facing upward.
Rings should be installed with gaps spaced approximately 120 degrees apart from one another.

7. Installing Piston
The Ring Comressor is closed around the piston after the rings are installed. The inside of the New Piston Sleeve/Liner and New Piston outside diameter (including rings) are lubricated with engine oil. The Piston with Ring Compressor is then set in place inside the New Piston Sleeve/Liner with the Ring Compressor sitting in contact with the top of the New Piston Sleeve (not inside the sleeve/liner). The New Piston is then gently (making sure the piston is not cocked one way or the other) tapped into the New Piston Sleeve with the wooden end of a hammer.

https://cimg5.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...7ddfa4cab8.jpg

Notes:
1. The arrow on the top of the piston should point towards the front of the engine and the chamfer (or bevel) on the journal end of the rod should face the crankshaft counterweight.

[b]2. The Connecting Rod Bolts should not be reused as they are stressed into yield during assembly. The Connecting Rod Bolts (threads and cap lubricated with engine oil) are torqued to 22 ft-lbs + 80 deg additional turn (no loctite). The original Connecting Rod Bolts have a 12 pt 14 mm head and new ARP Connecting Rod Bolts from Marc Haibeck have a 12 pt 13 mm head.

3. Lubricate both halves of the Rod Bearings and the Crankshaft Journal with engine oil before assembly.

Last UPDATE of post 77 Dec, 2017

Dynomite 08-28-2012 11:11 PM

Timing Chain Guides Installation
 
Timing Chain Guides Installation

https://cimg8.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...bd1b817104.jpghttps://cimg1.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...48eb736ee2.jpg


Magnetic 10 mm deep socket used to secure the guides to the enigne block.

https://cimg2.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...63cc43d2f0.jpghttps://cimg5.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...5e8b596564.jpg

Notes:
1. Use Magnetic 10 mm deep socket to replace the timing chain guide bolts on the two fixed guides (top left and bottom right). This prevents loss of bolt within the front cover during initial installation.

2. The top left guide was positioned high against the 8 mm bolt fixing the guide in place. The bottom right guide was positioned low against the 8 mm bolt fixing the guide in place.

Last UPDATE of post 78 Dec, 2017

Dynomite 08-28-2012 11:13 PM

Timing Chain Idler Sprocket Lubrication and Installation
 
Timing Chain Idler Sprocket Lubrication and Installation

1. LT5 Timing Chain Idler Sprocket Lubrication.

A #20 Torx can be used to remove the small Torx screw holding the bearing cover in place on the Timing Chain Idler Sprocket. Place two of the Timing Chain Idler Sprocket bolts (10 mm Head x 8 mm x 100 mm) into the Idler Sprocket holes with the Heads of those two bolts in a vice. Remove the #20 Torx screw. Use Red Loctite when replacing the #20 Torx screw.

There is an oil path around one of the three 10 mm Head (8 mm) x 100 mm bolts that attaches the inner race of the Timing Chain Idler Sprocket to the engine case (The distance between two 8 mm x 100 mm bolts is smaller so the Timing Chain Idler Sprocket inner race can only be attached to the engine case one way).

This oil path is vented from the bolt hole into the needle bearing area of the inner race. The Timing Chain Idler Sprocket inner race can be attached to the engine case in only one orientation assuring that the oil pressure from the engine case is directed to the Timing Chain Idler Sprocket Bolt hole that is vented to the needle bearings..

https://cimg8.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...5c454e29ec.jpg

The two sets of Timing Chain Idler Sprocket needle bearings can be seen in the photos.

http://https://cimg0.ibsrv.net/gimg/...e5853f4958.jpghttps://cimg1.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...8820510338.jpg

The Timing Chain Idler Sprocket oil pathway entrance to needle bearings from bolt hole to the inner race (left) and exit from sprocket (right) can be seen in the small ports of the inner race and outer sprockets.

https://cimg2.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...8a7dfd9d11.jpghttps://cimg1.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...8820510338.jpg

2. LT5 Timing Chain Idler Sprocket Installation (Primary Timing Chain and Tensioner).

Included here are the Primary Timing Chain, Primary Chain Tensioner, Left and Right Timing Chains. A bit of red loctite was applied to the first threads of each of the three 8 mm x 100 mm bolts that hold the idler sprocket to the engine block which were then torqued to 19 ft-lbs.

Primary Chain Tensioner.

https://cimg5.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...4edb66d789.jpghttps://cimg7.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...85574b7665.jpg

Notes:
1. Make sure the small oil pathways related to the Timing Chain Idler Sprocket are clear of anything that might block such a small oil passage.

Resetting Timing Chain Tensioners See Setting/Installing the Chain Tensioners Tricks

Last UPDATE of post 79 Dec, 2017

Dynomite 08-28-2012 11:13 PM

Installing Front Cover, OPRV Cover, Water Pump, Harmonic Balancer
 
Installing Front Cover, OPRV Cover, Water Pump, Harmonic Balancer, Oil Pan

1. Front Cover.
Lubricate the front cover oil seal and harmonic balancer collar with engine oil.
The front cover bolts are all installed with loctite and torqed to 19 ft-lbs.

https://cimg1.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...11cf7c6d64.jpghttps://cimg3.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...cb0e98b5ae.jpg

2. Harmonic Balancer.
The Harmonic balancer is initially installed using a standard harmonic balancer bolt welded to a longer threaded shaft (the Harmonic Balancer bolt alone is not long enough to initially set the Harmonic Balancer). Use Red Loctite (262) and torque the Harmonic Balancer bolt to 148 ft-lbs (block of wood jammed into the crankshaft area with oil pan removed). Be carefull the timing chains are not locked on the timing chain idler sprocket preventing the crankshaft from turning.

https://cimg4.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...a9f01e0fa8.jpg

3. Water Pump Installation.

I use a very thin coat of Permatex 300 Form A Gasket on each side of the Water Pump gasket and IH coolant manifold gaskets (unless you have eliminated TB coolant) before installing. I use a drop of Blue Loctite 242 on all water pump bolts and torque all water pump bolts 18 ft-lbs. NO LEAKS

https://cimg9.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...647b49f2d3.jpg

https://cimg0.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...75fbd1ea69.jpghttps://cimg1.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...8fe1f02f95.jpg

Notes:
1. I use a very light coat of Permatex on all gaskets in contact with oil or water coating the mating surfaces in contact with the gasket.
2. A trick is to make sure the half moon key slides easily in the key way before installing the Harmonic Balancer. Make sure the alignment of the key way and key is perfect before installing the harmonic balancer. Check as the Harmonic Balancer is pushed onto the crankshaft that the key remains in position as long as you can see the key.
3. Use Red Loctite (262) on the threads of the Harmonic Balancer crankshaft bolt.
4. Torque the front cover 8 mm (10 mm head) bolts to 19 ft-lbs.
5. Torque the Harmonic Balancer bolt to 148 ft-bs.
6. Be carefull the timing chains are not locked on the timing chain idler sprocket preventing the crankshaft from turning.

Last UPDATE of post 80 Dec, 2017

Dynomite 09-14-2012 06:34 AM

Oil Pan (Oil level and Knock Sensor), Flywheel, Clutch, Bell Housing
 
Oil Pan (Oil level and Knock Sensor), Flywheel, Clutch, Bell Housing

1. Oil Pan.

Install the oil pan making sure the large "O" ring is positioned on top of the Oil Pump Intake housing bolted to the bottom of the oil pan. I use a very light coat of Permatex on both sides of the Oil Pan gasket.

Install the Oil Level sensor on Oil Pan (drivers side). Install the Knock sensor just above the Oil Level sensor on the engine block (drivers side). The Knock sensor is located on drivers side just behind motor mount above oil level sensor (oil level sensor on oil pan and knock sensor on engine block). Use a 22 mm socket.

https://cimg2.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...5653d75645.jpg

2. Flywheel, Clutch, Bell Housing.

Last UPDATE of post 81 Dec, 2017

Dynomite 09-14-2012 06:36 AM

Checking for Oil Leaks/Making your own SS Braided Oil Lines
 
Checking for Oil Leaks/Making your own SS Braided Oil Lines

1. Checking for Potential Oil Leaks.

OPRV (Oil Pressure Regulating Valve Cover)......It will appear that the oil pan front bolts are loose and leaking at gasket.
Oil Pressure Switch and Oil Pressure Sensor.....
Cam Covers.....
Camshaft circular rubber plugs (two each end of each Head).....
Oil Cooler Hoses/Connections.....(see item #3 below)

https://cimg4.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...0d389a0029.jpg

There is an Oil Level Sensor on Oil Pan....
But I would say the one that stumped me the most was that OPRV cover. And prolly the hardest to get at (two 8 mm bolts).

Marc Haibeck Oil Leak Summary

https://cimg8.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...104a2ab258.jpghttps://cimg9.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...bdcc1cc896.jpg
https://cimg0.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...9a1c1296dd.jpg
2. Using Permatex 300.

I use a very light coat of Permatex 300 Form A Gasket on both surfaces of mating parts of all assemblies in contact with oil or water.

https://cimg0.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...75fbd1ea69.jpg

3. How to make your own SS Braided Hydraulic Lines with reusable fittings.

SS Braided Oil Cooler Hoses and Fittings

Tools.

One 10 inch cresent wrench (Box Wrench is best), One vice, Air compressor, Angle Grinder (with Cut Off wheel). The best tool for cutting the SS Braided Hose is a Small Angle Grinder (with Cut Off wheel) which does not fray the SS braids on the hose ends. It is also best to use an appropriate size Box Wrench on the Hose Fittings (box end) to minimize leaving marks on the fittings. I use Aeroquip Reusable Fittings and SS Braided hose from Summit Racing.

https://cimg2.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...9b567d6aa8.jpg

To remove existing 12AN x 3/4 NPT fittings from the Oil Filter Housing use a 1 inch box wrench (combination box/open end) with the box end on the fitting interlocked with a 3/4 inch box wrench on the other end. This will provide the leverage/torque without excessive horizontal pressure to remove the fittings. I use permatex when installing the New 10AN x 3/4 inch NPT fittings into the Oil Filter Adapter (lower fitting first). Let the ZR-1 sit over night before removing the existing Oil Cooler Hoses to minimize oil spilling.

Use of 10AN Hose/Fittings

I use all 10AN Aeroquip Reusable Fittings and 10AN Hose....The 10AN SS Braided hose I use has ID of 9/16 inch and the 12 AN SS Braided Hose has ID 5/8 inch. As it turns out.....the 12AN hose with 5/8 inch ID is identical to stock Oil Cooler Hose having ID of 5/8 inch. Also I noted the ID Fittings on the stock Oil Cooler Hoses on the Oil Cooler end where the tubing is located is less ID than the SS Braided 10AN Oil Lines.

The Stock Oil Cooler hoses have 6 inches of steel tubing on Oil Cooler end that are identical in ID (9/16 inch) to SS Braided 10AN. Further, the Stock Oil Cooler hoses are 17 inches long as compared to 13 inches long for SS Braided Oil Cooler Hoses. The Oil Filter Adapter end of the Stock Oil Cooler hoses is only about 1/2 inch ID at the fittings. Which if you add all that up I would say the total head loss in the stock Oil Cooler hoses is about identical to the SS Braided 10AN with Aeroquip 10AN Fittings.

Measuring SS Braided Hose Length.

A. Follow Step #3 below and make up one end of each SS Braided Hose (cut longer than required to reach the Oil Cooler Adapter) with the 45 degree Aeroquip Reusable Hose Ends.
B. Install and snug up but not tight the 45 degree Aeroquip 10AN Hose ends onto the 10AN x 3/4 inch NPT fittings installed into the Oil Filter Adapter.
C. Take the free SS Braided Hose ends curved freely around the radiator housing as they would look in the final installation. Mark the SS Braided Free Hose Ends along Red Line A and Red Line B as shown.
D. Cut these Hose Ends about 1/4 inch longer than that mark.
E. Install the 90 degree Aeroquip 10AN hose ends as in step #3 below.
F. After installation of all four 10AN Aeroquip hose ends is complete, install the 90 degree hose ends on the Oil Cooler Adapter.
G. Tighten the 10AN Fittings into the Oil Cooler Adapter (18mm x 1.5 or 6AN Straight Fittings).
H. Tighten the 10AN 90 degree Aeroquip Fittings onto the 10AN male fittings of the Oil Cooler Adapter at the angles shown by CD and EF.
Make sure there is a small gap between the bottom 10AN 90 Degree Fitting and the AC Line and the two 10AN 90 degree fittings (top and bottom)
I. Install the other end of the SS Braided Hoses 45 degree Aeroquip Fittings onto the respective Oil Filter Adapter male fittings and tighten.
J. Now making sure the "O" rings are in place on the Oil Cooler Adapter (I use Permatex on the adapter "O" ring face), position and the adapter on the face of the Oil Cooler and insert the 6mm x 1.0 x 35 mm SS Allen head bolt with SS washer into the Oil Cooler Adapter and tighten the bolt. No modification of the Fiberglass Radiator Housing is required since the Oil Cooler Adapter is installed on the Oil Cooler AFTER the fittings are connected and tightened on the Oil Cooler Adapter.

https://cimg3.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...5909521092.jpg

General SS Hose Assembly with Re-Usable Fittings.

1. Place SS Braided hose in vice and cut SS Braided hose to length using Angle Grinder with Cut Off wheel. Angle grinder is preferred since minimal SS wires are left free of the cut.
2. Make sure NO SS Braided wires enter the hose end and make sure ALL loose SS Braided wires are ground flush with end of hose. Keep the hose in the vice with about 2 inches on the free end out of the vice. (Clean the inside of the hose end Cut Off before going further with Cotton Cue Tip .
3. Take the AN reusable hose fitting and unscrew the male part from the female part. The other end of the male part will have an NPT pipe thread or "O" ring seal thread size (AN) as desired.
4. Take the AN reusable hose fitting female part and screw/push onto the SS Braided hose (counterclockwise) by hand pushing onto the hose as you rotate the female hose fitting counterclockwise. Aeroquip Nickel Plated Aluminum Reusable Fittings are not threaded but ARE serrated requiring a push onto the hose only. Make sure ALL SS Braids are inside the hose fitting just pushed onto the hose.
5. Screw/push the AN female reusable hose fitting onto the hose fitting such that the hose is at a depth into the female fitting as defined by the lines on the female fitting surface.
6. Lubricate the inside diameter of the SS Braided hose with oil through the end of the female fitting.
7. Insert the male reusable hose fitting into the lubricated hose through the end of the female fitting.
8. Push the male fitting into the hose as you rotate the male fitting clockwise using a cresent wrench (Box Wrench preferred). Once the threads are caught, continue rotating the male fitting into the hose untill approximately 1/16 inch space is left between the hexigon of the male fitting and female fitting.
9. Install the second hydraulic reusable hose fitting on the other end of the hose as per steps 2 through 8 above.
10. Last...but not least....take an air hose (Air Compressor) and blow the hose clear to make sure you have a clean assembly (if the SS Braided hose is not too long look through the hose end to end for any debree). You now have a SS Braided hydraulic hose with fittings good for maybe 2,000 psi hydraulic pressure more or less.

Parts Required for SS Braided Oil Cooler Lines with Re-Usable Fittings.

The SS Oil Cooler Lines are very easy to make up in SS Braided hose using Aeroquip reusable fittings and SS Braided hose available from Summit Racing. The Aeroquip Fittings are Swivel so self aligning when installing.

1. Use two 10 AN Stainless Steel Braided hose
2. use two Aeroquip Reusable Hose Ends, 90 Degree, -10 AN Hose to Female -10 AN, Aluminum, Nickel Plated
3. Use two Aeroquip Reusable Hose Ends, 45 Degree, -10 AN Hose to Female -10 AN, Aluminum, Nickel Plated
4. On the Oil Filter Adapter remove the 12 AN Flare fittings and use two 10AN Flare to 3/4 inch NPT
5. Oil Cooler Adapter
With the secondchance design use one "O" ring on each 10 AN Flare fitting with 18x1.5 metric thread.
With the Jeffvette design use one Dowty Washer identical to Oil Pan Drain Plug Washer on each 10 AN to 3/8" BSPP Straight Adapter.
6. One 6mm x 1.0 x 35 mm SS Allen head bolt
7. One 6 mm SS washer
8. Two "O" rings for the Aluminum adapter manifold to oil cooler interface.

The first seven items can be found at Summit Racing.

Secondchance Design of Oil Cooler Adapter..................Jeffvette Design of Oil Cooler Adapter

https://cimg5.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...75f5d2373c.jpghttps://cimg6.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...57c980344f.jpg
https://cimg7.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...58cb5dd648.jpghttps://cimg8.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...3628a170b9.jpg

I have never had one of these hydraulic lines with Aeroquip Reusable Fittings leak and they are much much tougher than original crimped fittings and easily replaced or adjusted if you want to at some point make them longer or shorter (the fittings are reusable and swivel). And......you will find a much better routing of the lines if you make them yourself by looking at the routing of the existing Hydraulic Lines. The Aeroquip Reusable Fittings come in all sizes and angles to fit any situation. You can make your own oil cooler lines as shown here and Power Steering Lines or any other hydraulic line you might need on the ZR-1.

As an aside, I use the similar Aeroquip reusable fittings and Aeroquip 1509 hydraulic hose on all my farm implements and tractors. I make up all my implement hydraulic lines often replacing relatively new lines that come with the implements with my own lines that are much more dependable under extreme usage. We are talking hydraulic pressures over 2,000 psi on the hydraulics of some of these implements when the cylinders reach the stops.

Once you experiment with making your own hydraulic lines with some using SS Braided hose you will never look back at buying ready made hydraulic lines again. All you need is a vice, hand grinder (or even a hack saw will work), and a couple box wrenches of appropriate size. Oh...and an air compressor to blow clean the lines after assembly.

https://cimg9.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...6385249804.jpg
Last UPDATE of post 82 Dec, 2017

Dynomite 09-14-2012 06:36 AM

Installing Heads and Camshafts
 
Installing Heads and Camshafts

1. LT5X Studs.

LT5X Studs from Randy Woods were used replacing the standard Head Bolts. With oiled washers the nuts were torqued from the center outward starting at 30 ft-lbs, 70 ft-lbs, 110 ft-lbs. The nuts were then retorqued several times from the center outward at 110 ft-lbs. The two nuts below the camshaft position sensor were threaded on the studs flush with the stud top for clearance. Each LT5X Stud can be turned with an Allen Head wrench to assure the full threaded depth of the stud into the block. Once the stud is threaded into the block, the nut is torqued without any further rotation of the LT5X Stud.

https://cimg1.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...4bf6c73737.jpghttps://cimg2.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...6092a9376a.jpg

2. Camshaft Install.

Just a trick I learned messing with camshafts and lifters on a fully lubricated head even with no oil pressure. The lesson learned is when you reinstall camshafts, tighten them down with no piston at TDC and leave them for a couple days to bleed down the lifters to base circle before trying to turn over the engine.

Harmonic Balancer was set at 51 deg (after verification of TDC at 0 deg). All camshafts were initially set by pinning with a quarter of a pin hole advanced in both exhaust camshafts to achieve close to 114 deg BTDC Intake and 110 deg ATDC Exhaust.

https://cimg3.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...25772d3268.jpghttps://cimg4.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...03df712a07.jpg

3. Lifter Install.

Reground Intake Camshafts and Stock Exhaust Camshafts where intalled. Stock Lifters were used with the exhaust Camshafts and Mellings JB 2236 Lifters were used with the reground Intake Camshafts.

https://cimg5.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...7f2f4c5f48.jpg

Notes:
1. Lifter Bleed Down.
When you remove Lifters, the lifters being spring loaded, extended (to full uncompressed height) sucking in oil from the oil galley. Essentially the lifters thought there was clearance to compensate for so they locked themselves to a higher position just removing the camshaft with no oil pressure.
2. Camshaft Installation.
Install the Camshafts (neutral postion with all lifters only against base circle) and most (not all) of the valves on that bank were locked extended about 1/8 inch which extension bled down overnight as the valves on that bank this morning were essentially all closed. If the engine had been turned over immediately after installing the camshaft, the valves would have extended further than normal because the lifter had extended compensating for clearance that was actually not there
3. Lifters Source.
Type in JB2236 in search at Clarks Discount and you will find JB2236 lifters for $10.15 each ;)

Last UPDATE of post 83 Dec, 2017

Dynomite 09-14-2012 06:37 AM

Camshaft Timing
 
Camshaft Timing

1. Initial Set Up.
Harmonic Balancer was set at 51 deg (after verification of TDC at 0 deg) marked on Harmonic Balancer (51 deg BTDC is also marked on Harmonic Balancer as shown).

Temporary Mechanical Timing Chain Tensioners were installed which will be replaced with the oil pressurized Timing Chain Tensioners after Camshaft timing is completed. Setting/Installing the Chain Tensioners Tricks

Left and Right Chain Tensioners Reset
(install with oil port top side)
.......................................Drivers Side Mechanical Chain Tensioner Installed
https://cimg6.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...ced879c9db.jpghttps://cimg7.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...cea976842b.jpg

51 deg BTDC marked on Harmonic Balancer................Passenger Side Mechanical Chain Tensioner Installed

https://cimg4.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...446b105e7f.jpghttps://cimg5.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...0a8053d92e.jpg

2. Pinning the Camshafts.
All camshafts were initially set by pinning (using a 15/64 drill bit). The Exhaust Camshafts were rotated one venier pin hole clockwise (about 3.2 deg crankshaft rotation) for both exhaust camshafts to achieve close to 110 deg BTDC Exhaust (114 deg BTDC Stock setting). LT5 Camshaft Specifications and Camshaft General Timing

15/64 Drill Bit used as pin........................................ .Venier Plate Pin Holes each 3.2 deg +or- on Crankshaft

https://cimg7.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...a91ad22f5e.jpghttps://cimg8.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...7736045137.jpg

3. More accurate Camshaft Timing using the Degree Wheel.
Camshaft Timing using Degree Wheel
Exhaust Camshafts were set at 110 deg BTDC and Intake Camshafts were set at 114 deg ATDC.
a. The Camshaft Timing with the Degree Wheel is accomplished utilizing Cylinder #1 for the Drivers side (1,3,5,7) and Cylinder #6 for the Passenger side (2,4,6,8).
b. The Harmonic Balancer is rotated clockwise (looking at it from front of engine) to within 20 deg of Maximum Cam Lift (either Exhaust or Intake Camshafts).
c. The Dial Gauge is then attached to bolt (8mmx1.25) inserted in a Cam Cover Bolt Hole between INTAKE and EXAUST Camshafts as shown (number six cylinder shown) with the plunger of the Dial Gauge resting on top of the Lifter (Dial Gauge plunger free to move).
d. The Harmonic Balancer is then slowly rotated clockwise and the first reading of the dial gauge noted.
e. The Degrees at which this cam lift occured is also marked on the Degree Wheel BEFORE maximum lift.
f. The Harmonic Balancer is then slowly rotated clockwise again past Maximum Cam Lift to the same cam lift as noted in (d) above and the Degree Wheel marked a second time
.
g. The difference in Degrees between the two marks on the Degree Wheel is divided by two and the center between the two marks determined (and marked on the Degree Wheel as MAXIMUM Cam Lift Degrees).
h. That last Degree Wheel mark is the Degrees of Crankshaft Rotation at which the Cams are at maximum lift (Exhaust or Intake).

See next post Camshaft Timing (Locking the Camshaft in Position)

Back side of Dial Gauge set on top of Lifter............................Front side of Dial Gauge set on top of Lifter

https://cimg0.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...2c072a05ad.jpghttps://cimg1.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...5279c27a76.jpg

Notes:
1. Once the camshaft timing is set use a new camshaft sprocket bolt (Marc Haibeck Camshaft ARP bolts with 12 pt 9/16 socket or Jerry's Gaskets Camshaft ARP bolts with 6 pt 9/16 socket). I torque to an initial 20 ft-lbs and check timing with degree wheel.
2. Use Red Loctite 262 on the NEW camshaft sprocket bolts (Lubricate the washer only) and clean the existing threads of the camshaft with cue tips.
3. See next post Camshaft Timing (Locking the Camshaft in Position)

Last UPDATE of post 84 Dec, 2017

Dynomite 09-14-2012 06:39 AM

Camshaft Timing (Locking the Camshafts) and Camshaft Lubrication
 
Camshaft Timing (Locking the Camshafts) and Camshaft Lubrication

1. Locking the Venier Plates.
It is difficult to tighten the camshaft bolts without moving the venier plate on the camshaft with the flat of the venier plate somewhere within the 3 deg of play (6 deg of crankshaft rotation). The venier plate can rotate back and forth on the camshaft on that Camshaft Flat. The Trick is to lock the venier plate flat in the most clockwise direction (clockwise looking at front of engine) tight against the flat of the camshaft as shown.

a. For a (90-92 LT5) there is 6 deg of crankshaft play when the camshaft flat rotates 3 deg against the flat of the venier plate (flat to flat).
b. It has also been calculated that each pin hole advance or retard moves the camshaft 1.6 deg (3.2 deg at crankshaft).
See item #3 Camshaft Specific Timing Using Degree Wheel
c. Set up with the camshaft venier plate rotated against the camshaft flat (clockwise looking at front of engine). Forget about the 6 deg of crankshaft play (3 deg in the venier plate flat to flat) relative to camshaft movement for the moment.
d. The worst you could be off (INTAKE Camshaft 114 deg ATDC example) would be 1.6 deg crankshaft rotation if you were at or greater than 115.6 deg ATDC or at or less than 112.4 deg ATDC first check. Just leave well enough alone (any degrees between 115.6 and 112.4 deg ATDC). Adding the 3.2 Crankshaft Degrees (One Venier Pin hole) to 112.4 deg results in 115.6 deg which would be worst case as you may be anwhere in between 115.6 deg and 112.4 deg. Either is very close (within 1.6 deg of desired 114 deg ATDC) and within measurement error (determining maximum lifter lift by any method within 1 deg is very difficult) of 114 deg ATDC desired INTAKE camshaft timing or 110 deg BTDC EXHAUST camshaft timing. See Camshaft Timing Additional Tricks

Venier Plate locked clockwise against Flat of Camshaft........Venier Plate Flats (93' - 95' has double Flats)

https://cimg5.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...7632031883.jpghttps://cimg8.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...7736045137.jpg

See step 5c of LT5 Camshaft Timing Additional Tricks

2. Locking the Camshaft Bolts.
Rotate the Harmonic Balancer clockwise so box wrench is tight counterclockwise on camshafts and venier flats are tight clockwise on flats of camshaft (looking at front of engine toward rear of engine).
Mark the Camshaft Sprockets and Camshaft to make sure the camshaft has not rotated after the Camshaft Bolts are tightend.

Mark the Camshaft sprocket and camshaft
https://cimg8.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...6332ec9d18.jpg

On Passenger side, torque camshaft bolts (80 deg rotation approximately 100 ft-lbs torque Marc's ARP and 80 ft-lbs torque Jerry's ARP) holding opposite end of camshaft with 19 mm Box Wrench (passenger side) with wooden spacer between end of Box Wrench and opposite Head. On Drivers side, torque camshaft bolts (Marc's or Jerry's) holding opposite end of camshaft with 19 mm Box Wrench (drivers side) with wooden spacer between end of Box Wrench and floor.

Passenger side (cams locked from rotating)....................Drivers side (cams locked from rotating)
https://cimg9.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...e42e28c4b3.jpghttps://cimg0.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...f5ec4d59d9.jpg

3. Camshaft Lubrication.

The Camshafts are lubricated (journals) from a single port in center of Camshaft. The oil then flows through the center of the Camshaft to the three rear journals and two front journals. Using compressed air, apply air pressure to the center lubrication port of each Camshaft making sure the center of the camshafts are clear and air flows out each of the five journal lubrication ports of each Camshaft.

Lubrication Port of Head (One for each Camshaft)....................Lubrication Port on Camshaft
https://cimg1.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...133c29d5c9.jpghttps://cimg2.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...3b7f14844f.jpg

Three Journals of Each Camshaft (rear)......................Two Journals of Each Camshaft (front)
https://cimg4.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...02eb42ab78.jpghttps://cimg5.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...8d44001203.jpg

Notes:
1. As a test of the camshaft movement with tight timing chains, apply a small torque to the rear of the Camshaft with a 19mm box wrench with dial gauge in place on an appropriate lifter.
2. You will see lifter movement depending on the torque applied. This suggests Camshaft Timing is a bit of an art
3. The technique of locking the venier plate clockwise against the camshaft flat is the easiest way to assure very close camshaft timing within 1.6 deg and at the same time be assured the camshaft is tight against the flat of the venier plate in the direction of camshaft normal rotation.
4. Using compressed air, apply air pressure to the center lubrication port of each Camshaft making sure the center of the camshafts are clear and air flows out each of the five journal lubrication ports of each Camshaft.

Last UPDATE of post 85 Dec, 2017

Dynomite 09-14-2012 07:07 AM

Cam Covers (Filters and Wear Strips)
 
Cam Covers (Filters and Wear Strips).

1. Cam Cover Filters.

The vacuum in the PCV return line and the Cam Cover Vents are a bit different as the Cam Cover vent line is attached to the Air Horn and the PCV return line is attached to the Plenum behind the Throttle Body. That means at idle you get a lot of vacuum pulling on the dual PCV valves and almost zero pulling on Cam Cover vents. At Wide Open Throttle (WOT) you get about equal vacuum on both maybe. See PCV system (Need for Oil Catch Can)

I switched from Scotch Brite to Marc Haibeck's new Cam Cover Vent filter material Cam Cover Filters

https://cimg9.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...53f81ab1e1.jpg

2. Timing Chain Cam Cover Wear Strips
The wear strip consists of two parts....a guide with two small screws (use red loctite) and the wear strip clipped onto the guide shown for the Drivers side.

https://cimg0.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...79e0e4a441.jpg
https://cimg2.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...c65e29caf8.jpg

On the Passenger side Cam Cover, you can actually see the wear strip through the oil filler hole with oil cap removed. The Cam Cover Vent (square hole) is located between the wear strip and first spark plug hole (cylinder #2 in this case) .

The (Cam Cover Vent) to the right between the wear strip and first spark plug hole can be filled with Cam Cover Filters and held in place with wire clip inserted through the two small holes you can barely see top and bottom.

3. Clean and install the Camshaft Position Sensor on the Drivers Side of the engine. The "O" rings are cleaned and lubricated before installation.

https://cimg4.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...c08af7dc05.jpg

Last UPDATE of post 86 Dec, 2017

Dynomite 09-14-2012 07:09 AM

Installing Headers and Exhaust
 
Installing Headers and Exhaust

SW Headers ZR1CORVOR and SW Exhaust ZR1CHAMSW were installed in both the 90' and 91'

A. Headers.
for the 91' SW Headers were installed after installation of the Heads (engine out of car). The engine was removed with Headers installed. 14 of the 16 header bolts were used on each Header. For the 90' SW Headers were installed with engine in car.
https://cimg7.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...0cf64a9950.jpg

B. Stage 8 Locking Bolts.
Always use Stage 8 Exhaust Header Bolts with locks (Headers Only). Do not have to torque the Header Bolts too much as the locks will assure the bolts do not loosen. You can also use an Allen wrench on Stage 8 Bolts.

The Stage 8 Exhaust Header Bolts have 7/16 inch hex heads with a 3/16 Allen socket in the center. I use a 1/4 inch socket wrench with a swivel and several extension lengths as required to tighten the Stage 8 bolts. I do not use a torque wrench as that would be next to impossible to accomplish with the tight spaces around the Headers. I also use a 7/16 flex head ratchet wrench. Typically, the torque for an 8mm bolt would be 19 ft lbs.

Here are Locking Header Bolt Kits (LT5)

LT5 Summit Racing 8905
LT5 8mm x 1.25 The underhead length is 25 mm or about .98 inches

https://cimg8.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...01a9ea3c81.jpg

Use the Stage 8 header bolt keepers on all header bolts of Header Bolt Kit.

C. Installing Headers.

Just some tips you might have not thought about installing the NEW SW HEADERS......

Now to install SW....and with a 1/4 socket wrench and two extensions with two universals (sometimes) you can get more of those Stage 8 Exhaust Manifold Bolts on than you think. There was one I could not get the Stage 8 Locks on.

1. Clean ALL surfaces on both sides (Drivers and Passenger) of Exhaust ports. When installing the new Exhaust Manifold Gaskets do NOT put anything on the Gaskets as nothing is needed.

2. Do not forget the center stud with larger nut (90'-92' only). It is best to take that stud out if it did not already come out with the nut using vice grips not to damage the outer threads. Use Red Loctite on it and replace it because it goes into an oil galley. Screw the stud in tight with vice grips (Before you even lift Headers up in place) not to damage the outer thread first and let that set up for a bit before installing the nut. There is a bit of room on the stud where the spacer is between lower and top threads and where the header flange is that you can use vice grips at your will without causing issues. I think both ends of the stud are different in terms of available thread so NOTE that when removing the Stud .

3. Lift Headers in place in install loosely one Stage 8 bolt in center some where (with gasket installed) so you do not have to hang onto and support the headers while installing the rest of the Stage 8 Bolts (there are a couple places you CANNOT get a Stage 8 Bolt Installed which is fine). Slip the Stage 8 through the hole in headers with gasket installed (The Stage 8 will keep gasket in place as you raise Headers to Exhaust Manifold.

4. You do NOT need a torque wrench on the Stage 8 bolts when installing. And......you do NOT have to tighten TOO MUCH TORQUE when you are using Stage 8 Locks. I do use a bit of Anti-seize on the Stage 8 Header Bolts.

https://cimg9.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...9eb9d959d4.jpg

5. Modify those CAT shields (the ones with the two bolts going to the oil pan). Re-install them after you do a little cutting with cutoff wheel and grinder to shape as tight as you can around the Headers without contacting Headers.

https://cimg8.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...e061d3ce06.jpg

6. On the passenger side you might think you cannot install a Stage 8 in the front two holes of the Headers.......You Can as you can see up in front of the motor mount insulation and get that 1/4 socket with extensions up into that area.

7. Two get that passenger side 02 extension attached as provided by SW which is stuffed between engine mount and engine on passenger side......use a Hemostat. There is a clip on the connector that you do not want to break using a long thin screw driver to open when holding with Hemostat.

8. A 16 inch straight Hemostat (Ebay has many). On the Ebay Search....just type in Hemostat and the length you would like and also type in Curved or Straight (Hemostat 16 straight for this one). The beauty in addition to being sleek to reach tight spaces is that it can be locked (ratched locked) once you get hold of what you dropped.

https://cimg3.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...247446228b.jpg

Particularily useful for Stainless steel and Aluminum Nuts, Bolts and Washers.....as well as Stage 8 Locks that continue to drop in the process of installing them.

9. As you already determined....a magnet on a extendable shaft works perfectly for picking up any Stage 8 bolts that might fall in areas you think they cannot be retrieved.
https://cimg8.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...5a174aaacd.jpg

10. DO NOT FORGET to Inststall the Dip Stick Tube with new seal .

11. Tuck away from Headers ALL wiring and other lines that might come in contact with Headers. Use the Heat shields (item #5 above) to support lines as required. There are other heat shields for the fuel lines in place that can also be used to tuck 02 sensor wires behind. Use Nylon Ties to make sure those wires and lines do not move back toward the Headers. You DO NOT have to get that top bolt back in the Heat shield as it is well supported with the two bottom bolts of the Oil Pan.

12. Inspect the steering shaft and frame around the Newly Installed SW Headers for clearance as required.

13. Replace inner wheel liners middle and rear and do not forget the BOTTOM 10 mm Bolt in the rear liner.

14. Other Tools.....

I actually use 1/4 inch socket, 1/4 inch socket extensions, 1/4 inch socket wrench, and 1/4 inch universal as the 1/4 inch are much easier to work in tight areas. When you get to installing Headers....I sometimes use two universals and two extensions with one 1/4 inch ratchet wrench with Stage 8 Header bolts (it actually works).

https://cimg1.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...4104e1abbc.jpghttps://cimg3.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...d68ccdc3c5.jpg

D. Installing Exhaust.

It is very difficult to hang the exhaust pipes using stock spring loaded hangers without the exhaust being tight against the differential. I did no want that heat directly on the differential and did not want the pipes moving up and down on the spring loaded hangers banging against differential. This was a way of FIXING the gap between the exhaust pipes (each exhaust pipe) and differential to 1/4 inch.

The copper pipe is placed across the tops of the exhaust pipes allowing the spring loaded hangers to pull and hold the exhaust pipes against the copper pipe while creating a 1/4 inch gap between the exhaust pipes and the differential. Copper does not corrode and transmits heat very well. The copper pipe is captured by the four bolts of the rear Leaf Spring bracket.

SW Headers ZR1CORVOR and SW Exhaust ZR1CHAMSW were installed in both the 90' and 91' with this copper pipe setup.

The Copper pipe spacer was added (two each 1 x 6 inch copper pipe with coupler and end caps) to keep SW exhaust 1/4 inch
away from riding against Differential Housing. The end caps and coupler actually keep the spacer in place without any ties.


https://cimg6.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...eea829166f.jpghttps://cimg0.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...b78dd6203d.jpg

I set the two rear stock spring hangers so they pull the exaust up tight against the copper spacer. Also set the rear "L" hanger so there is freedom of the exhaust system to move to the rear at least 1/2 inch when hot.

Post 45 - Exhaust System Replace with Headers

Last UPDATE of post 87 Dec, 2017

Dynomite 09-14-2012 07:09 AM

Installing Engine In ZR-1
 
Installing Engine In ZR-1

1. The first two items to be removed before the engine can be lifted (with Headers Installed) are the Wiper Motor and AC Temperature Sensor (Passenger Side Fire Wall). The last items to be installed will be the Wiper Motor and AC Temperature Sensor. The LT5 was lifted with Headers, Injector Housing, Alternator, Pressure Plate, Belt Tensioner, and lower engine Radiator Hose installed. See How to Replace the Wiper Motor

A/C Temp Sensor........................Wiper Motor.........Do NOT use standard Lift Eyes installing LT5 with Headers
https://cimg2.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...59b560d655.jpg
https://cimg6.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...d59073e82d.jpg

The Hood was NOT REMOVED for this installation of the LT5 with Fuel Rails, Plenum, and Bell Housing installed on the LT5 after the LT5 installation in the ZR1.

2. LT5 Lifting Attachments.

Make sure the LT5 sits level from side to side and a Leveler Bar is used to tip the engine to the rear. Do not use the standard Lift eyes (Passenger side rear and Drivers side front) because as you tilt the engine to the rear the load leveler will shift to the Drivers side rotating the engine lower on the passenger side. I use nylon straps around Harmonic Balancer (front) and Pressure Plate (rear). The LT5 then does not rotate from side to side with each Header remaining at the same height. The LT5 can be tilted to the rear with the Load Leveler.

See Lifting the LT5
https://cimg8.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...c6c73fde5e.jpg

Last UPDATE of post 88 Dec, 2017

Dynomite 09-14-2012 07:11 AM

ECM Chip and Other Electrical Connectors
 
ECM Chip and Other Electrical Connectors

1. Installing the ECM Chip.

Remove two 10mm nuts from ECM bracket. Remove ECM and flip upside down toward center of engine.

https://cimg0.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...177d4b4ddb.jpg
https://cimg1.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...81417af467.jpg

Remove four 6 mm head bolts using short socket extension and find ECM with Chip end locks in position.

https://cimg6.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...65efca29f2.jpghttps://cimg8.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...a24cc04269.jpg

Flip Chip End Locks outward and remove chip.

https://cimg0.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...b7106a5e0d.jpghttps://cimg3.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...a13fadbb96.jpg

Bottom of ECM (electrical connectors and locking tabs). Top of ECM (electrical connectors and locking tabs).

https://cimg5.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...1744b6ee99.jpghttps://cimg7.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...e97e1e1cc7.jpg

2. Battery Connections.

For Battery Connections I carry an 5/16 inch Flex Head Ratchet Combination Wrench in the Center Console.

https://cimg8.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...71dc2b2c18.jpg

3. Other Connections.

Last UPDATE of post 89 Dec, 2017

Dynomite 09-14-2012 07:13 AM

Installing Alternator, AC Pump, Power Steering Pump
 
Installing Alternator, AC Pump, Power Steering Pump

The Alternator, Injector Housing, Belt Tensioner, and Headers were installed on the engine before the LT5 was lifted into the ZR1. The AC pump and Power Steering Pump were installed with the Ignition Coils, and Fuel rails (Purge and Cruize control vacuum lines) after the LT5 was installed in the ZR1.

https://cimg0.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...1ac90ab212.jpg

1. Serpentine Belt Path.
A tad shorter Serpentine Belt (I recall a Belt by Gates approximately 79.5 inch belt). This belt is perfect length very tight installation with belt tensioner fully compressed during installation of belt. Serpentine Belt installed after engine, AC compressor, Power Steering pump and Alternator installed. The Serpentine Belt Path is shown on a 95' LT5.

2. Specialized Racing Pulleys.
Specialized Racing
a. Billet Aluminum Water Pump Pulley.
b. Billet Aluminum Power Steering Pulley.

https://cimg2.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...d289f87e45.jpg

3. Evaporator Installation.

Use Silicon Seal as gasket material between the two halves of the Evaporator box. Also use Silicon Seal around the inlet and outlet pipes (top and bottom) of the Evaporator Box.

https://cimg3.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...ae0d791340.jpghttps://cimg4.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...92681bb572.jpg

Last UPDATE of post 90 Dec, 2017

Dynomite 09-14-2012 07:15 AM

Installing Fuel Rails and Ignition Coils
 
Installing Fuel Rails and Ignition Coils

1. Secondaries.

This particular LT5 (91') rebuild excludes Secondaries. See 1990 LT5 Specific Top End Rebuild Tricks for complete restoration of Secondaries.

Secondary Vacuum System Removed
https://cimg5.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...3d8d6d4380.jpg

If Secondaries were installed the vacuum cannisters should be set up as noted below:

Vacuum Cannister showing "L" connection.......Vacuum Cannister installed "correctly"
https://cimg6.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...ef8aeb4983.jpghttps://cimg8.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...0b02f5bdaf.jpg

Under Plenum with Secondaries Removed
https://cimg9.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...9093bbe078.jpg

2. Ignition Coils.

The Ignition Coils Base is installed with the right side electrical connections to the Alternator and TB/Air Intake installed above the passenger side of the Ignition Coil Base.

3. Cruise Control and EVAP Purge System.

The Fuel Tank Purge Solenoid is installed with the front two Ignition Coil Base bolts with the vacuum connections facing the Drivers side of the engine. The Cruize Control Vacuum check valve is intstalled (sits but not tied down) just in front of the Fuel Tank Purge Solenoid with the vacuum line going forward to the Cruize control Reservoir to the Drivers side of the AC Compressor.

The Cruize Control Vacuum is taken from the passenger side of plenum. From there one vacuum line goes to the cruize control under ECM (one line) and the second line goes to the cruize control switch on steeringwheel column (second line).
The EVAP Purge system draws vacuum from under front of Plenum and through the Solenoid valve. When the Solenoid valve is activated, vacuum is directed out the right side under Plenum back along the passenger side frame rail to the fuel tank.

Cruize Control Vacuum System ...................................EVAP Purge Vacuum System with Solenoid
https://cimg1.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...74be8bcd03.jpghttps://cimg2.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...8db21e3f0c.jpg

Marc and Pete suggested to eliminate the EVAP Purge circuit completely and capping off that vacuum source under front of plenum. I just replaced my charcoal cannister and Marc says he does not address that removal in the chip as it has no effect. I left that associated vacuum and electrical connection including the Evap Purge solenoid in place under the plenum.

4. Fuel Rails.

Lubricate the Injector "O" rings before installing the Fuel Rails. The Fuel Tank Purge and Cruze Control Vacuum Lines exit the Plenum area under the Fuel Rails to the Passenger side of the engine. The Fuel Line Connections to the Fuel rails are installed AFTER the Passenger Side Plenum bolt closest to the Fire Wall is installed.

I use RC SL4-205 injectors (500+ hp). Tech Info - LT5 RC SL4-205 injectors (500+ hp) Calculations
The RC Secondary come with Blue Caps covering the "O" ring. The Blue Caps must be removed before installing the RC Secondary Injectors.

https://cimg3.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...e9ffcfb9a6.jpg

"O" Rings in IH and on Injectors......Primary LEFT ("O" Ring in IH) and Secondary RIGHT ("O" Ring on Injector)

Used just a tad of white grease on the "O" rings (Primary and Secondary Injectors) for easy installation of injectors.

https://cimg4.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...cb55748517.jpg

5. Fuel Lines Bracket.

A more substantial Bracket was fabricated out of Billet Aluminum for attachment of the fuel lines on top of the Evaporator Housing.

https://cimg7.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...275ad5ccec.jpghttps://cimg8.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...244543f55e.jpg

Last UPDATE of post 91 Dec, 2017

Dynomite 09-14-2012 07:16 AM

Installing Plenum, TB, and Air Cleaner
 
Installing Plenum, TB, and Air Cleaner

The Plenum removal and insallation is much easier with the blocked TB coolant and Secondaries Removed. The Purge Vacuum Line and the Cruize Control Vacuum line shown on top of the Passenger side Fuel Rail actually are installed UNDER the fuel rail.

https://cimg4.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...7dbb0234a8.jpg

1. Eliminating Throttle Body (TB) Coolant system.

Install 1/8 inch NPT allen head pipe plugs (21/64 or 11/32 drill) two each side of Plenum (Two each TB Coolant and Injector Housing (IH) Coolant) as shown (The associated two IH coolant ports in the IH can also be plugged on each side).

See Summit Racing for Aluminum Pipe Plugs.

Remove hose and tubing left and right side of plenum, plug hose return to coolant tank passenger side. Initial Coolant Fill may be somewhat affected by the TB Coolant Elimination (see item #4 Filling With Coolant and the Air Locked Water Pump).

https://cimg7.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...1ae30e064e.jpg

Note: The TB coolant path back to the passenger side overflow tank does provide a path for air and potential air lock to return to that passenger side tank during initial coolant fill. However, the Plenum to TB coolant hose sits only an inch or so above the IH coolant manifolds on the passenger side so the benefit of using that path to bleed air vice the top of the coolant manifolds to the radiator is very small. Marc has decided to bypass the TB coolant (vice eliminate all TB coolant hoses) leaving that coolant path back to the passenger side overflow tank in place to assure issues would not arrise on rebuilds for those unaware of coolant initial filling and water pump potential air locks.I also park on KwikLift sloped upward which assures IH coolant manifolds are voided of air at all times (especially if engine is reved a bit).

The 5th plug (Plenum Vacuum) is for Plenum Vacuum drivers side only which was connected to the vacuum reservoir. The tubing can be removed and a 1/8 inch NPT allen head pipe plug inserted exactly like the plenum coolant plugs.

a. When you run the tap....keep checking the pipe plug for depth so you end up tight and flush.
b. When you run the Drill.......remember you are in ALUMINUM so go very easy and slow!!! (you can do it without a drill press).
c. Use a bit of Permatex gasket sealer or Teflon tape on the pipe plugs.

https://cimg8.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...f26e4b973d.jpg

2. Vacuum Connections.

a. Under Plenum
The Fuel Tank Purge Solenoid is installed with the front two Ignition Coil Base bolts with the vacuum connections facing the Drivers side of the engine. The Cruize Control Vacuum check valve is intstalled (sits but not tied down) just in front of the Fuel Tank Purge Solenoid with the vacuum line going forward to the Cruize control Reservoir to the Drivers side of the AC Compressor.

The Cruize Control Vacuum is taken from the passenger side of plenum. From there one vacuum line goes to the cruize control under ECM (one line) and the second line goes to the cruize control switch on steeringwheel column (second line).
The EVAP Purge system draws vacuum from under front of Plenum and through the Solenoid valve. When the Solenoid valve is activated, vacuum is directed out the right side under Plenum back along the passenger side frame rail to the fuel tank.

Cruize Control Vacuum System ...................................EVAP Purge Vacuum System with Solenoid

https://cimg1.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...74be8bcd03.jpghttps://cimg2.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...8db21e3f0c.jpg

b. Rear of Plenum
The MAP Sensor, Fuel Pressure Regulator, Brake Boost vacuum lines were connected at the rear of the Plenum.
The PCV vacuum line going through the Oil Catch Can has also been added.
See Details for Oil Catch Can Installation.

3. Electrical Connections.

Tools
Used a 1/4 inch socket wrench with short extension and 1/4 inch socket to install the bolt in the DIS module electrical connection from rear of plenum with plenum up 3 inches (DIS attached under the Plenum).

Used a 3/8 inch socket wrench with 6 mm allen heads for plenum SS bolts.

https://cimg1.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...fcf2090a00.jpghttps://cimg2.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...7ef5b7e4f2.jpg

The 4 connectors on the ignition module under the plenum are not interchangeable. The 2 towards the front carry the coil primary controls signal. The small one at the back of the module is the Crankshaft Position Sensor. The big one at the back of the module carries ECM signals.

a. Attach two smaller electrical plugs under plenum from rear of plenum.
b. Attach two larger electrical plugs to underside of DIS from front of plenum.

Last UPDATE of post 92 Dec, 2017

Dynomite 09-14-2012 11:28 AM

Filling With Coolant and the Air Locked Water Pump
 
1. Filling With Coolant (The Air Locked Water Pump).
See item #3 of LT5 Radiator and Initial Coolant Fill Tricks for a general description of the radiator Fill Technique.

See LT5 Air Locked Water Pump Simplified for the Simplified Discussion regarding The Air Locked Water Pump.

Many try to get rid of the air trapped around the water pump by raising the engine and other means.

Trouble is.......no amount of "burping by gravity" will get that air out of the air locked water pump. You can blow (with your own lungs) a pressure of 5 ft of water as a comparison to lifting one side of the ZR1 or LT5 only a few inches higher. You may get lucky and the water pump spin up a little water to start flushing air but usually that is not the case.

The problem is that the Water Pump cavity is above the outlet ports (red line in photo). Air gets stalled above the water line and the pump becomes air locked spinning the air with no water movement.

https://cimg3.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...b3ce27f37c.jpg

2. Explanation (The Air Locked Water Pump).
As you can see in the photo, just raisng the Z or other gravity solutions may get a bit more water in the water pump because you are lifiting one port higher than the other. You may get lucky and after a couple trials get enough air out of the water pump by gravity. The Best Method is to FORCE the air out of the Water Pump.

a. There is most likely air trapped in top part of Water Pump area. When the water pump is rotated most of the time that is enough to pull water in from the intake hose going down replacing air initiating a hydrodynamic flow.
b. Sometimes on occasions, there is not enough water pulled in or already in that area such that the hydrodynamic flow is initiated leaving only air spinning around.
c. When you lift the car on passenger side say 18 inches you prolly lift that passenger side coolant port a few inches above the drivers side coolant port which will help but the water level in the water pump will remain horizontal with that level moved upward to the highest port. So you have replaced some air with water but not much.

A. Disconnect the Drivers side Injector Housing Coolant Manifold "L" from the Drivers side Injector Housing Coolant Manifold and rotate that "L" up connected to the Drivers side Coolant Crossover Pipe.

https://cimg5.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...9796557e98.jpg

Attach a second "L" to the Injector Housing Coolant Manifold rotated up and fill that "L" with coolant. Blow into that "L" forcing coolant into the water pump through the Drivers side Injector Housing Coolant Manifold (Only blow in steps refilling the "L" with coolant each blow effort). You can see in the photo that by blowing coolant into the Drivers Side of the water pump air will be forced out to the top level of the impeller with only a small amount of air left on the passenger side of the water pump.

https://cimg3.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...b3ce27f37c.jpghttps://cimg7.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...8da3221339.jpg

B. Refill the Drivers Side "L" temporarily connected to the Drivers Side Coolant Manifold with coolant and do that trick a couple times until the coolant flows out of the Drivers Side Crossover "L" that has been rotated up.

When you blow (force) coolant into Port A of the Water Pump (Blowing in steps) you replace the yellow area of Air with Water. The Air is forced out the top and down left side through Port B. (Only blow in steps refilling the "L" with coolant each blow effort).

Do NOT rely on the temperature gauge to tell you if the Water Pump is functioning. If the two Injector Housing Coolant Manifolds are NOT getting warm rather quickly (within 1 minute), your coolant is NOT flowing.

3. A simplified Method......I fill with Coolant/Distilled Water. Then the BIG Secret......
A. I use a vice grips and close off the coolant to the Plastic Overflow under Passenger Headlight.
B. I fill Black Coolant Reservoir in front of passenger side window and when the bubbling stops.....Blow into/pressurize that Reservoir holding pressure for about 10 seconds. More bubbles will come from the top of the radiator hose. I refill with Distilled Water and Blow into/pressurize the Coolant System again. I repeat this maybe three times until no bubbles come back from the top of the Radiator. I then replace the Coolant Reservoir Cap and remove Vice Grips.....and fire up the LT5 keeping a hand on the Injector Housing Coolant Manifolds to assure they get warm within a minute. (That Happens with this method of Coolant Filling 100% of the time).

With this procedure you are pressurizing both sides of the radiator but with each pressurizing cycle more coolant is being pushed into the coolant system and more air is bubbling out from the top of the radiator.

4. Coolant Overflow Under Passenger Side Headlight.
When the engine is Hot I fill the Coolant Overflow reservoir to within an inch of the top. On a Hot Engine the coolant overflow is filled by the expanding hot coolant to its maximum fill. As the engine cools the coolant is then sucked back into the engine.

What happens after doing some coolant draining during Plenum Pull or thermostat installations, is the engine develops Air Pockets in the coolant system. As the engine warms up to Hot these Air Pockets are pushed out of the engine into the Coolant Overflow. Once the Air gets into the Coolant Overflow the air is caught at the top of the coolant never to return to the engine (Which is exactly the purpose of the Coolant Overflow).

All the Air caught within the engine is flushed out by the Water Pump as you rev the engine once the engine has reached optimum temperature. The Air ends up within the Top Side of the Radiator where that Air is pushed out of the radiator into the top of the Black Coolant Reservoir in front of the Passenger Side Windshield. From their the air is forced into the Coolant Overflow as the Hot Air and Hot Coolant expands during engine Warm Up to Engine Hot.

If after several cycles of Engine Operation the Coolant Overflow continues to loose Coolant, You Have a Coolant Leak in your System.

Last UPDATE of post 93 Dec, 2017

Dynomite 09-14-2012 11:28 AM

Preliminary Starting Checks
 
Preliminary Starting Checks

Charged Battery, checked for all vacuum systems connected to Plenum, and Checked all electrical connections connected to DIS module under Plenum. Made sure no electrical connections are near exhaust manifolds and all heat shields were in place.

Fired it up in one minute....idled smooth at 800 rpm.

https://cimg9.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...53cc9d12e7.jpg
https://cimg0.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...f60453da2b.jpg

Last UPDATE of post 94 Dec, 2017

Dynomite 09-14-2012 11:29 AM

Engine Running First Time Checks
 
Engine Running First Time Checks

SW Headers ZR1CORVOR and SW Exhaust ZR1CHAMSW Video Sound Clips

Purged Coolant system of air by blowing coolant into Water Pump Area. Run engine only for a a minute or two to confirm that the IH housing manifolds are getting warm. Oil pressure was confirmed at over 70 psi (cold) and temperature opening at 180 deg confirmed on dash gauges as engine heated up.

https://cimg9.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...53cc9d12e7.jpg
https://cimg0.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...f60453da2b.jpg

Keep in mind...this is the SW OFFROAD Headers and Exhaust which would be least restrictive.
No Air Induction and NO EGR.

To explain....this is the 91' with cams, no secondaries and with full porting. The 90' is essentially stock with secondaries in place which sound video I will make mid July for ya. I am sure that will sound just a tad different but with identical SW Headers and Exhaust. Both the 90' and 91' have Marc Haibeck Chips :thumbs:

All the Stuff is located in my public profile...just click on my ID or any link in Signature.

And for the record......I had a CHP (California Highway Patrol on Motorcycle) follow me last year (2012) right on my tail for about 1/2 mile trying to determine if he should stop me or not. I seen him coming and was cruizing at a very mild 45 mph on a back country road. He finally just thought (forget it Just guessing what he was thinking) and went around me leaving me ALL ALONE to enjoy my SW Headers and SW Exhaust. I am sure he ran my South Dakota License plates and seen I have NO tickets of any kind.

Kind of like this .....you cannot outrun CHP ;)
https://cimg7.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...76918fd759.jpg

Last UPDATE of post 95 Dec, 2017

Dynomite 09-14-2012 11:29 AM

Summary of 91' Reconditioning/Modifications
 
Summary of 91' Reconditioning/Modifications

1. New Starter.
2. New 60/80 amp No Start Relay installed.
3. New Ron Davis radiator.
4. New 180 deg thermostat.
5. New Water pump.
6. New Red Samco hoses.
7. New Stainless powder coated cross over pipe.
8. Billet Aluminum Belt Tensioner Pulley Added.
https://cimg8.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...a7425d75f7.jpg
9. New Serpentine Belt (Gates K060798).
10. New Jeffvette braided stainless steel oil cooler lines.
11. New 200 amp alternator.
12. New Randy Woods Aluminum power steering pump pulley.
13. New Randy Woods Aluminum water pump pulley.
14. New Front cover oil seal.
15. New Primary timing chain.
16. New Primary timing chain guide.
17. New coils.
18. New LT5 plug wires.
19. New plugs NGK Iridium BKR5EIX.
20. New Randy Woods LT5X Head Studs.
21. New LH chain tension.
22. New RH chain tension (new style.)
23. New Jeffvette Billet aluminum Camshaft Retainers.
24. New Mellings JB 2236 Lifters.
25. New Elite Oil catch can.
26. New Revolution Marines Pre Oiler.
27. New RC SL4-205 injectors on fuel rails with new "O" rings.
28. New SW headers ZR1CORVOR.
29. New SW exhaust ZR1CHAMSW.

Copper spacer added (two each 1 x 6 inch copper pipe
with coupler and end caps) to keep SW exhaust 1/4 inch
away from riding against Differential Housing. The end caps
and coupler actually keep the spacer in place without any ties.


https://cimg9.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...68d2d95e9e.jpghttps://cimg0.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...2bd59a6cdd.jpg

I set the two rear hangers so they pull the exaust up tight against
the copper spacer. Also set the rear "L" hanger so there is freedom
of the exhaust system to move to the rear at least 1/2 inch when hot
.

30. New Crankshaft rear oil seal housing gasket.
31. New Crankshaft rear oil seal.
32. New Center Force pressure plate.
33. New Center Force unsprung clutch plate.
34. New Throwout bearing.
35. New 95' ZF S6-40 Transmission.
36. New C4 Beam Plates.
37. New Differential oil drain plug (drilled and tapped).
38. New Differential oil drain plug.
39. New Brake pads in C5 Z06 calipers.
40. New Nitto NT 555 Extreme Performance FRONT.
41. New Nitto NT 555R Drag Radials REAR.
42. New Billet Aluminum oil cap.
43. New Cam Cover PCV FIlters from Marc Haibeck.
44. SS Air Intake Added (George Braml).
45. New Chrome Dip Stick Tube (LT5-1935).
46. New LED tail/brake lights (48 LED per light).
47. New Billet aluminum tail light louvers.
48. New LED CHMSL lights (6 LED per bulb).
49. Fluids Zerex Original 1825 on label antifreeze.
50. Fluids Mobile 1 75W-90 Differential oil (limited slip.
51. Fluids Mobil 1 M1-207 Oil filter.
52. Fluids Amsoil 10W-40 AMO Engine oil.
53. Fluids Castrol TWS 10W-60 Transmission oil .
54. Eliminated Secondary actuators.
55. Eliminated Secondary vacuum system.
56. Eliminated Plenum coolant.
57. Eliminated Throttle body coolant.
58. Eliminated Air Induction system.
59. Eliminated CATS.
60. Upgraded Powder coated air horn.
61. Upgraded Powder coated throttle body.
62. Upgraded Engraved throttle body (Carter.).
63. Upgraded Cam timing 114In 108Ex .
64. Upgraded Powder coated plenum.
65. Upgraded Powder coated injector housings.
66. Upgraded Powder coated coolant manifolds.
67. Upgraded Engraved coolant manifolds (Carter).
68. Upgraded Ported injector housings/plenum (Locobob).
69. Upgraded Ported heads/injector housing (Locobob).
70. Upgraded Ported Air Horn (Locobob).
71. Upgraded Regrind Intake Camshaft Intake .236 .425 (Pete).
72. Upgraded Regrind Exhaust Camshaft Exhaust .220 .425 (Pete.)
73. Upgraded Valves reconditioned.
74. Upgraded C5 Z06 calipers and Wilwood two piece rotors.
75. Upgraded C5 Z06 calipers repainted.
76. Upgraded Bose radio/CD player.
77. Upgraded Door amplifyers.
78. Relocated Oil Pressure Sensor.
79. Like New Red hard top from my 90 L98.

80. Modified Marc Haibeck chip.
a. 87 octane calibration.
b. Ignition spark advance reduced 10% from 91 octane calibration.
c. 25 deg at WOT.
d. Enabled manual transmission.
e. Both fans to go on at 205 and both off at 200 degs.
f. Fuel added to support +100 HP.
g. Anti-backfire mode enabled.
h. CAGS (1 to 4 shift) disabled.
i. Secondary Port Throttle Control removed.
j. Power key mode default is ON.

81. Modified Marc Haibeck chip.
a. 91 octane calibration.
b. Ignition spark advance increased 10% at all engine speeds.
c. 25 deg + 3 deg = 28 deg at WOT.
d. Enabled manual transmission.
e. Both fans to go on at 205 and both off at 200 degs.
f. Fuel added to support +125 HP.
g. Anti-backfire mode enabled.
h. Knock retard reduced by 50%.
i. CAGS (1 to 4 shift) disabled.
j. Secondary Port Throttle Control removed.
k. Power key mode default is ON.

1991 ZR-1 (LT5)

This is a 1991 ZR-1 (LT5) with SW Headers, SW exhaust and ZF S6-40 Transmission. The modifications include eliminated secondary vacuum system, eliminated plenum coolant, eliminated Throttle body coolant, eliminated air induction system, and eliminated CATS. Haibeck Chips and some other stuff are also included.

https://cimg1.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...e44da7dff2.jpghttps://cimg2.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...4c3094be49.jpg
https://cimg3.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...1d53de63db.jpg
https://cimg4.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...d63d55d1ba.jpghttps://cimg5.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...2955be300f.jpg
https://cimg6.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...e2ecc7758b.jpg

Last UPDATE of post 96 Dec, 2017

Dynomite 09-14-2012 11:29 AM

Checking for abnormal noise and leaks LT5 engine
 
Checking for abnormal noise and leaks LT5 engine

Sometimes the valve train may become out of adjust or failures with the first symtoms an abnormal ticking or clattering sound. These type noises are abnormal aside from the initial startup chain tensioner slackness slap from time to time. One can start by conducting an engine compression check.

1. General Top End Checks.
1. Do a compression check (looking for 230 psi more or less but definitely even on all 8 cylinders).
2. Remove some coolant below level of IH housing.
3. Remove Plenum.
4. Check ALL vacuum systems, purge system, cruize and HVAC vacuum including secondary throttle system (not in your case).
5. Check resistance of ALL injectors (12.1 ohms).
6. Remove and inspect coils, starter (and electrical connections) and clean valley including valley drain tube.
7. When you are there....look at the ground wires each side on block just above Bell Housing....remove ground bolt, clean and replace.
8. Remove TB coolant and plug coolant flow to Plenum (so next time you remove plenum you do not have to mess with coolant).
9. Replace gasket on Crankcase ventilation cover.
10. Check operation of secondaries (not in your case if you have eliminated secondaries).
11. Remove Cam Covers and check cams, two Cam Cover PCV filters and two upper cam cover chain guides.
12. Check Camshaft Timing by visual looking in front Camshaft Retainer Camshaft pinning hole (crankshaft at 51 deg BTDC).
13. Remove and inspect Belt Tensioner.
14. Check all Water pump bolts and maybe replace water pump gasket.
15. Replace Charcoal Canister.

16. Powder Coat Plenum, TB, Air Horn.
17. Carter Bling IH Coolant Manifolds, TB plate.
18. Remove Air Induction and stock Exhaust system and add SW Headers and SW Exhaust.
19. Add Marc Haibeck Chip for Exhaust (not in your case as you already have Marc Chip).
20. Replace all Plenum and Cam Cover Torx bolts with Allen Head SS bolts from Jerry's Gaskets.
21. Have already replaced all fluids (engine, transmission, differential, coolant) including adding differential drain plug ;)

Have on hand in addition to some gaskets Loctite 242 Blue (use on bolts that may be removed from time to time), Loctite 262 Red (use on bolts that yoiu do not plan to remove), and Loctite 518 (Cam Covers).

2. Compression Check.
The compression check should be conducted with Cam Covers in place as suggested when a question came up if a compression check could be made with Cam Covers Off with the Camshaft Retainers holding the Camshaft in position.

I think (I have never had reason to do it) those camshaft retainers WILL hold the camshaft in place (however the cams will be loose in the bearing areas since the retainers have more clearance than the cam covers. Having said that, I would place the cam covers on snugged up for the simple reason you will not get oil all over the engine when you turn it over for the compression test. I have Billet Aluminum camshaft retainers by Jeffvette which are considerably more substantial.
https://cimg8.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...59dcde43d4.jpghttps://cimg9.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...14ae33f777.jpg
https://cimg0.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...3ba529eb36.jpg

3. Inspection of Timing Chains and Guides.
I would turn the engine over by hand to inspect the timing chains LT5 Timing Chain Calculations
Also inspect the timing chain guides (as much as possible with a light in that area) including the guide installed in the cam covers. Good time to replace the camshaft cover filter in each cam cover (Marc Haibeck) http://www.zr1specialist.com/HAT%20W...r%20filter.htm

4. Inspection of Lifters.
The lifters should be tight against the base circle which can be checked by pushing on individual lifters (valve closed) to see if any lifters feel different than other lifters under that cam cover.

5. Bottom End Inspection.
Then remove the oil pan (cam covers back on) and have someone turn the eingine over slowly to see if anything appears out of order. Look for debris in the oil pan from top end or bottom end.

6. Summary of Abnormal Noise Sources.
You could have broken valve springs, broken valves, valves stuck partially open for some reason, or bad lifters all of which could cause some ticking you are hearing.

But one thing at a time. I always do the above checks once in a while even if I do not hear ticking just as a precaution :D

7. Loctite 518 (Permabond A136 from Jerrys Gaskets now recommended) for Reinstallation of Cam Covers.
Whenever you mess around with cam covers have some Loctite 518 handy. One tube is enough for two cam covers. Use Loctite 518 very thin coat on mating surface of cam covers. Do not coat 518 Loctite all the way to the edge of the journals (stay away 1/4 inch). Coat the grooves for the two camshaft rubber plugs on each end of each Cam Cover and same on each end of each head Cam Cover Installation Tricks

https://cimg1.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...bd76223243.jpg

Jerry's gaskets for gaskets......Ventilation cover, IH, Plenum, IH coolant manifolds, water pump gaskets.
Marc Haibeck for Cam Cover PCV filter, Upper Cam Cover Chain Guides, Chip, and correct 180 deg thermostat.
Ebay for Loctite.

Last UPDATE of post 97 Dec, 2017

Dynomite 09-14-2012 11:29 AM

Number 8 Spark Plug Removal and Test Drive with Jeff Gordon
 
Number 8 Spark Plug Removal and Test Drive with Jeff Gordon

1. Blackhawk 5/8 Spark Plug Swivel Socket 3/8" Drive :thumbs:

If you have ever had an issue finding just the right spark plug socket for that number 8 cylinder that is too close to the temperature controller on the Heater and A/C Housing....here is the answere and these 5/8 inch swivel sockets come with a nice tight rubber insert :cheers:

If you use a 3" x 3/8" extension, lube the rubber insert in the Spark Plug Socket to make sure the Spark Plug Socket lets go of the Spark Plug before the extension lets go of the Spark Plug Socket when installing plugs :D

Blackhawk 5/8" Spark Plug Swivel Socket 3/8" Drive :yesnod:

https://cimg2.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...05a67ab635.jpg

2. Test Drive with Jeff Gordon :D


Last UPDATE of post 98 Dec, 2017

Dynomite 09-14-2012 11:29 AM

Adapting 91 IH to 90 Heads
 
Adapting 91 IH to 90 Heads.
Three Dorman 550-013 plugs (two plugs drilled 7/32) were used to restrict IH PVC ports of the 91 IH (90 Heads do not have the required restriction).

https://cimg3.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...cd9fbb3653.jpg


Last UPDATE of post 99 Dec, 2017

Dynomite 09-14-2012 11:30 AM

ZR-1 and LT5 Tools
 
ZR-1 and LT5 Tools

NEW 95' ZF S6-40 Transmission (Blue Label)..Harbor Freight 800 lb Capacity Transmisison Jack
https://cimg4.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...cce7c074b0.jpghttps://cimg7.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...d51b1da9e3.jpg

1. Transmission Jack
The Transmission Jack works perfectly with the ZR1 on KwikLift 18 inches off the ground (Perfect height). The 800 lb Capacity Transmission Jack has roll and tilt adjustments for a perfect match when locating the transmission on the Bell Housing (Clutch depressed last 2 inches of installation). The only trick is you have to lift transmission on Transmission Jack while under the Z (takes two). The transmission (on Transmission Jack) cannot be rolled under KwiKLift from side or front because of shifter (unless you initially sit transmission on Transmission Jack rotated 90 degrees).

A transmission jack is not to expensive and Harbor Freight sells one for $129.

2. KwikLift
https://cimg8.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...16cd99fae3.jpg
a. KwikLift (wheels 18 inches off ground).
b. KwikLift Creeper (Perfect with KwikLift).
c. Park Z on KwikLift for ease of inspection under engine.
d. Key in ignition, release park brake, in neutral.....roll out of garage without starting engine.

https://cimg9.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...585e3d0ddd.jpg

For those of you who feel like a KLUTZ (Like I did) when trying to get the Z up on an inclined ramp such as KwikLift for repairs when the Z is in non operable condition.....here is a solution.

As you prolly know, the Z can be towed easily using a chain or synthetic tow rope from either the back end (attached underneath to near center of leaf spring) or front end (attached underneath to center of frame cross member). The Z cannot, however, be pushed by another vehicle (The Z can be hand pushed easily but not up inclines) from either end because of the fiberglass on both ends. See Item #2 Lifting and Towing the ZR-1

I welded a padeye at the center of two 1-1/2 x 1-1/2 x 45 inch long steel box sections welded side by side (1-1/2 x 3 x 45 inch steel beam). I welded two hangers (one on each end of the steel beam). I can just hang the 1-1/2 x 3 x 45 inch steel beam on the end of Kwiklift to pull from the center padeye between each ramp with a wire rope come-a-long attached to the rear or front of any vehicle.

I use a long chain the first two pulls with KwikLift yellow chocks set during resetting of the chain length (the wire rope come-a-long cannot reach from one end of the KwikLift to the other end without starting out with a chain connection).

I call this steel beam KLUTZ (KwikLift Utility Towbar for Zs)
I actually tested the beam (pulled Z up ramp) with just one 1-1/2 x 1-1/2 x 45 inch box section then doubled up in final design.

https://cimg0.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...eef0845c2f.jpghttps://cimg3.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...e2c90d1a88.jpg
https://cimg4.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...9bb403478a.jpghttps://cimg5.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...af3e938578.jpg

3. Hydraulic Aluminum Floor Jack (3 ton)
a. Pittsburgh Racing
b. Very low initial height and weighs 55 lbs.
c. High lift rate.
d. Minimum Saddle Height 3-3/4 inch.
e. Maximum Saddle Height 19-1/4 inch.

3 ton Pittsburgh Racing Aluminum Floor Jack

https://cimg6.ibsrv.net/gimg/www.cor...98bfc2a095.jpg

See Lifting the ZR-1 for a specific discussion regarding lifting the ZR-1 with a floor jack, jackstands, and ramps.

Last UPDATE of post 100 Dec, 2017


All times are GMT -4. The time now is 03:53 AM.


© 2024 MH Sub I, LLC dba Internet Brands